Programming Manual

33116.mx-16 HoTT.3a.en
mx-16
Programming Manual
Contents
General Information
Contents......................................................................... 2
Warning and information symbols a. their meaning........ 3
Environmental protection notes...................................... 3
Safety Notes................................................................... 4
Safety notes and handling instructions relating
to Nickel-Metal-Hydride rechargeable batteries............. 8
Disposal of exhausted dry and rechargeable batt.......... 9
Foreword....................................................................... 10
Description of radio control set..................................... 11
Technical specifications................................................ 13
Recommended battery chargers.................................. 13
Operating notes
Transmitter power supply......................................... 14
Receiver power supply............................................ 16
Adjusting the stick length......................................... 17
Opening the transmitter case.................................. 17
Changing the stick mode......................................... 18
Description of transmitter.......................................... 20
Front of transmitter.................................................. 20
Rear of transmitter................................................... 21
Headphone socket................................................... 21
Mini-USB socket...................................................... 21
Data socket.............................................................. 21
DSC socket.............................................................. 22
Card slot / data storage........................................... 22
Screen and keypad.................................................. 24
Operating the “Data Terminal”.................................. 25
Short-cuts................................................................ 25
Hidden Mode
Language selection
Voice messages............................................ 26
Changing the screen language...................... 27
Firmware update from SD card.......................... 27
2
Contents
Stick calibration.................................................. 27
Telemetry data displays........................................... 30
On-screen warnings................................................ 36
On-screen function fields......................................... 36
Position indicator of rotary controls CTRL 7 + 8...... 37
Input lock................................................................. 37
Using the transmitter for the first time..................... 38
Downloading a firmware package........................... 40
Firmware-update of the transmitter......................... 41
Restoring the transmitter firmware.......................... 44
Using the receiver for the first time.......................... 46
Firmware-update of the receiver.............................. 48
Backing up receiver settings.................................... 52
Installation notes........................................................ 54
Receiving system power supply.............................. 55
Definition of terms........................................................ 58
Switch and transmitter control assignment................... 59
Digital trims................................................................... 60
Fixed-wing model aircraft.......................................... 62
Receiver socket sequence....................................... 63
Servo with incorrect direction of rotation................. 63
Model helicopters....................................................... 64
Receiver socket sequence....................................... 65
Program descriptions
Setting up a new model memory.................................. 66
“Model memories”....................................................... 70
“Base settings” (model)
Fixed-wing model aircraft........................................ 74
Binding receivers.............................................. 80
Range-checking............................................... 80
Model helicopter...................................................... 82
Binding receivers.............................................. 88
Range-checking............................................... 89
“Servo settings”........................................................... 92
“Transmitter control settings”
Fixed-wing model aircraft........................................ 94
Model helicopter...................................................... 96
Throttle limit function.......................................... 99
Basic idle setting................................................. 99
“D/R Expo”
Fixed-wing model aircraft...................................... 102
Model helicopter.................................................... 104
“Phase trim” (fixed-wing)........................................... 106
What is a mixer?......................................................... 108
“Wing mixer”............................................................. 108
“Heli mixer”............................................................... 114
Adjusting throttle and collective pitch curves......... 120
Auto-rotation setting.............................................. 124
General notes re. freely programmable mixers........... 126
“Free mixers”............................................................ 127
Examples............................................................... 131
“Swashplate mixers”................................................ 132
“Servo display”.......................................................... 133
“Basic settings”......................................................... 134
“Fail-Safe”.................................................................. 136
“Telemetry”................................................................ 137
Setting & Data view............................................... 138
Satellite operation with two receivers............... 148
Sensor select......................................................... 150
RF status view....................................................... 151
Selecting voice output........................................... 152
“Trainer mode”.......................................................... 154
Wiring diagrams..................................................... 157
Wireless HoTT system.......................................... 158
“Info display”............................................................ 162
Warning and information symbols and their meaning
Programming examples
WARNING:
This symbol calls attention to the information
next to it and perhaps following it, with which
the user must absolutely comply! Any failure
to comply with this information can impair
the reliable functioning and the safety of the
operator as well as third parties.
Introduction................................................................. 164
Fixed-wing model aircraft
First steps.............................................................. 166
Including an electric power system........................ 170
E-motor and Butterfly (crow) using Ch1 stick........ 172
Operating timers.................................................... 175
Use of flight phases............................................... 176
Servos running in parallel...................................... 177
Deltas and flying wings............................................... 178
F3A models................................................................ 182
Model helicopters....................................................... 186
Appendix
Appendix..................................................................... 194
Conformity declaration................................................ 197
FCC Information......................................................... 198
Guarantee certificate.................................................. 199
ATTENTION:
This symbol calls attention to the information
next to it and perhaps following it, which the
user must absolutely observe! Any failure to
observe this information can result in damage of all kinds, nullify the warranty, et
cetera.
This symbol WITHOUT a specific heading
calls attention to the information next to it
and perhaps following it, or any tips, which
the user should absolutely observe! Any
failure to observe such information or tip can
result in damage of all kinds.
Environmental protection
This symbol on the product, in the operating
instructions or the packaging indicates that
the product must not be discarded via the
normal household refuse at the end of its useful life.
Instead it must be taken to a collection point for the recycling of electrical and electronic apparatus.
The materials can be re-used according to their identification code. You can make an important contribution to
the protection of our shared environment by recycling
old equipment and making use of its
basic materials.
Dry and rechargeable batteries must
be removed from the device and taken
to the appropriate collection point.
Please ask your local authority for the
location of your nearest waste disposal site.
This symbol calls attention to information
and tips of all kinds, which should be
observed by the user.
P
This symbol calls attention to information on
the maintenance of the device, which should
absolutely be observed by the user in order
to ensure the long service life of the device.
The sole purpose of this manual is to provide
information; it is subject to amendment
without prior notification. Graupner accepts
no responsibility or liability for errors or inaccuracies
which may occur in the information section of this
manual.
Contents
3
Safety Notes
Please read carefully!
We all want you to have many hours of pleasure in our
mutual hobby of modelling, and safety is an important
aspect of this. It is absolutely essential that you read
right through these instructions and take careful note
of all our safety recommendations. We also strongly
recommend that you register without delay at https://
www.graupner.de/en/service/product_registration.aspx,
as this ensures that you automatically receive the latest
information relating to your product by e-mail.
If you are a beginner to the world of radio-controlled
model aircraft, boats and cars, we strongly advise that
you seek out an experienced modeller in your field, and
ask him or her for help and advice.
If you ever dispose of this transmitter, these instructions
must be passed on to the new owner.
Application
This radio control system may only be used
for the purpose for which the manufacturer
intended it, i. e. for operating radio-controlled
models which do not carry humans. No other type of use
is approved or permissible.
ATTENTION:
SAFETY IS NO ACCIDENT and
RADIO-CONTROLLED MODELS ARE NOT
PLAYTHINGS
Even small models can cause serious personal injury
and damage to property if they are handled incompetently, or if an accident occurs due to the fault of others.
Technical problems in electrical and mechanical systems can cause motors to rev up or burst into life unexpectedly, with the result that parts may fly off at great
speed, causing considerable injury.
Short-circuits of all kinds must be avoided at all times.
Safety Notes
4
Short-circuits can easily destroy parts of the radio control system, but even more dangerous is the acute risk
of fire and explosion, depending on the circumstances
and the energy content of the batteries.
Aircraft and boat propellers, helicopter rotors, open
gearboxes and all other rotating parts which are driven
by a motor or engine represent a constant injury hazard.
Do not touch these items with any object or part of your
body. Remember that a propeller spinning at high speed
can easily slice off a finger! Ensure that no other object
can make contact with the driven components.
Never stand in the primary danger zone, i. e. in the rotational plane of the propeller or other rotating parts, when
the motor is running or the drive battery is connected.
Please note that a glowplug engine or electric motor
could burst into life accidentally if the receiving system
is switched on when you are transmitting the transmitter.
To be on the safe side, disconnect the fueltank or the
flight battery.
Protect all electronic equipment from dust, dirt, damp,
and foreign bodies. Avoid subjecting the equipment
to vibration and excessive heat or cold. Radio control
equipment should only be used in “normal” ambient
temperatures, i. e. within the range -10°C to +55°C.
Avoid subjecting the equipment to shock and pressure.
Check the units at regular intervals for damage to cases
and leads. Do not re-use any item which is damaged or
has become wet, even after you have dried it out thoroughly.
Use only those components and accessories which
we expressly recommend. Be sure to use only genuine
matching Graupner connectors of the same design with
contacts of the same material.
When deploying cables ensure that they are not under
strain, are not tightly bent (kinked) or broken. Avoid
sharp edges, as they can chafe through insulating
materials.
Before you use the system, check that all connectors
are pushed home firmly. When disconnecting components, pull on the connectors themselves – not on the
wires.
It is not permissible to carry out any modifications to the
RC system components, as any such changes invalidate
both your operating licence and your insurance cover.
Installing the receiving system
In a model aircraft the receiver must be
packed in soft foam and stowed behind a
stout bulkhead, and in a model boat or car it
should be protected effectively from dust and spray.
The receiver must not make direct contact with the
fuselage, hull or chassis at any point, otherwise motor
vibration and landing shocks will be transmitted directly
to it. When installing the receiving system in a model
with a glowplug or petrol engine, be sure to install all
the components in well-protected positions, so that no
exhaust gas or oil residues can reach the units and
get inside them. This applies above all to the ON / OFF
switch, which is usually installed in the outer skin of the
model.
Secure the receiver in such a way that the aerial, servo
leads and switch harness are not under any strain. The
receiver aerial should be at least 5 cm away from all
large metal parts and any wiring which is not connected
directly to the receiver. This includes steel and carbon
fibre components, servos, electric motors, fuel pumps,
cabling of all kinds, etc..
Ideally the receiver should be installed well away from
any other installed equipment in the model, but in an
easily accessible position. Under no circumstances
allow servo leads to run close to the aerial, far less
coiled round it!
Ensure that cables are fastened securely, so that they
cannot move close to the receiver aerial when the model
is flying.
Deploying the receiver aerial(s)
The receiver and its aerials should be installed as far
away as possible from all kinds of power system. If your
model has a carbon fibre fuselage, the aerial tips must
always be deployed outside the fuselage. The orientation
of the aerial(s) is not critical, but we recommend installing them vertically (upright) in the model. If the receiver
features aerial diversity (two aerials), the second aerial
should be arranged at 90° to the first.
Installing the servos
Always install servos using the vibration-damping
grommets supplied. The rubber grommets provide some
degree of protection from mechanical shock and severe
vibration.
Installing control linkages
The basic rule is that all linkages should be installed in
such a way that the pushrods move accurately, smoothly
and freely. It is particularly important that all servo output
arms can move to their full extent without fouling or
rubbing on anything, or being obstructed mechanically
at any point in their travel.
It is essential that you should be able to stop your motor
at any time. With a glow motor this is achieved by adjusting the throttle so that the barrel closes completely when
you move the throttle stick and trim to their end-points.
Ensure that no metal parts are able to rub against each
other, e. g. when controls are operated, when parts
rotate, or when motor vibration affects the model. Metal-to-metal contact causes electrical “noise” which can
interfere with the correct working of the receiver.
Directing the transmitter aerial
Transmitter field strength is at a minimum in an imaginary line extending straight out from the transmitter
aerial. It is therefore fundamentally misguided to “point”
the transmitter aerial at the model with the intention of
obtaining good reception.
When several radio control systems are in use on adjacent channels, the pilots should always stand together in
a loose group. Pilots who insist on standing away from
the group endanger their own models as well as those
of the other pilots.
However, if two or more pilots operating 2.4 GHz radio
control systems stand closer together than 5 m, the
down-link channel may be swamped, triggering a very
premature range warning. If this should occur, walk
away from the other pilots until the range warning
ceases again.
Pre-flight checking
Before you switch on the receiver, ensure that the
throttle stick is at the stop / idle end-point.
Always switch on the transmitter first,
and only then the receiver.
Always switch off the receiver first,
and only then the transmitter.
ATTENTION:
If you do not keep to this sequence, i. e. if the
receiver is at any time switched on when “its”
transmitter is switched OFF, then the receiver is wide open to signals from other transmitters and
any interference, and may respond. The model could
then carry out uncontrolled movements, which could
easily result in personal injury or damage to property.
Please take particular care if your model is fitted with
a mechanical gyro: before you switch your receiver off,
disconnect the power supply to ensure that the motor
cannot run up to high speed accidentally.
As it runs down, the gyro can generate such a high
voltage that the receiver picks up apparently valid
throttle commands, and the motor could respond by
unexpectedly bursting into life.
Range checking
Before every session check that the system
works properly in all respects, and has adequate
range. Secure the model adequately, and
ensure that no persons are standing in front of the
model.
Before you fly the model, carry out at least one complete
check of all the working systems, and one complete simulated flight, in order to eliminate any possible system
faults or model programming errors. In this regard it is
essential to read the notes on pages 80 and 89.
When operating a model, i. e. when flying or driving,
do not operate the transmitter without the aerial fitted.
Check that the transmitter aerial is firmly seated.
Safety Notes
5
Safety Notes
Operating your model aircraft, helicopter, boat or car
WARNING:
Never fly directly over spectators or other
pilots, and take care at all times not to
endanger people or animals. Keep well clear
of high-tension overhead cables. Never operate your
model boat close to locks and full-size vessels. Model
cars should never be run on public streets or motorways,
footpaths, public squares etc..
WARNING:
Never switch off the transmitter while the
model is in operation! However, if this
does happen, keep calm and wait until
the transmitter display goes off and the transmitter
has shut down completely. This takes at least three
seconds. Don’t switch the transmitter back on until
then. Otherwise, there is a danger that the transmitter will get “hung up” immediately after being
switched back on, causing you to lose control of the
model. Then it will not be possible to restart the
transmitter until you have switched it off again and
have carried out the described procedure correctly.
Towing operations
WARNING:
When operating towed models, keep a
minimum distance of about 50 cm between
the receiver units involved, or their aerials. If
necessary, use satellite receivers. Otherwise, malfunctions caused by the return channel can not be excluded.
6
Safety Notes
Checking the transmitter and receiver batteries
It is essential to stop using the radio control
system and recharge the batteries well
before they are completely discharged. In the
case of the transmitter this means – at the very latest –
when the message “battery needs charging” appears
on the screen, and you hear an audible warning signal.
It is vital to check the state of the batteries at regular
intervals – especially the receiver pack. When the
battery is almost flat you may notice the servos running
more slowly, but it is by no means safe to keep flying or
running your model until this happens. Always replace or
recharge the batteries in good time.
Keep to the battery manufacturer’s instructions, and
don’t leave the batteries on charge for longer than stated. Do not leave batteries on charge unsupervised.
Never attempt to recharge dry cells, as they may explode.
Rechargeable batteries should always be recharged before every session. When charging batteries it is important to avoid short-circuits. Do this by first connecting the
banana plugs on the charge lead to the charger, taking
care to maintain correct polarity. Only then connect the
charge lead to the transmitter or receiver battery.
Disconnect all batteries and remove them from your
model if you know you will not be using it in the near
future.
Capacity and operating times
This rule applies to all battery types: capacity diminishes
with each charge. At low temperatures the battery’s
internal resistance rises, and capacity falls. This means
that its ability to deliver current and maintain voltage is
reduced.
Frequent charging, and / or the use of maintenance
programs, tends to cause a gradual reduction in battery
capacity. We recommend that you check the capacity of
all your rechargeable batteries at least every six months,
and replace them if their performance has fallen off
significantly.
Use only genuine Graupner rechargeable batteries!
Suppressing electric motors
All conventional (brushed) electric motors
generate sparks between the commutator
and the brushes, which cause more or less
serious interference to the radio control system, depending on the type of motor. If an RC system is to work
correctly, it is therefore important to suppress the
electric motors, and in electric-powered models it is
essential that every motor should be effectively suppressed. Suppressor filters reliably eliminate such
interference, and should always be fitted where possible.
Please read the notes and recommendations supplied
by the motor manufacturer.
Refer to the main Graupner FS catalogue or the Internet
website at www.graupner.de/en for more information on
suppressor filters.
Servo suppressor filter for extension leads
Order No. 1040
Servo suppressor filters are required if you are obliged
to use long servo extension leads, as they eliminate the
danger of de-tuning the receiver. The filter is connected
directly to the receiver input. In very difficult cases a
second filter can be used, positioned close to the servo.
Using electronic speed controllers
The basic rule is that the electronic speed controller
must be chosen to suit the size of the electric motor it is
required to control.
There is always a danger of overloading and possibly
damaging the speed controller, but you can avoid this by
ensuring that the controller’s current-handling capacity is
at least half the motor’s maximum stall current.
Particular care is called for if you are using a “hot” (i. e.
upgrade) motor, as any low-turn motor (small number of
turns on the winding) can draw many times its nominal
current when stalled, and the high current will then burn
out the speed controller.
Caution
•
Electrical ignition systems
Ignition systems for internal combustion engines can
also produce interference, which has an adverse effect
on the working of the radio control system.
Electrical ignition systems should always be powered by
a separate battery – not the receiver battery.
Be sure to use effectively suppressed spark plugs and
plug caps, and shielded ignition leads.
Keep the receiving system an adequate distance away
from the ignition system.
•
Static charges
warning:
Lightning causes magnetic shock waves
which can interfere with the operation of a
radio control transmitter even if the thunderstorm actually occurs several kilometres away. For this
reason …
… cease flying operations immediately if you notice
an electrical storm approaching. Static charges
through the transmitter aerial can be life-threatening!
•
•
•
In order to fulfil the FCC RF radiation
regulations applicable to mobile transmitting apparatus, the equipment’s aerial
must be at least 20 cm from any person when the
system is in use. We therefore do not recommend
using the equipment at a closer range than 20 cm.
Ensure that no other transmitter is closer than 20 cm
from your equipment, in order to avoid adverse
effects on the system’s electrical characteristics and
radiation pattern.
The radio control system should not be operated
until the Country setting has been set correctly at
the transmitter. This is essential in order to fulfil the
requirements of various directives - FCC, ETSI, CE
etc. Please refer to the instructions for your particular
transmitter and receiver for details of this procedure.
Check all working systems and carry out at least one
full range check on the ground before every flight, in
order to show up any errors in the system and the
model’s programming.
Never make any changes to the programming of the
transmitter or receiver whilst operating a model.
Care and maintenance
Don’t use cleaning agents, petrol, water or
other solvents to clean your equipment. If the
case, the aerial etc. gets dirty, simply wipe
the surfaces clean with a soft dry cloth.
P
Components and accessories
attention:
As manufacturers, the company of Graupner
GmbH & Co. KG recommends the exclusive
use of components and accessories which
have been tested by Graupner and approved for their
capability, function and safety. If you observe this rule,
Graupner accepts responsibility for the product.
Graupner cannot accept liability for non-approved
components or accessories made by other manufacturers. It is not possible for Graupner to assess
every individual item manufactured by other companies, so we are unable to state whether such parts
can be used without incurring a safety risk.
Liability exclusion / Compensation
The sole purpose of this manual is to provide information; it is subject to amendment without prior notification.
Graupner accepts no responsibility or liability for errors
or inaccuracies which may occur in the information
section of this manual.
It is not possible for Graupner to ensure that the user
observes the installation and operation instructions, and
the recommended conditions and methods when installing, operating, using and maintaining the radio control
components. For this reason Graupner denies all liability
for loss, damages or costs which arise through misuse
or mishandling of this equipment, or are connected with
such use in any way.
Unless obliged by law, Graupner’s obligation to pay
compensation, regardless of the legal argument employed, is limited to the invoice value of that quantity of
Graupner products which were immediately involved
in the event in which the damage occurred, unless the
Safety Notes
7
Safety notes and handling instructions relating to NickelMetal-Hydride rechargeable batteries
company is deemed to have unlimited liability on account of deliberate or gross negligence.
Furthermore, any claims can be considered only if there
is a log file, see under “Data recording / storage” on
page 23. Likewise, the transmitter must always be
updated with the latest software.
To always be informed without delay of important software updates, you should therefore be sure to register
at www.graupner.de/en/service/product_registration.
aspx. That is the only way for you to be informed of new
updates by email automatically.
As with all sophisticated technical products, it is vitally
important that you observe the following safety notes
and handling instructions if you wish the equipment to
operate safely and reliably for an extended period.
•
Safety notes
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
8
Safety Notes
attention:
Individual cells and rechargeable batteries are not playthings, and must be kept
well away from children.
Store rechargeable cells and batteries out of the
reach of children.
Check that the batteries are in perfect, serviceable
condition before every use. Do not re-use defective or
damaged cells or batteries.
Rechargeable cells and batteries must be used
within the specified limits stated for the corresponding cell type.
Do not heat, incinerate or short-circuit rechargeable cells or batteries, and never charge them with
excessive currents or reversed polarity.
Never use rechargeable batteries consisting of
parallel-wired cells, combinations of old and new
cells, cells of different construction, size, capacity, make, brand or cell type.
Batteries installed inside equipment should always be
removed from the device when it is not in use and not
about to be used. Always keep equipment switched
off in order to avoid deep-discharged cells. Batteries
must be recharged in good time.
The battery to be charged should be placed on a
non-inflammable, heat-resistant, non-conductive
surface for the whole of the charge period. Keep
inflammable and volatile objects and materials well
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
clear of the charging area.
Batteries must always be supervised when on
charge. Never exceed the maximum fast-charge
current specified for the cell type in use.
If the battery heats up to more than 60°C whilst on
charge, halt the charge process immediately and
allow the pack to cool down to about 30°C.
Never recharge a battery which is already charged,
hot, or not completely discharged.
Do not make any modifications to batteries. Never
solder or weld directly to cells.
If incorrectly handled, rechargeable batteries are at
risk of combustion, explosion, corrosive action and
burns. Suitable extinguishing materials include fire
blankets, CO2 fire extinguishers and sand.
Escaped electrolyte is corrosive - do not allow it to
contact skin or eyes. In an emergency rinse the area
immediately with plenty of clean water before seeking
medical help.
The cells’ air vents must never be blocked or sealed,
e. g. by solder. When soldering, the iron temperature
should not exceed 220°C, and each joint should be
completed in less than twenty seconds.
To avoid cell deformation, do not exert excessive
mechanical pressure on battery cells.
If a battery should be accidentally overcharged, use
the following procedure:
Simply disconnect the battery and leave it on a
non-inflammable surface (e. g. stone floor) until it has
cooled down. Never hold the battery in your hand, as
there is a risk that cells might explode.
Always observe the recommended rates for charging
and discharging.
General information
The capacity of your rechargeable battery
diminishes with every charge / discharge
process. Stored batteries may eventually
exhibit reduced capacity.
Storage
Batteries should not be stored in a completely discharged state. Store them in a dry enclosed space at an
ambient temperature of +5°C to +25°C. If you are storing
a battery for a period longer than four weeks, ensure
that the cell voltage does not fall below 1.2 V
Balancing individual battery cells
• To balance new battery cells, i. e. to bring them all
to the same state of charge, charge them at what
is known as the ‘normal’ rate until they are full. As a
general guideline a fully discharged battery needs to
be charged for a period of twelve hours at a current
corresponding to one tenth of the capacity printed on
the cell label (the “1/10C” method). After this treatment all the cells will be fully charged, and exhibit
the same voltage. This method of balancing battery
cells should be repeated after every ten fast-charge
processes, so that the cells are repeatedly balanced;
this helps to ensure an extended useful life for your
batteries.
• If you have the facilities to discharge individual cells,
we recommend that you make use of this before
every charge process. Otherwise the battery pack
should be run down to a discharge voltage of 0.9
V per cell. For example, this corresponds to a final
discharge voltage of 3.6 V in the case of the four-cell
pack used in the transmitter.
Charging
NiMH batteries should only be charged using the specified currents, charge times and temperature range, and
should be supervised constantly when on charge. If you
do not have access to a suitable fast charger, i. e. one
which allows you to set the charge current accurately,
then the battery should always be recharged using the
“normal” charge rate of 1/10C; see the example stated
above.
Wherever possible, transmitter batteries should
always be recharged at the 1/10C rate, in order to
avoid differences in cell states. The charge current
must never exceed the maximum permissible value
stated in the transmitter instructions.
Fast charging
• If your charger offers these facilities, then set the
Delta Peak trigger voltage to 5 mV per cell. However,
most battery chargers are set to a fixed value of 15
… 20 mV per cell, and can therefore be used equally
well for NiCd batteries and for NiMH batteries. If you
are unsure, refer to the operating instructions or
ask your dealer whether the charger is also suitable
for NiMH batteries. If you are still not sure, charge
your batteries at half of the stated maximum charge
current.
Discharging
All rechargeable batteries sold by Graupner and
GM-Racing are suitable for a maximum continuous
current load of 6C … 13C, according to battery type
(refer to the manufacturer’s specification!). The higher
the continuous current load, the shorter the batteries’
useful life.
• Use your battery until its performance falls off, or until
the low voltage warning is triggered.
attention:
When stored for a long period, the cell
voltage should not be allowed to fall below 1.2 V. This means that you may have
to recharge the battery before storing it.
• Reflex charging and charge / discharge (cycle)
programs shorten the effective life of batteries unnecessarily, and are only suitable for checking battery
quality or “reviving” relatively old cells. It also makes
no sense to charge / discharge a battery before using
it - unless you simply wish to check its quality.
Disposal of exhausted dry and rechargeable batteries
The German Battery Order places a legal requirement
on every consumer to return all used and exhausted
dry cells and rechargeable batteries. It is prohibited to
dispose of these items in the ordinary domestic waste. At
no charge to the user, old dry and rechargeable batteries
can be surrendered at local authority collection points,
Graupner retail outlets, and any other shop where dry
and rechargeable batteries of the same type are sold. You
can also send batteries supplied by us to the following
address - with adequate pre-paid postage - for disposal:
Graupner GmbH & Co. KG
Service: Gebrauchte Batterien (Used batteries)
Henriettenstr. 94 - 96
D-73230 Kirchheim unter Teck
You can make an important contribution to environmental
protection in this way.
Caution:
Damaged batteries may require special
packaging before despatch, as some contain
highly toxic materials!!!!!
Safety Notes
9
mx-16
the latest generation of radio control technology
HoTT (Hopping Telemetry Transmission) is the synthesis of expertise, engineering and world-wide testing by
professional pilots. The equipment operates on the 2.4
GHz band, and offers bi-directional communication between transmitter and receiver via a down-link channel
integrated into the receiver.
The mx-16 HoTT RC system is based on the
Graupner/JR mc-24 computer radio control system
which was introduced back in 1997. It has been developed specifically for the beginner, but the mx-16
HoTT is still capable of controlling all current model
types without problem - whether fixed-wing model or
helicopter, model boat or car.
In the area of fixed-wing models and helicopters it is
often necessary to employ complex mixer functions
for the control surfaces or the swashplate actuation
system. Computer technology enables you to activate
a vast range of functions to cope with special model
requirements – just by pressing a button. With the mx16 HoTT all you do is select the appropriate model
type, and the software then presents you automatically
with the appropriate mixer and coupling functions. This
means that the transmitter requires no additional modules in order to implement complex coupled functions,
and you can forget all about old-fashioned mechanical
mixers in the model. The mx-16 HoTT provides an
extremely high level of safety and reliability in use.
The mx-16 HoTT offers twenty model memories, each
of which can store model settings for different flight
phases. Individual phases can be called up in flight
simply by operating a switch, so that you can try out
various settings quickly and without risk. This can be
for test purposes or for varying parameters for different
phases of flight.
10
Introduction
The large graphic screen makes operating the transmitter a simple, intuitive process. Mixers and other
functions can be displayed in graphic form, and this is
extraordinarily helpful.
The beginner quickly becomes familiar with the different
functions thanks to the clear, logically arranged program structure. Four-way touch-sensitive buttons to left
and right of the high-contrast screen are used to enter
settings, allowing the user to exploit all the options he
needs, in accordance with his experience in handling
radio-controlled models.
In theory the Graupner|SJ HoTT process allows more
than 200 models to be operated simultaneously. Although in practice the mixed operation of different technical systems in the 2.4 GHz ISM band – as required
by the approval regulations – reduces this number
considerably. Generally, however, it will always be
possible to operate even more models simultaneously
on the 2.4 GHz band than on the 35 / 40 MHz frequency
bands which we have used to date. However, the actual
limiting factor – as it has always been – is likely to
remain the size of the (air-) space available. The simple
fact that no frequency control procedure is necessary
equates to an enormous gain in safety, especially at
flying sites such as gliding slopes where groups of pilots
may be distributed over a large area, with nobody in
overall control.
The integral Telemetry menu provides a simple means
of accessing data and programming HoTT receivers.
For example, this method can be used to map receiver
outputs, distribute control functions to multiple servos,
and match servo travels and directions to each other.
This manual describes each menu in detail, and also
provides dozens of useful tips, notes and programming
examples to complement the basic information. More
general modelling terms, such as Transmitter controls,
Dual-Rates, Butterfly (Crow) and many others, are all
explained in the manual.
Please refer to the Appendix for additional information
on the HoTT system. This manual concludes with the
transmitter’s conformity declaration and guarantee
certificate.
Please read the safety notes and the technical information. We recommend that you read right through the
instructions with great care, and check all the functions
as described in the text. This can be carried out simply
by connecting servos to the supplied receiver, and
watching their response as you program the transmitter.
However, please read the notes on page 20 in this
regard. This is the quickest method of becoming familiar
with the essential procedures and functions of the mx16 HoTT.
Always handle your radio-controlled model with a
responsible attitude to avoid endangering yourself and
others.
The Graupner team wishes you great pleasure and success with your mx-16 HoTT - a radio control system of
the latest generation.
Kirchheim-Teck, February 2013
mx-16
Computer System
Eight-channel radio control set with Graupner|SJ HoTT 2.4 GHz technology (Hopping Telemetry Transmission)
Graupner|SJ HoTT technology offers extreme
reliability in use, with bi-directional communication
between transmitter and receiver, integrated telemetry, speech output via earphone socket and ultrafast response times.
Simplified programming technology with capacitive
programming touch-buttons.
High-contrast, eight-line graphic screen with blue
backlighting for ultra-clear display of all set-up parameters and telemetry data. Telemetry data is stored
on a micro-SD memory card.
USB socket for reading out and saving model memory data, and loading firmware updates.
• Micro-computer radio control system exploiting the
latest Graupner|SJ HoTT 2.4 GHz technology
• Bi-directional communication between transmitter
and receiver
• Five different languages
English, French, German, Italian and Spanish
• Ultra-fast response times through direct, ultra-reliable
data transmission from the main processor to the
2.4 GHz RF module. No additional delay caused by
detours through a module processor.
• Telemetry menu for displaying telemetry data, and
programming receiver outputs and optional sensors.
• Telemetry display shows numerous programming and
analysis functions directly on the transmitter screen.
• Speech output can be called up using freely programmable switches
• User-selectable servo cycle times for digital servos,
min. 10 ms
• Short, folding aerial
• Methods of operation and programming based on the
proven concepts of the mc-19 to mc-24
• High-contrast graphic screen with blue backlighting
ensures perfect monitoring of set-up parameters,
such as model type, model memory, timers and
operating voltage.
• Function encoder with two four-way touch-sensitive
buttons for simplified programming and accurate
settings
• Key-Lock function to guard against accidental operation.
• Four programmable flight phases
• Twenty model memories, with storage of all model-specific programming and set-up parameters
Description of radio control set
11
mx-16
Computer System
Eight-channel radio control set with Graupner|SJ HoTT 2.4 GHz technology (Hopping Telemetry Transmission)
• Seven switches (two three-way switches, three twoway switches and two momentary switches), plus
three digital controls - already installed and extremely
versatile
• Unrestricted assignment of all switches to switched
functions simply by operating the appropriate switch
• Internal real-time clock for dating log files
• User-replaceable CR2032 buffer battery for internal
real-time clock
• Storage of model memories using the latest battery-free back-up system
• Eight control functions with simplified, very convenient assignment of transmitter controls for auxiliary
functions, such as switches and proportional controls
• Convenient mode selector provides simple method
of changing the stick mode (modes 1 - 4, e. g. throttle
right / throttle left).
When you change modes, all the affected settings
are switched at the same time.
• Graphical servo display provides a straightforward
overview of the servo set-up, and a swift method of
checking servo travels
• Receiver output swap
• Comprehensive programs for fixed-wing model
aircraft and helicopters:
Fixed-wing menu for: 1 AIL, 1 AIL + 1 FLAP, 2 AIL, 2
AIL + 1 or 2 FLAP, V-tail, delta / flying wing, two elevator servos
Fixed-wing mixer: diff aile, diff.flaps, ail  rudd, ail
 flaps, brake  elev, brake  flap, brake  aile,
elev  flap, elev  aile, flap  elev, flap  aile
and diff. reduction
• Heli menu: 1-point, 2-point, 3-point and 4-point
12
Description of radio control set
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
linkages (1 servo, 2 servo, 3sv(2roll), 3sv(140°),
3sv(2nick (pitch-axis)), 4 SV (90°))
Swashplate limiter
Servo travel adjustment +/- 150% for all servo outputs, variable separately for each side (Single Side
Servo Throw)
Variable sub-trim, range +/- 125%, for adjusting the
neutral position of all servos
Servo reverse, programmable for all servos
EXPO / DUAL-RATE system, separately variable, can
be switched in-flight, flight phase programmable
Stopwatch / count-down timer with alarm function
Model memory copy function
Integral DSC socket for use with flight simulators and
Trainer systems
General features of the HoTT system
• Simple, ultra-fast binding of transmitter and receiver
• Multiple receivers can be bound per model for parallel operation
• Extremely fast re-binding, even at maximum range
• Two-receiver satellite operation using special cable
connection
• Range-check and warning function
• Receiver low-voltage warning on transmitter screen
• Ultra-wide receiver operating voltage range: 3.6 V to
8.4 V (fully operational down to 2.5 V)
• Fail-Safe
• Unrestricted channel assignment (channel-mapping),
mixer functions and all servo settings programmable
in the Telemetry menu
• Up to four servos can be actuated simultaneously
as a block, with a servo cycle time of 10 ms (digital
•
•
•
•
•
servos only)
Optimised frequency hopping and broad channel
spread for maximum interference rejection
Intelligent data transmission with corrective function
Real-time telemetry analysis
More than 200 systems can be operated simultaneously
Future-proof update capability using USB port
The set Order No. 33116 contains
mx-16 HoTT micro-computer transmitter with integral
4NH-2000 RX RTU flat-pack NiMH transmitter battery,
Order No. 33116.2 (specification reserved), plug-type
battery charger (5,6 V / 200 mAh), Graupner|SJ GR-16
HoTT bi-directional receiver, Order No. 33508, micro-SD
card, USB interface, Order No. 7168.6 and adapter lead,
Order No. 7168.6S.
Recommended battery chargers (optional)
Order
No.
Description
6411
6463
6464
6466
6468
6469
6470
6475
6478
6480
Ultramat 8
Ultramat 12 plus
Ultramat 14 plus
Ultra Trio plus 14
Ultramat 16S
Ultra Trio Plus 16
Ultramat 18
Ultra Duo Plus 45
Ultra Duo Plus 60
Ultra Duo Plus 80
220 V mains conn.
12 V DC connect.
NiCd
NiMH
LiPo
Lead-ac.
Integral charge. lead
Suitable for
the following
battery types
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
To charge the batteries you will also need the transmitter charge lead,
Order No. 3022 and the receiver charge lead, Order No. 3021.
For details of additional battery chargers, and details of the chargers
listed here, please refer to the main Graupner FS catalogue, or our
Internet site at www.graupner.de/en.
Specification, mx-16 HoTT transmitter
Specification, GR-16 HoTT receiver
Frequency band
2,4 … 2,4835 GHz
Operating voltage
3,6 … 8,4 V*
Modulation
FHSS
Current drain
ca. 70 mA
Transmitter power
100 mW EIRP
Frequency band
2,4 … 2,4835 GHz
Control functions
Eight functions; four with trims
Modulation
FHSS
Temperature range
-10 … +55°C
Aerial
Aerial
folding
Operating voltage
3,4 … 6 V
Current drain
approx. 180 mA
Diversity aerials,
2 x approx. 145 mm long,
approx. 115 mm encapsulated and approx. 30 mm
active
Dimensions
approx. 190 x 195 x 90 mm
Servo sockets
8
Weight
approx. 770 g with transmitter
battery
Sensor socket
1
Temperature range
approx. -10° … +55°C
Dimensions
approx. 46 x 21 x 14 mm
Weight
approx. 12 g
Accessories
Order No. Description
1121
Neckstrap, 20 mm wide
Neckstrap, 30 mm wide
70
3097
Wind-shield for hand-held transmitter
* The permissible operating voltage range stated above applies to
the receiver only! Please note in this regard that the receiver’s input
voltage is passed directly (i.e. unregulated) to the servo sockets, but
the permissible operating voltage range of the overwhelming majority of servos, speed controllers, gyros etc. which can be connected
to the receiver is only 4.8 to 6 Volt!
Trainer leads for mx-16 HoTT:
see page 157
Replacement parts
Order No.
Description
2498.4FBEC 4NH-2000 RX RTU, flat-pack
33800
HoTT transmitter aerial
For information on additional accessories please refer to
the Appendix or visit our Internet site at www.graupner.
de/en. Alternatively you can enquire at your local model
shop, where the staff will be pleased to advise you.
Description of radio control set 13
Operating Notes
Transmitter power supply
The mx-16 HoTT transmitter is fitted as standard with
a high-capacity rechargeable 4NH-2000 RX RTU NiMH
battery (Order No. 2498.4FBEC) (specification reserved). When delivered, the standard rechargeable
battery is not charged.
When you are using the transmitter you can monitor
the battery voltage on the LCD screen. If the voltage
of the transmitter battery falls below a certain voltage
(default 4.7 V), which can be set in the “Battery warning
threshold” line of the “Basic settings” menu, page 134,
you will hear an audible warning signal. The screen then
displays a message reminding you that the transmitter
battery needs to be recharged.
stop
batter y
needs
4.7 charging!!
x
Mx
0:22h
#01
0:00
0:00
HoTT
0.0V
Always recharge the transmitter battery in good time.
When you see this message, cease operations immediately and recharge the transmitter battery.
Note:
Ensure that the correct battery type is set in
the “Basic settings” menu on page 134!
NIMH must be set as the standard value.
Charging the transmitter battery
The rechargeable NiMH transmitter battery can be
recharged with the battery charger (Order No. 33116.2)
supplied in the set, using the charge socket located on
the right-hand side of the transmitter. Leave the battery
14
Operating Notes
inside the transmitter for charging, to avoid premature
damage to the internal battery socket.
As an approximate guideline a discharged battery
should be charged for twelve hours at a current corresponding to one tenth of the capacity printed on the
pack. If you are using the standard transmitter battery
and the charger supplied in the set, this current is
200 mA.
Never use charger plugs of other manufacturers or
chargers designed for other battery types. If the output
voltage is too high, or if the plug has any incorrect
polarity (see below), immense damage can result. We
recommend labelling the charger plug accordingly as
needed.
The transmitter must be switched “OFF” for the whole
period of the charge process. Never switch on the
transmitter when it is still connected to the charger; even
a very brief interruption in the process can cause the
charge voltage to rise to the point where the transmitter
is immediately damaged. For this reason check carefully
that all connectors are secure, and are making really
good contact.
Polarity of the mx-16 HoTT charge socket
Commercially available battery charge leads produced
by other manufacturers are often made up with the opposite polarity. For this reason it is essential to use only
the genuine Graupner charge lead, Order No. 3022.
Using automatic battery chargers
As standard the charge socket is protected against
short-circuit by a diode. However, genuine Graupner
automatic battery chargers are still able to detect the
voltage of the battery. The maximum charge current
must not exceed 1 A, otherwise the diode and possibly
other components may be damaged.
If possible, set the delta peak voltage difference of your
fast charger to a value in the range 10 mV … 20 mV or
equivalent, as described in the charger’s instructions;
this ensures that it is suitable for fast-charging NiMH
cells.
attention:
First connect the banana plugs on the
charge lead to the charger, and only then
connect the other end of the charge lead
to the charge socket on the transmitter. When the
charge lead is connected to the transmitter, never
allow the bare ends of the plugs to touch! To avoid
damage to the transmitter, the charge current must
never exceed 1 A. If necessary, limit the current on
the charger itself.
Removing the transmitter battery
To remove the transmitter battery, first disengage the
cover over the battery compartment on the back of the
transmitter, then lift it off:
Remove the battery, then carefully pull on the power
lead to disconnect the transmitter battery connector.
Installing the transmitter battery
Hold the connector attached to the transmitter battery in
such a way that the black or brown wire faces the aerial,
and the unused socket of the battery connector is on the
side facing the bottom, then push the battery connector
onto the three pins projecting out of the inside of the
transmitter, in the direction of the circuit
board. (The battery connector is
protected against reversed polarity by
two chamfered edges; see illustration). Polarity of
Finally place the battery in the comtransmitter battery
connector
partment, and close the cover.
The purpose of this battery is to protect the system from
loss of date and time if the transmitter’s power supply is
disconnected; for example, when the transmitter battery
is replaced.
Battery timer, bottom left corner of the screen
This timer displays the cumulative operating time of the
transmitter since the last time the transmitter battery
was charged.
This timer is automatically reset to “0:00” when the
transmitter detects that the voltage of the transmitter
battery is significantly higher than the last time it was
switched on, e. g. as a result of a charge process.
#01
5.6V
0:00h
stop
flt
0:00
0:00
Mx
HoTT
0.0V
CR 2032 lithium battery
On the left-hand side of the transmitter circuit board you
will find a holder fitted with a user-replaceable CR 2032
lithium battery:
Operating Notes
15
Operating Notes
Receiver power supply
A wide range of rechargeable four-cell and five-cell NiMH
batteries varying in capacity is available for use as the
receiver power supply. If you are using digital servos we
recommend that you use a five-cell (6 V) pack of generous capacity. If your model is fitted with a mixture of
digital and analogue servos, it is important to check the
maximum permissible operating voltage of all the types.
The PRX unit, Order No. 4136, provides a stabilised
receiver power supply with a user-variable voltage from
one or two receiver batteries; see Appendix.
For reasons of safety battery boxes or dry cells should
never be used.
The voltage of the airborne power supply is displayed on
the transmitter screen while the model is flying:
#01
5.2V
2:22h
stop
flt
0:00
0:00
M
HoTT
5.5V
If the voltage falls below the pre-set warning threshold - 3.8 Volt as standard, but variable in the Telemetry
menu; see page 146 - a visual and audible low-voltage
warning is triggered.
Nevertheless it is important to check the
state of the batteries at regular intervals.
Don’t put off charging the batteries until
the warning signal is triggered.
Note:
16
Please refer to the main Graupner FS
catalogue or visit the Internet site at www.
graupner.de/en for full details of batteries,
Operating Notes
chargers, measuring equipment and battery monitor
units.
Charging the receiver battery
The charge lead, Order No. 3021, can be connected
directly to the NC receiver battery for charging. If the
battery is installed in a model and you have installed one
of the following switch harnesses: Order No. 3046, 3934
or 3934.1 or 3934.3, the battery can be charged via the
separate charge socket, or the charge socket which is
built into the switch. The switch on the switch harness
must be left at the “OFF” position for charging.
Polarity of the receiver battery connector
General notes on battery charging
•
Observe the recommendations provided
by the charger manufacturer and the
battery manufacturer at all times.
• Keep to the maximum permissible charge current
stated by the battery manufacturer.
• The maximum charge current for the transmitter
battery is 1.5 A. Limit the charge current to this value
on the charger.
• If you wish to charge the transmitter battery at a
current higher than 1.5 A, you must first remove the
pack from the transmitter, otherwise you risk damaging the circuit board through overloading the conductor tracks, and / or overheating the battery.
• Carry out a series of test charges to ensure that the
automatic charge termination circuit works correctly
with your battery. This applies in particular if you are
using an automatic charger designed for NiCd batteries to recharge the standard NiMH battery.
• You may need to adjust the charger’s termination
behaviour, if it provides this option.
• Do not discharge the battery or carry out a battery
maintenance program via the integral charge socket.
The charge socket is not suitable for this application.
• Always connect the charge lead to the charger first,
and only then to the transmitter or receiver battery.
Observing this rule eliminates the danger of accidental short-circuits between the bare contacts of the
charge lead plugs.
• If the battery becomes hot when on charge, it is time
to check the pack’s condition. Replace it if necessary,
or reduce the charge current.
• Never leave batteries unsupervised when on
charge.
• Read and observe the safety notes and handling
information in the section starting on page 8.
Adjusting stick length
Both sticks are infinitely variable in length over a broad
range, enabling you to set them to suit your personal
preference.
Hold the bottom half of the knurled grip firmly, and
unscrew the top section:
Now screw the stick top in or out (shorter or longer)
to the length you prefer before tightening the top and
bottom sections against each other to fix the stick top.
Opening the transmitter case
Please read the following notes carefully before you
open the transmitter. If you have no experience in such
matters, we recommend that you ask your nearest
Graupner Service Centre to carry out the work for you.
The transmitter should only be opened in the following
cases:
• When a self-neutralising stick needs to be converted
to non-neutralising action, or a non-neutralising stick
to a self-neutralising action.
• If you wish to adjust the stick centring spring tension.
Before opening the transmitter check that it is switched
off (move Power switch to “OFF”).
Open the battery compartment and remove the transmitter battery as described on the previous double page,
together with any micro-SD card already installed.
After this, use a PH1-size cross-point screwdriver to
undo the six screws recessed into the back panel of the
transmitter, as shown in the illustration:
Arrangement of the case back screws
Hold the two case sections together with your hand, and
turn the unit over to allow these six screws to fall out
onto the table. Now carefully raise the case back and
fold it open to the right, as if you were opening a book.
attention:
Two multi-core cables connect the lower
shell to the transmitter electronics located in the top section. Please take great
care not to damage this cable!
Important:
• Do not modify the transmitter circuit in any way,
as this invalidates your guarantee and official approval for the system.
• Do not touch any part of the circuit boards with
any metal object. Avoid touching the contacts
with your fingers.
• Never switch the transmitter on while the case is
open.
Please note the following points when closing the
transmitter:
• Make sure that no cables are jammed between the
transmitter case sections when you close the back.
• Check that the two case sections fit together flush all
round before fitting the retaining screws. Never force
the two case components together.
• Fit the case screws in the existing threads, and tighten them gently. Over-tightening them will strip the
threads in the plastic.
• Remember to re-connect the battery.
Operating Notes
17
Operating Notes
Converting the dual-axis stick units
Self-centring action
Either or both sticks can be converted from self-neutralising to non self-neutralising action: start by opening the
transmitter as described on the previous page.
If you wish to change the standard stick unit arrangement, start by locating the screw on the left-hand stick
unit shown circled in white in the photo below.
Folding aerial
Adjuster screws for stick centring force
Self-centring screw
Note:
The right-hand stick unit is buitl-in turned of
about 180 °, i. e. the screw you require is
located on the right, below centre.
Self-centring screw
Do not touch transmitter circuit board
Brake springs
Brake springs
Adjuster screws
Adjuster screws
Right-hand stick unit
Charge socket
User-replaceable CR2032 lithium
cell, acting as buffer battery for the
integral real time clock
18
Operating Notes
Left-hand stick unit
Turn this screw clockwise until the stick on that side
moves freely from one end-stop to the other; alternatively unscrew it until the stick is fully self-centring again.
Do not touch transmitter circuit board
Memory card slot
Brake spring and ratchet
You can alter the braking force of the stick by adjusting
the outer of the two screws circled in white in the next
picture; adjusting the inner screw alters the strength of
the ratchet:
Stick centring force
The centring force of the sticks is also variable to suit
your preference. The adjustment system is located
adjacent to the centring springs; see the white circles in
the following photo.
You can set the preferred centring spring force by rotating the corresponding adjuster screw using a cross-point
screwdriver:
• Turn to the right = harder spring tension;
• Turn to the left = softer spring tension.
vertical
Note:
The right-hand stick unit is buitl-in turned of
about 180 °, i. e. the screw you require is
located on the right, below centre.
horizontal
Note:
The right-hand stick unit is buitl-in turned of
about 180 °, i. e. the screw you require is
located on the right, below centre.
Operating Notes
19
Description of transmitter
Front of transmitter
Attaching the transmitter neckstrap
You will find a strap lug mounted in the centre of the
front face of the mx-16 HoTT transmitter, as shown in
the drawing on the right. This lug is positioned in such a
way that the transmitter is perfectly balanced even when
suspended from a neckstrap.
Order No. 1121 Neckstrap, 20 mm wide
Order No. 70 Neckstrap, 30 mm wide
Central Status LED
Aerial with folding / rotating base
Rotary proportional control CTRL 8
Rotary proportional control CTRL 7
Carry handle
2-position switch SW 8
2-position switch SW 9
3-position switch SW 4/5
2-position switch SW 2
2-position momentary
switch SW 1
3-position switch SW 6/7
2-position switch SW 3
Rotary proportional
control CTRL 6
Left-hand stick
Important note:
In the transmitter’s standard form any servos
connected to the receiver can initially only be
operated using the dual-axis sticks. For
maximum flexibility, all the other transmitter controls
(CTRL 6 ... 8, SW 1 ... 9) are “free” in software terms,
and can be assigned to any channels you like, enabling
you to set up the system to suit your personal preference or the requirements of a particular model. This is
carried out in the “contr set.” menu, as described on
pages 94 (fixed-wing models) and 96 (model
helicopters).
20 Description of transmitter
Neckstrap lug
Right-hand stick
Trim
Trim
ON / OFF switch
Right-hand touch-button
Left-hand touch-button
LCD screen
Rear of transmitter
Case screw
Case screw
Earphone / headphone
socket
Data socket for connecting Smart-Box, Order
No. 33700
Five-pin mini-USB
socket for connecting
transmitter to a PC
DSC socket for connecting flight simulators and
for Teacher mode
Case screw
Case screw
mini-USB socket
This socket can be used to connect the transmitter to
a PC running Windows XP, Vista or 7. The software
required at the PC, including a suitable USB driver, can
be found in the Download section for that product at
www.graupner.de/en.
Once you have installed the software required, you can
update the transmitter via this connection as and when
required, or simply set the correct date and time of day.
Data socket
For connecting the optional Smart-Box, Order No. 33700.
For more details about the Smart-Box please refer to the
main Graupner FS catalogue, or refer to that product on
the Internet at www.graupner.de/en.
Transmitter battery
charge socket
Battery compartment cover
Case screw
Headphone socket
The central socket at the bottom edge of the back panel
name plate is intended for connecting a standard commercial earphone or headphones fitted with a 3.5 mm
barrel plug (not included in the set).
Signals and voice messages associated with the
Telemetry menu are generated via this socket, as are
the transmitter’s audible signals. The default language
for speech output is German. For more information on
this please refer to “Voice messages” in the “HIDDEN
MODE” section starting on page 26, and the “Telemetry” section starting on page 137.
The volume of the headphone output can be adjusted
in the “Voice volume” line of the “Basic settings” menu;
see page 135.
Case screw
Description of transmitter
21
DSC socket
Card slot
Connenction socket for flight simulators or trainer systems
The original function of this socket was for “Direct Servo
Control”, and that’s why the abbreviation is still in use.
However, for technical reasons “direct servo control” is
no longer possible with the HoTT system using a diagnosis lead.
The mx-16 HoTT transmitter’s standard two-pole DSC
socket is now used as a Trainer (buddy box) socket
(Teacher or Pupil), and as an interface for flight simulators.
For the DSC connection to work you must check the
following:
1. Carry out any adjustments required in the appropriate menus:
See page 154 for information on setting up the
mx-16 HoTT transmitter to work as part of a Trainer system.
2. ALWAYS leave the transmitter’s On / Off switch in
the “OFF” position when using a flight simulator, and
when using the mx-16 HoTT transmitter as a Pupil unit in a Trainer system, for only in this position is
the RF section of the transmitter module switched off
(no RF signal) even when the DSC lead is plugged
in. At the same time the transmitter’s current drain is
reduced slightly.
The central Status LED should now glow a constant red, and the abbreviation “DSC” appears in the
transmitter’s base display on the left, below the model number. At the same time the display of telemetry
symbols is suppressed:
22
Description of transmitter
PUPIL
#11
DSC
5.6V
0:01h
Data storage
stop
flt
0:00
0:00
HoTT
The transmitter is now ready for use.
In contrast, when the mx-16 HoTT is used in
Teacher mode, the transmitter must be switched on
before the appropriate cable is plugged in.
3. Connect the other end of the connecting lead to the
appropriate apparatus, taking into account the operating instructions supplied with that device.
Important:
Ensure that all connectors are firmly seated in
their sockets.
Note regarding flight simulators:
The range of flight simulators available
commercially is now very wide, and you may
find that it is necessary to swap over certain
contacts at the barrel connector or the DSC module.
This work must be carried out by a Graupner Service
Centre.
micro-SD and micro-SDHC
When you switch off the mx-16 HoTT transmitter and
remove the battery compartment cover, you will see
the card slot for memory cards (of the micro-SD and
micro-SDHC type) in the right-hand side of the compartment:
In addition to the memory card supplied as standard, it
is possible to use any standard commercial micro-SD
memory card with a capacity of max. 2 GB, and any micro-SDHC card with a capacity of up to 32 GB. However,
the manufacturer recommends the use of memory cards
with capacities up to only 4 GB, as these are completely
adequate in all normal circumstances.
The memory cards for which the transmitter is intended
are familiar from their use in digital cameras and mobile
telephones. Place the card in the slot with the contacts
facing up, towards the back panel, and push it in until
it locks. When the battery has been installed and the
battery compartment closed, switching the transmitter
on causes a number of folders to be created on the
memory card. At the same time a stylised memory card
graphic appears in the base display to indicate that a
memory card is inserted.
#01
5.2V
3:33h
stop
flt
0:00
0:00
M
HoTT
5.5V
Note:
If there is an SD card installed, withdraw it
BEFORE you remove the transmitter’s back
panel, otherwise there is a risk that you will
damage the card.
Prepare the memory card as described, remove it from
the transmitter, and insert it in a suitable card reader.
Make sure the reader is connected to your PC or laptop, and copy the files previously downloaded from the
Download page for your transmitter into the appropriate
folder. Finally remove the memory card from the card
reader, and replace it in the transmitter.
Data recording / storage
The process of saving data on the SD card is coupled to
the flight timer: if the timer is started, then data saving
commences - provided that a suitable memory card
is in the card slot, and a telemetry connection to the
receiver exists - and ceases again when the flight timer
is stopped. The flight timer is started and stopped as
described in the “Timers” section on page 77 for fixedwing models, and pages 86 for model helicopters.
When data is being recorded, the card symbol
flashes constantly and slowly.
When data is being written to the memory card, the
memory card symbol swells from left to right to indicate
the process.
When a data storage process is concluded, you will find
an (empty) “Models” folder and a “Log-Data” folder on
the memory card. The latter contains the log files, stored
in sub-folders named “Model name”, using the format
0001 Year-Month-Day.bin, 0002 Year-Month-Day.bin etc.
However, if a model memory has not yet been named,
then you will find the associated log files in a sub-folder
named “NoName” when you remove the memory card
from the transmitter and insert it in the card slot of a PC
or laptop. The data can subsequently be analysed on a
compatible PC using the PC program available on the
Download page for the transmitter at www.graupner.de/
en.
Firmware updates / Changing the screen language
It is possible to replace and / or update the transmitter’s
firmware - and the transmitter’s screen language, if
necessary - under menu control, as described in detail
on page 27 under the title “Firmware update” in the
“Hidden Mode” chapter. In addition to a German version of the firmware, the SD card supplied in the set as
standard also contains firmware versions in English,
French, Italian and Spanish; this information was correct
at the time these instructions went to press.
Corresponding updates and information can be found
in the Download area of www.graupner.de/en under the
product concerned.
can be replaced by a voice package in another language
at any time. For more information on this please refer to
the “HIDDEN MODE” section starting on page 26.
Importing and exporting model memories
Any model memories can be copied onto a memory
card in the transmitter, or copied from the card into the
transmitter, so that you can exchange data between
identical transmitters, and also back up your data. For
more information please see the “Model memories”
section starting on page 70.
Note:
Some of the special characters used in
certain model names cannot be accepted
due to specific limitations of the FAT or
FAT32 file system used by memory cards. During the
copy process they are replaced by a tilde (~) character.
Importing voice files
As mentioned in the “Headphone socket” section on
page 21, the signals associated with the Telemetry
menu and voice messages can be generated via this
socket, in addition to the transmitter’s audible signals.
These voice messages are collected in a voice package
and stored in the transmitter’s internal memory, but they
Description of transmitter
23
Screen and keypad
Visual display of the trim lever positions; alternatively - if rotary controls CTRL 7 … 9 are operated - display of the current
settings of these two controls
Model name
Model type display
(fixed-wing / helicopter)
See page 36 for possible warnings
Stopwatch in min:sec
(count-up / count-down)
Model memory 1 … 20
Left-hand touch-key
  leaf through
 pressed briefly together:
switches to Servo display
menu
Right-hand touch-key
 
leaf through / alter values
SET Select / Confirm
ESC = interrupt / back
ESC touched for about three
seconds; Switches to the
Telemetry menu, and
back to the base display
Simultaneous brief press of
 or  = CLEAR
Battery voltage
(If battery voltage falls below a particular level, you will see a
warning display - see “Warning notes” on page 36. At the
same time the transmitter emits an audible warning signal.)
Battery operating time since
last battery charge, in hr:min
24
Flight timer in min:sec
(count-up / count-down)
Description of transmitter - screen and keypad
Receiver power supply voltage
Flight phase name
Switching between
flight phases using switch
Signal strength indicator
Operating the “Data Terminal”
Input buttons ESC and SET
symbols
On-screen telemetry symbols
The active model memory has not yet been
“bound” to a HoTT receiver. See page 80
or 88 for more information on the “binding”
process.
Not flashing: RF switched off at transmitter
Flashing aerial symbol:
The last receiver bound to the active model is
inactive, or out of range
>M x No telemetry signal detected
>M Signal strength display
>P Display of Pupil signal strength on the Teacher
transmitter’s screen.
Buttons to the left of the screen
• ESC button
A brief press on the ESC button returns you step by
step within the function select system, taking you
right back to the basic display. If you make a change
in the meantime, the change is retained.
If touched for about three seconds in the base display, ESC opens and closes the Telemetry menu.
• Arrow buttons  
1. A brief press on one of these buttons allows you
to leaf through lists, such as the Model Select or
Multi-Function list, always moving in the direction
of the arrow; the arrow buttons are also used to
move through menu lines within menus.
2. A brief simultaneous press of the  buttons
switches from the base transmitter display, and
from almost any menu position, into the “Servo
display” menu.
Short-Cuts
Buttons to the right of the screen
• SET button
1. Starting from the base screen display - as it appears when you switch the transmitter on - a brief
press of the SET button takes you to the multi-function menus. You can also call up a selected
menu using the SET button.
2. Within the set-up menus you can activate (confirm) and disable the corresponding set-up fields
with a brief press of the SET button.
• Arrow buttons  
1. “Leafs through” the multi-function menu and the
menu lines within the set-up menus, in the same
manner as the left-hand touch-key’s arrow buttons.
2. Selects and adjusts parameters in set-up fields after you have activated them by briefly pressing
the SET button; the buttons  and  are
assigned the same function in each case, i. e. it
makes absolutely no difference which of the two
buttons you use.
3. A brief simultaneous press of the  or 
buttons resets an altered parameter value in the
active input field to the default value (CLEAR).
Notes:
•
It is not the contact with the touch-key itself that triggers the corresponding action, but the cessation of the touch.
• If you switch the transmitter off and then immediately on again, you may find that the touch-keys have
no effect. This is not a fault! Switch the transmitter off
again, and wait a few seconds before switching it on
once more.
You can call up particular menus or options directly
using the following button combinations:
• CLEAR
A brief simultaneous press of the  or  buttons of the right-hand touch-key resets an altered parameter value in the active input field to the default
value.
• “Servo display”
A brief simultaneous press of the  buttons of the
left-hand touch-key switches from the transmitter’s
base display, and from almost any menu position, to
the “Servo display”, menu; see page 133.
• “Telemetry”
Hold the central ESC button of the left-hand touchkey pressed in for about one second in order to call
up the “Telemetry” menu from the transmitter’s base
display - see section starting on page 137 - and
also to return to it again.
• Graphic display of telemetry data
Briefly pressing the  or  button of the left or righthand touch-key switches directly from the transmitter’s base display to the graphic telemetry data display, and also leafs to and fro between the individual
graphic displays.
Press ESC to return to the base display.
• “HIDDEN MODE”
(language selection and contrast)
Simultaneously press the arrow buttons  of the
left-hand touch-key AND the central SET button of
the right-hand touch-key; see next pagees.
• Input lock
Can be activated and disabled at the transmitter’s basic display by simultaneously holding the ESC and
SET buttons pressed in for about two seconds.
Description of transmitter - screen and keypad 25
HIDDEN MODE
Language selection and screen contrast
The “HIDDEN MODE” (VERSTECKTER MODUS) menu
of the mx-16 HoTT transmitter can be accessed from
virtually any menu position by holding the arrow buttons
 of the left-hand touch-key and the SET button of
the right-hand touch-key pressed in; after about one
second this display appears:
VERSTECKTER MODUS
ANSAGEN
FIRMWARE UPDATE
KNÜPPEL KALIBRIER.
VOICE
As mentioned in the “Headphone socket” section on
page 21, the signals associated with the Telemetry
menu and voice messages can be generated via this
socket, in addition to the transmitter’s audible signals.
The default language for these messages is German.
These voice messages are collected in a voice package
and stored in the transmitter’s internal memory, but they
can be replaced by a voice package in another language
at any time.
When this manual went to press, the following langua­
ges were available:
• English
• French
• German
• Italian
• Spanish
The currently active voice package can be exchanged
using either the PC program which is available at www.
graupner.de/en on the Download page for the transmit26
Description of transmitter
ter, or using the SD card supplied in the set, as described in the following section. If you have not already
done so, insert your SD or SDHC card in the transmitter,
as described on page 22. Switch the transmitter on
with RF switched off:
RF ON/OFF?
ON OFF
Changing the language
Use the arrow buttons of the left or right-hand touch-key
to move to the “VOICE” (“ANSAGEN”) line:
VERSTECKTER MODUS
ANSAGEN
FIRMWARE UPDATE
KNÜPPEL KALIBRIER.
DATEILISTE
VOICE2_ENGLISH.VDF
VOICE2_FRANCE.VDF
VOICE2_GERMAN.VDF
VOICE2_ITALIANO.VDF
VOICE2_SPAIN.VDF
Confirm your selection by briefly pressing the central
SET button of the right-hand touch-key again: the selected voice package is now loaded into the transmitter’s
memory:
 HIDDEN MODE 
0
CONTRAST
ENGLISH
LANGUAGE
VOICE
ENGLISH
22/100%
I
Press the central SET button of the right-hand touch-key
to move to the Select page of the “VOICE” option:
DATEILISTE
VOICE2_ENGLISH.VDF
VOICE2_FRANCE.VDF
VOICE2_GERMAN.VDF
VOICE2_ITALIANO.VDF
VOICE2_SPAIN.VDF
Now use the arrow buttons  of the left or right-hand
touch-key to select the language you prefer, for example:
The loading process is finished when the progress bar
at the bottom edge of the screen disappears:
VERSTECKTER MODUS
ANSAGEN
FIRMWARE UPDATE
KNÜPPEL KALIBRIER.
Finally switch the transmitter off to conclude the procedure.
All the settings stored in the transmitter are retained in
full even after you have switched languages.
Notes:
•
If the warning message …
RF
MUST BE
OFF
OK
… appears, then the transmitter’s RF section is still
active. Switch this section off in the “RF module” line
of the “Base settings” menu, and repeat the procedure.
• If the warning …
SD-CARD
INSERT
OK
… appears, then there is no memory card in the card
slot, or the card cannot be read.
• If the Select window is empty …
FILE LIST
… then the transmitter cannot find a suitable voice
file on the SD card in the transmitter. If this should
happen, check the contents of the “VoiceFile” folder
by inserting the SD card in a PC or laptop.
FIRMWARE UPDATE / Changing the screen language
Important note:
It is essential to check the state of charge
of your transmitter battery before you
carry out any update. For safety’s sake
recharge it and back up all occupied model memories, so that you can restore them if anything goes
wrong.
DATEILISTE
MX-12_1V234_ENGLISH.
MX-12_1V234_FRANCE.B
MX-12_1V234_GERMAN.B
MX-12_1V234_ITALIANO
MX-12_1V234_SPAIN.BI
Use the arrow buttons  of the left or right-hand
touch-key to select the firmware version you wish to use,
for example:
VERSTECKTER MODUS
ANSAGEN
FIRMWARE UPDATE
KNÜPPEL KALIBRIER.
DATEILISTE
MX-12_1V234_ENGLISH.
MX-12_1V234_FRANCE.B
MX-12_1V234_GERMAN.B
MX-12_1V234_ITALIANO
MX-12_1V234_SPAIN.BI
It is possible to update and / or replace the transmitter’s
firmware, and with it the screen language, using this
menu point; the procedure is similar to that described in
the section entitled “VOICE”. When this manual went to
press, the following languages were present on the SD
card supplied as standard in the set:
• German
• English
• French
• Italian
• Spanish
Corresponding updates and further information can be
found at www.graupner.de/en on the mx-16 HoTT pro­
duct page under Download.
Confirm your choice by briefly pressing the central SET
button of the right-hand touch-key once more. The selected firmware now starts to load into the transmitter’s
memory, and after two brief screen displays (which only
concern the start of the firmware update) you will see …
 Firmware Download 
 Prozess Start

 Please Wait....

Description of transmitter
27
 Boot Download
 Success!!!
 Please Wait....



… then there is no memory card in the card slot, or
the card cannot be read.
• If the Select window is empty …
FILE LIST
… this display:
 Firmware

 Downloading...

 Progress
023/123 
The loading process is complete when the counter to
the left of “/” reaches “Data quantity” to the right of it, and
this message appears:
 Firmware Upgrade
 success!!!
If this warning message appears …
SD-CARD
INSERT
OK
28
Description of transmitter
STICK CALIBRATION
 HIDDEN MODE 
VOICE
FIRMWARE UPDATE
STICK CALI.


After a few seconds the message disappears, and the
transmitter re-starts. The system is now ready for use
again.
Notes:
•
… then the transmitter cannot find a suitable firmware file on the SD card in the slot. If this should happen, check the contents of the “Firmware” folder on
the SD card by inserting it into a PC or laptop.
If you suspect that the centre point of your self-centring
sticks (transmitter controls 1 … 4) does not correspond
exactly to 0% travel of the transmitter control, you can
check and - if necessary - correct it using the following
procedure:
Move to the “Model select” menu and set up a free
model memory, as described on page 66. It makes no
difference whether you select a fixed-wing or helicopter
model type.
Wait for the usual on-screen messages which appear
in the base display after switching models, then move
to the “Servo display” menu with, for example, a simultaneous brief press of the  buttons of the left-hand
touch-key, but WITHOUT moving the trims, or carrying
out any other programming procedures.
If all four of your primary stick functions are still set to
self-centring action, the screen display should look like
this:
1
0%
2
0%
3
0%
4
0%
5
0%
6
0%
7
0%
8
0%
Otherwise the bar and % figure for the non self-centring
stick function - usually that of the throttle / brake or
throttle / collective pitch stick “Ch 1” - will correspond to
the stick’s current position. For example, if the throttle /
brake stick is at the “quarter-throttle” position, then the
screen will look like this:
1
– 50 %
2
0%
3
0%
4
0%
5
0%
6
0%
7
0%
8
0%
Now move each of the two primary sticks to each of the
four possible end-points in turn, but without exerting
pressure at the end-points. At each of the end-points eight in total - the screen should show exactly -100% or
+100%, depending on the side of centre. For example,
if transmitter control 2 is at its right-hand end-point, and
the three other stick functions are all at centre, then your
transmitter’s screen display should look like this:
3
0%
4
0%
5
0%
6
0%
7
0%
8
0%


0%
STICK CALIBRATION
+100%
… and briefly press the central SET button of the
right-hand touch-key. In our example this completes the
calibration of the “left-hand” end-point of the right-hand
stick, and the circle in the centre of the stylised stick
plane flashes to confirm this:
Now repeat the calibration procedure for the right-hand
end-point of the right-hand stick. Repeat the procedure
for the other stick planes.
Notes:
•
If you make a mistake in the calibration
process, simply repeat the appropriate
step.
• Within any one stick plane each of the three calibration positions can be selected directly using the arrow buttons  of the left or right-hand touch-key.
Conclude the procedure by briefly pressing the central
ESC button of the left-hand touch-key, then quit the
“Stick calibration” sub-menu.
STICK CALIBRATION


With the arrow buttons  of the right-hand touch-key
you can now select in turn the positions of the four stick
planes to be calibrated, for example, those of the left /
right plane of the right-hand stick:
Move the “left” flashing arrow marker to the left-hand
end-point using the right-hand stick - again without
exerting pressure …

STICK CALIBRATION
0%

If this checking procedure shows a result of up to four
times 0% and eight times 100% - depending on the
number of your transmitter’s self-centring stick functions
- then the transmitter’s sticks are perfectly calibrated.
You can conclude the procedure and - if you wish erase the model memory you have just created.
If this is not the case, move to the “Stick calibration”
line of the “HIDDEN MODE” menu as described at the
start of the preceding double page, and briefly press the
central SET button of the right-hand touch-key:
0%

–100 %

2
STICK CALIBRATION

0%

1
STICK CALIBRATION
+100%
Now release the self-centring stick, so that it can take
up its centre position, and again press briefly the central
SET button to calibrate the centre position. The “right”
triangular marker now starts to flash:
Description of transmitter
29
Telemetry data display
As described on page 150, as part of the “SENSOR
SELECT” sub-menu of the “Telemetry” menu …
SENSOR SELECT
RECEIVER
GENERAL MODULE
ELECTRIC AIR.MOD
VARIO MODULE
GPS
… and selecting the line for the desired sensor after
superimposing the Select window by pressing one of
the two  buttons. If no sensor is currently active, all
the other displays / sensors described in the following
section are suppressed from the Select list, with the
exception of the “RECEIVER” display, which is described
in the next column:
RECEIVER
… the graphic displays of one or more sensors can be
activated.
The “Receiver” display, and other graphic displays
activated in accordance with your choice of sensors, is
accessed from the transmitter’s base display by briefly
pressing the  or  button of the left or right-hand
touch-key:
RX–S QUA: 100%
RX–S ST : 100%
RX–dBm: –33dBm
TX–dBm: –33dBm
L–PACK:
10ms
RX–VOLT:4.8V
TMP
R–LOW V:4.6V +22°C
You can switch between the displays for the sensors
activated in the “SELECT SENSOR” sub-menu of the
“Telemetry” menu by briefly pressing one of the arrow
buttons  of the left or right-hand touch-key …
RECEIVER
GENERAL
ELECT. AIR
VARIO
GPS
30
Description of transmitter - Telemetry data display
If you wish, you can confirm your choice immediately
after this by pressing the central SET button of the
right-hand touch-key; alternatively you can simply wait
until, after a brief interval, the selected display appears
automatically.
Note:
The displays are described below in the
sequence which occurs when you press the
 button.
For more information on these modules please see the
Appendix, or refer to the product on the Internet at www.
graupner.de/en.
RECEIVER
RX–S QUA: 100%
RX–S ST : 100%
RX–dBm: –33dBm
TX–dBm: –33dBm
L–PACK:
10ms
RX–VOLT:4.8V
TMP
R–LOW V:4.6V +22°C
This screen displays the data which can also be viewed
in the “RX DATAVIEW” screen of the telemetry menu
“SETTING & DATA VIEW” (see page 138), but in
graphic form.
The meanings are as follows:
Value
Explanation
RX-S QUA
Signal quality in %
RX-S STR
Signal strength in %
RX-dBm
Receive performance in dBm
TX-dBm
Transmit power in dBm
L-PACK
Shows the longest period in ms
in which data packets were lost in
transmission from transmitter to
receiver
RX-VOLT
Actual receiver operating voltage in
Volts
R-LOW V
Lowest receiver operating voltage in
Volts since the last time it was switched
on
TMP
The thermometer indicates the
receiver’s current operating
temperature
GENERAL MODUL
RECEIVER
GENERAL
ELECT. AIR
VARIO
GPS
BAT1 E FUEL F
0.0V
T1
BAT2
0.0V T2
0°C
0°C
CELL.V
1:0.00
2:0.00
3:0.00
4:0.00
5:0.00
6:0.00
0
ALT
0m
0m1
BAT1 E FUEL F
0m3
0.0V
POWER
T1
0°C
0.0V
0.0A
BAT2
0
0.0V T2
0°C
This display visualises the data from a General-Engine
module, Order No. 33610, or a General-Air module,
Order No. 33611, connected to the receiver. For more
information on these modules please see the Appendix,
or refer to the product on the Internet at www.graupner.
de/en.
Depending on the sensors connected to the modules,
the following data may be generated constantly on the
screen:
The actual voltage of up to two batteries (BAT1 and
BAT2); the measurement results from up to two temperature sensors (T1 and T2); also a fluid level indicator for
the fueltank.
At the right-hand margin you will see an alternating
display either of the actual cell voltages of a battery
pack (up to six cells), or the current altitude relative to
the pilot’s location, climb / descent in m/1 s and m/3 s,
the actual current in Ampere and the actual voltage of
the battery connected to the sensor.
The meanings are as follows:
Value
Explanation
BAT1 / BAT2
Battery 1 / Battery 2
FUEL
Fuel level / Fueltank indicator
E/F
Empty / full
T1 / T2
Temperature of sensor 1 / sensor 2
CELL V
Cell voltage of cell 1 … max. 6
ALT
Current altitude
0m1
m/1 sec climb / descent
0m3
m/3 sec climb / descent
0.0V
Actual voltage of drive battery
0.0A
Actual current in Ampere
Battery and consumption display
0.0V
0.0A
0mAh
0ml
Engine module (Order No. 33610) or the General Air
module (Order No. 33611), or the consumed fuel in ml.
SENSOR 1
SENSOR 1
0.0V
0°C
This display visualises the actual voltage and temperature measured by a temperature / voltage sensor, Order
No. 33612 or 33613, connected to the “T(EMP)1” socket
of the General Engine module (Order No. 33610) or the
General Air module (Order No. 33611).
SENSOR 2
SENSOR 2
0.0V
0°C
This display visualises the actual voltage and temperature measured by a temperature / voltage sensor, Order
No. 33612 or 33613, connected to the “T(EMP)2” socket
of the General Engine module (Order No. 33610) or the
General Air module (Order No. 33611).
This display visualises the actual voltage, the actual
current drain and the consumed capacity of any battery connected to the “Battery 1” socket of the General
Description of transmitter - Telemetry data display
31
Rev-count sensor
ELECTRIC AIR MODUL
0
0
rpm
0
This display visualises the rotational speed measured by
a rev-count sensor, Order No. 33615 or 33616, connected to the General Engine module (Order No. 33610) or
the General Air module (Order No. 33611).
Note:
For correct display of rotational speed you
must first set the appropriate number of
blades by accessing the Telemetry menu for
the sensor.
Vario
0 mm
0.0 s
This display visualises the data for altitude in m relative
to the location or launch point, and the actual climb /
sink rate in m/s, generated by the integral vario in the
General Engine module (Order No. 33610) or the General Air module (Order No. 33611).
32
Description of transmitter - Telemetry data display
RECEIVER
GENERAL
ELECT. AIR
VARIO
GPS
0.0V
0A
ALT
0m
BAT1
0m/1s
0.0V
0m/3s
T1
0°C
BAT2
0.0V T2
0°C
0.0V
0A
ALT
0m
BAT1
0m/1s
0.0V
0m/3s
T1
0°C
BAT2
0.0V T2
0°C
m/1 s and m/3 s, and - in the centre of the screen - the
actual current drawn from a power source.
At the right-hand margin you will see an alternating
display of the actual cell voltages of the battery packs
(up to seven cells) connected to balancer sockets 1 (L)
or 2 (H).
The meanings are as follows:
Value
Value
0
1L0.00
2L0.00
3L0.00
4L0.00
5L0.00
6L0.00
7L0.00
V
Actual voltage
A
Actual current
BAT1 / BAT2
Battery 1 / Battery 2
ALT
Current altitude
m/1s
m/1 sec climb / descent
0
1H0.00
2H0.00
3H0.00
4H0.00
5H0.00
6H0.00
7H0.00
m/3s
m/3 sec climb / descent
T1 / T2
Temperature at sensor 1 / 2
L/H
Cell voltage of cell 1 … max. 14
L = balancer socket 1
H = balancer socket 2
This display visualises the data from an Electric-Air
module, Order No. 33620, connected to the receiver.
For more information on this module please see the
Appendix, or refer to the product on the Internet at www.
graupner.de/en.
Depending on the sensors connected to the modules,
the following data may be generated constantly on the
screen:
The actual voltage of up to two batteries (BAT1 and
BAT2); the measurement results from up to two temperature sensors (T1 and T2); the current altitude relative
to the pilot’s location, the model’s climb / descent rate in
BAT 1
0.0V
0.0A
0mAh
This display visualises the actual voltage, the actual
current drain and the consumed capacity of any battery
connected to the “Battery 1” socket of the Electric Air
module (Order No. 33620).
SENSOR 1
SENSOR 1
0.0V
0°C
to the location or launch point, and the actual climb /
sink rate in m/s, generated by the integral vario in the
Electric Air module (Order No. 33620).
RECEIVER
GENERAL
ELECT. AIR
VARIO
GPS
m/1s
0.0
SENSOR 2
This display visualises the actual voltage and temperature measured by a temperature / voltage sensor, Order
No. 33612 or 33613, connected to the “T(EMP)2” socket
of the Electric Air module (Order No. 33620).
Vario
0 mm
0.0 s
The pre-set altitude limit below the
launch point; below this altitude the
transmitter emits audible warning
signals
m/1s
m/1 sec climb / descent
m/3s
m/3 sec climb / descent
m/10s
m/10 sec climb / descent
H
High
L
Low
VARIO
This display visualises the actual voltage and temperature measured by a temperature / voltage sensor, Order
No. 33612 or 33613, connected to the “T(EMP)1” socket
of the Electric Air module (Order No. 33620).
SENSOR 2
0.0V
0°C
MIN
H
ALT
0
m/3s
0.0
m/10s
0.0
RXSQ
0
L
Vario
0 mm
0.0 s
MAX
0m
MIN
0m
This display visualises the data from a Vario module,
Order No. 33601, connected to the receiver.
The meanings are as follows:
Value
Explanation
ALT
Current altitude
RXSQ
Signal quality of the signal picked up by
the receiver in %
MAX
The pre-set altitude limit relative to
the launch point; above this altitude
the transmitter emits audible warning
signals
This display visualises the data for altitude in m relative
to the location or launch point, and the actual climb /
sink rate in m/s, generated by a Vario module (Order No.
33601) connected to the Telemetry socket of a receiver.
GPS
RECEIVER
GENERAL
ELECT. AIR
VARIO
GPS
This display visualises the data for altitude in m relative
Description of transmitter - Telemetry data display
33
RXSQ
0
DIS
0m
ALT
0m
0.0m/1s
0m/3s
N
W
0
Kmh
E
S
N
E
Vario
0 mm
0.0 s
0°00.0000
0°00.0000
This display visualises the data delivered by a GPS
module with integral vario, Order No. 33600, connected
to the receiver.
In addition to the model’s current positional data and
speed, shown in the centre of the screen, the display
also includes the current altitude in relation to the launch
point and the model’s climb / sink rate in m/1 s, m/3 s
and m/10 s. The current reception quality and the model’s distance from the launch point are also displayed.
The meanings are as follows:
This display visualises the data for altitude in m relative
to the location or launch point, and the actual climb /
sink rate in m/s, generated by the integral vario in the
GPS / Vario module (Order No. 33600).
GPS
N
W
0
Kmh
E
0km/h
m
0DIS
0.0m/s
0ALT
m
Value
Explanation
W/N/E/S
West / North / East / South
Kmh
Speed
RXSQ
Signal quality of downlink channel
DIS
Distance
ALT
Current altitude relative to launch point
This display visualises the data delivered by a GPS
module with integral vario, Order No. 33600, connected
to the receiver.
The meanings are as follows:
m/1s
m/1 sec climb / descent
Value
Explanation
m/3s
m/3 sec climb / descent
W/N/E/S
West / North / East / South
km/h
Speed
DIS
Horizontal distance in m
m/s
Climb / descent in m/s
ALT
Altitude relative to launch point in m
34
Description of transmitter - Telemetry data display
S
For your notes
35
On-screen warnings
Warnings
BIND N/A
OK
RF ON/OFF?
ON OFF
batter y
needs
charging
fail safe
setup
t.b.d
MISSING
IMPORT
DATA
OK
36
“Binding not present”
No receiver is bound to the
currently active model memory. A brief touch of the SET
button takes you directly to the
corresponding option.
Do you want the RF signal to
be “ON” or “OFF?
Battery must be charged
Operating voltage too low
Fail-Safe not yet set up
On-screen function fields
CAN‘T
RECEIVE
DATA
OK
no
student
signal
SD-CARD
INSERT
OK
The throttle stick (or helicopter
limiter) is set too far in the
direction of full-throttle
RF
MUST BE
OFF
OK
Request to switch off the RF
section
(voice files can only be loaded
with the RF section switched
off)
No connection between
Teacher and Pupil transmitters
No SD or SDHC memory card
in the card slot, or card cannot
be read.
TRAINER
Wireless Link
ACT
INH
A “wireless Trainer connection” was used before the
transmitter was last switched off; do you wish that connection to be continued (ACT), or switched OFF (INH)?
No suitable voice files found
on the memory card
throttle
too
high !
No bound receiver in range.
Description of transmitter - On-screen warnings and function fields
SEL, STO, SYM, ASY,
,
The bottom line of the screen displays function fields
which vary according to the menu selected.
SEL STO SYM ASY
The function fields are activated by touching the SET
button.
Function fields
• SELselect
• STO store (e. g. transmitter control position)
• SYM adjust values symmetrically
adjust values asymmetrically
• ASY Switch symbol field
•
(assigning switches of all kinds)
Switch to second page (next menu) •
within a menu
Position display
Rotary proportional controls CTRL 7 and 8
As soon as you operate one of the two rotary controls
CTRL 7 + 8 on the centre console, a small symbol appears to the right of the two vertical position indicators:
At the same time the position display of the two central
vertical bars switches for the duration of the actuation
from the display of the current trim position to the current position of the rotary controls CTRL 7 + 8.
As you would expect, the left-hand bar represents the
position of the left-hand rotary control CTRL 7, and the
right-hand bar reflects the position of CTRL 8 (however,
both horizontal bars continue to show the current position of the corresponding transmitter stick trim levers):
#01
5.2V
3:33h
stop
flt
M
0:00
0:00
Input lock
To prevent programming errors, it is possible to lock
the touch-keys, and with them access to all the set-up
options, from the base display of the mx-16 HoTT
transmitter by touching the ESC and SET buttons for
about two seconds. This is indicated by an inverted key
symbol at the centre point of the trim bars:
#01
5.2V
3:33h
stop
flt
0:00
0:00
M
HoTT
5.5V
The lock is immediately active, but the control system
remains ready for use.
Touching the ESC and SET buttons again for about two
seconds disengages the lock: the next time you switch
the transmitter on, the lock is also disengaged.
HoTT
About two seconds after you cease operating one of
the two rotary controls, the screen reverts to a display
of the current position of the four trim levers for the two
dual-axis stick units.
Description of transmitter - Position display and Input lock
37
Using the transmitter for the first time
Preliminary notes regarding the mx-16 HoTT transmitter
For more information please visit our Internet site at www.graupner.de/en
Preliminary notes
RF ON/OFF?
In theory the Graupner|SJ HoTT system permits the
ON OFF
simultaneous operation of more than 200 models.
Within this period you can switch off the RF signal if
However, in practice the mixed operation of different
required by moving the black field to the right using the
technical systems in the 2.4 GHz ISM band - as required
 or  arrows of the right-hand touch-key; when you
by the approval regulations - reduces this number condo this, ON should appear normal, and OFF in inverse
siderably. Generally, however, it will always be possible
form (black background).
to operate even more models simultaneously on the 2.4
GHz band than on the 35 / 40 MHz frequency bands
RF ON/OFF?
ON OFF
which we have used to date. However, the actual limiting
factor - as it has always been - is likely to remain the
You can now switch the RF module off by briefly presssize of the (air-) space available. The simple fact that
ing the central SET button of the right-hand touch-key.
no frequency control procedure is necessary - a great
Until this point the central LED glowed blue, but it now
convenience in itself - equates to an enormous gain in
changes to red, and at the same time the screen switchsafety, especially at flying sites where groups of pilots
es to the transmitter’s base display:
may be distributed over a large area, with nobody in
overall control.
0:00
stop
Battery charged?
When you take receipt of your transmitter, the battery
will be in the discharged state, so you must first charge
it as described on page 14. If you do not do this, the
battery will soon fall below the pre-set threshold voltage,
and you will see and hear a warning signal to remind
you to recharge it. The threshold
voltage can be adjusted in the
batter y
needs
“Battery warning threshold” line
charging
of the “Basic settings” menu;
see page 134.
Switching the transmitter on
When you switch the transmitter on, the following display
appears in the centre of the transmitter screen for about
two seconds:
38
Using the transmitter for the first time
#01
5.2V
0:33h
flt
M
0:00
HoTT
0.0V
The symbol combination means that the currently active model memory is already “bound” to a Graupner|SJ
HoTT receiver, but there is currently no connection with
this receiver. (In our example we - of course - switched
off the RF signal!)
In contrast, if you switch the transmitter on without
switching off the RF signal, the central LED glows an
intense blue, and the symbolic transmitter mast flashes.
At the same time the transmitter emits an audible warning until a connection is made with the corresponding
receiver. Once this connection exists, a field strength
indicator appears instead of the “x” at the base of the
symbolic aerial, for example
, and the visual and
audible warnings cease.
At the right of the same line a display in the same format
appears when a telemetry connection is made, showing
the strength of the telemetry signal picked up from the
receiver (>M ) together with the actual voltage of the
receiver power supply.
appears, and
However, if the symbol combination
the central LED glows a constant red, the currently
active model memory is not “bound” to any receiver.
Low-voltage warning
If the transmitter voltage falls below a particular value,
a visual and audible low-voltage warning is generated.
The default value is 4.7 V, but this can be varied in the
“Basic settings” menu (page 134).
Important notes:
The transmitter included in the set is
•
prepared at the factory with the correct settings for most European countries (except France).
If you wish to operate the RC system in France,
you MUST first set the Country setting on the
transmitter to “FRANCE” mode; see page 135.
IT IS PROHIBITED to use the system IN FRANCE
using the Universal / EUROPE mode!
• You can operate up to eight servos using the
mx-16 HoTT transmitter and the receiver supplied in the set, which is already bound to the
transmitter.
However, in the interest of maximum possible flexibility, control channels 5 … 8 are not assigned to transmitter controls by default; this
also helps to eliminate the danger of inadvertently using them incorrectly. This means that any
servos connected to these channels will simply
“stay put” at their centre position until a transmitter control is assigned to the channel in question. For the same reason virtually all the mixers
are inactive by default. For more details of this
please refer to page 86 (fixed-wing model) or 88
(helicopter).
• The basic procedure for programming a new
model memory can be found on page 66, and
in the programming examples starting on page
164.
• When switching on, binding or setting up the radio control system, please ensure at all times
that the transmitter aerial is an adequate distance
from the receiver aerials. If the transmitter aerial
is too close to the receiver aerials, the receiver
will be swamped, and the red LED on the receiver will begin to glow. At the same time the downlink channel will stop working. As a result the
field strength bars on the transmitter screen are
replaced by “x”, and the receiver battery voltage
is displayed as 0.0 V. At the same time the radio
control system switches to Fail-Safe mode, see
page 136, i.e. the servos remain fixed in their
current position for as long as reception is not
possible, and until a new, valid signal is picked
up.
If this should happen, simply increase the distance between transmitter and receiver until the
displays revert to “normal”.
warning:
Never switch off the transmitter while the
model is in operation! However, if this
does happen, keep calm and wait until
the transmitter display goes off and the transmitter
has shut down completely. This takes at least three
seconds. Don’t switch the transmitter back on until
then. Otherwise, there is a danger that the transmitter will get “hung up” immediately after being
switched back on, causing you to lose control of the
model. Then it will not be possible to restart the
transmitter until you have switched it off again and
have carried out the described procedure correctly.
Using the transmitter for the first time
39
Downloading and updating the transmitter firmware
The transmitter firmware can be updated at the owner’s
risk using either of two methods:
• As described under “FIRMWARE UPDATE / Changing the screen language” in the section entitled
“Hidden mode” on page 27.
• As described in the next section, using the five-pin
mini-USB port on the back of the transmitter, in
conjunction with a PC or laptop running Windows XP,
Vista or 7.
Downloading a software package
Current software and information can be found in the
Download section for the corresponding product at www.
graupner.de/en.
Note:
Once you have registered your transmitter at
https://www.graupner.de/en/service/
product_registration.aspx you will automatically be informed of new updates by e-mail as they
become available.
Press the ENTER key of the PC or laptop once more,
and the page you require will appear:
This takes you to the home page of the Graupner company website, where you will find an input field at top
right below the title “Suchen / Search”:
The easiest method of accessing the “corresponding”
product page, as mentioned above, is to enter www.
graupner.de/en in the address line of your Internet
browser, and then press the ENTER button of your PC
or laptop:
Place the mouse pointer in this field and then enter a
search term, for example, the article number printed on
the type placard on the back of your transmitter:
40
Downloading and updating the transmitter firmware
If you now use the mouse to move your browser’s lateral
scroll bar down a little, you will see the tabs “Features”,
“Replacement parts”, “Accessories” and “Downloads”.
Click on the “Download” tab to move to the Download
area:
of the download file initially tells you whether firmware
updates are present, and the version numbers of the
relevant firmware files also change.
Select the required file(s) and start the downloading
process by double-clicking on “Download” below the
selected file.
Selecting “HoTT-Software VX” downloads the file
“HoTT_Software_VX.zip”. This compressed file contains
all the files required to update the transmitter, HoTT
receiver, sensors, etc.
Please note: at the time of revising this manual the
current version of the program package is version “4” “HoTT-Software V4”.
If the last update you loaded is version “V3” or older,
all components of the radio control system MUST be
updated to version “V4”. If you ignore this, you may
encounter malfunctions in individual components. The
same applies to future download packages “V5” or
higher.
If individual firmware files change within a version “VX”,
all you need to do is install the new, later firmware version for the corresponding product. The date of creation
Now save the file in a folder of your choice, and unpack
it using a suitable program.
If a transmitter update does not function as described
below, please continue reading the section entitled
“Restoring the transmitter firmware” on page 44.
Updating the mx-16 HoTT software
To update the transmitter software you only need the
USB lead supplied as standard with the USB interface,
Order No. 7168.6. This can be plugged directly into the
five-pin mini-USB socket on the back of the transmitter.
Important notes:
Please note that reliable communica•
tion between your system’s HoTT components is only guaranteed if the firmware is compatible. That is why the programs
required to update all the HoTT components and
files are grouped in a single file, which is currently named HoTT_Software_V4.zip”.
• It is essential to check the state of charge of your
transmitter battery before you carry out any update. For safety’s sake recharge it and back up
all occupied model memories, so that you can restore them if anything goes wrong.
• The connection between the transmitter and the
PC or laptop must not be interrupted during the
update process, so please ensure that there is reliable contact between the transmitter and the
computer.
1. Unpacking the program package
Unpack the file “HoTT_Software_VX.zip” into a convenient folder. For example, you might name the folder “HoTT_Software_VX”, the “X” standing for the current version number.
2. Installing the driver
If you have not already done so, install the driver software which is included in the program package in the
“USB driver” folder; this is necessary in order to use
the transmitter’s integral USB port.
Start the driver installation by double-clicking on the
corresponding file, and follow the instructions. After a successful installation the computer will need to
be restarted. Note that the driver only has to be installed once.
3. Connecting the transmitter to the PC
Connect the USB lead to the PC or laptop and the
five-pin mini-USB socket on the back of the transmitter, with the transmitter switched off. Check that the
USB lead is making solid contact.
Downloading and updating the transmitter firmware
41
4. Updating the mx-16 HoTT transmitter software
Start the program “Firmware_Upgrade_grStudio_VerX.X.exe”, which is now stored in the folder you have
just named “HoTT_Software_VX” (or similar). (Note:
version 1.9, which is current at the time this manual went to press, starts without being installed beforehand.):
Open the “Controller Menu” and click on “Port Select”
in the “Upgrade” folder. Alternatively select the “Port
Select” entry under “Menu”:
window, i.e. the port to which the USB interface is
connected. You can recognise this by the name “Silicon Labs CP210x USB to UART Bridge” in the “Device Name” column. In the screen-shot above this
would be the “COM 3” port.
Now call up the “Firmware Upgrade” option in the
“Transmitter” folder under “Controller Menu”. Alternatively select the “Firmware Upgrade” entry under
“Menu”:
When you have called up the program, you will see
the number “1” flashing red in the numeric row 1 … 7
at the top of the window, indicating that the program
is currently operating at “[Process Step] 1”.
In each case the meaning of the currently flashing
step is indicated immediately below the numeric row:
For example, at Step 1: “Connect USB lead to PC
and transmitter” and “Press File Browse button and
select Update file”, as shown here.
Now select the correct COM port in the “Port select”
42 Downloading and updating the transmitter firmware
Note:
At any time you can call up an explanation of any step in the form of Quick-Info
by positioning the mouse pointer over a
number.
If you have not already done so, connect your transmitter to the PC or laptop at this point. Now click on
the button marked “File Browse” and select the firmware update file matching your transmitter in the
“Open file” dialogue which now appears; the file suffix will be “bin”.
In the case of the zip file “HoTT_Software_VX” which
you have already downloaded and unpacked, this
will usually be found in the folder “Official Version \
33112_ …_ 33032_mx-xx_mc-32 \ SD card \ Firmware”, and is called “mx-16_1vXXX_German.bin” (or
“… English.bin”). The file appears in the associated
window. At the same time the “2” starts to flash red
instead of the “1”.
The firmware files are encoded in a manner speci­
fic to each product, i.e. if you accidentally select a file
which does not match the product (e.g. receiver update file instead of transmitter update file), the popup window “Product code error” appears, and you will
be unable to continue the update process.
Follow the instructions for “[Process Step] 2”. If you
have not already done so, switch the transmitter on
at this point, and then start the transmitter update by
clicking on the “Download Start” button.
Shortly after this you will see a warning that the
transmitter’s RF signal is being disabled: “RF will be
switched OFF.” Before clicking on “Yes” you should
therefore switch the receiving system off if it is currently operating.
At this point the actual update process begins, and a
progress bar starts to advance above the constantly changing lines of text. At the same time the flashing red number continues to indicate the current “Process Step”.
You must not interrupt the connection between
the transmitter and the PC during the update process!
Click on “OK”, then switch the transmitter off and finally disconnect the lead between the transmitter and
the PC or laptop.
If the progress bar fails to advance, or if the update
process terminates before it reaches the 100% mark,
close the program and repeat the update procedure,
i.e. carry out each of the steps described above once
more. If an update fails repeatedly, please read the
following section.
If you accidentally attempt to load a version of the
firmware which is correct, but older than the one currently in the transmitter, the screen will display a corresponding warning:
The update is finished when the progress bar reaches the right-hand end, and the message “Firmware
Download Success” appears. At the same time the
[Process Steps] display moves on to “7” “Update Process Finish”:
Unless you really want to load older firmware, click
on “No” with the mouse, and load the correct *.bin file
using the “File Browse” button.
Downloading and updating the transmitter firmware
43
Restoring the transmitter’s firmware
„Emergency“ program
Restoring the mx-16 HoTT transmitter software
If a transmitter firmware update should fail, or if the
transmitter software “hangs” (in which case you may not
be able to switch the transmitter off using the “POWER”
switch), then you can restore the earlier firmware using
the “Emergency” program segment.
If you switch the transmitter off, but the screen continues
to be active, then please set the switch to the “POWER=OFF” position, unplug the transmitter battery, wait a
few seconds, then plug it in again - but leave the POWER switch at the “OFF” position!
1. Starting the “Emergency” program
Now move to the “Controller Menu” and select the
“Emergency” entry under the heading “Transmitter”:
Ensure that the transmitter is switched off! Connect
the USB lead to the PC or laptop, and to the USB
socket on the back of the transmitter.
2. Restoring the mx-16 transmitter software
Press the “File Browse” button and search for the
current firmware in the program window which now
opens; as mentioned earlier, you will find this in the
“Official Version \ 33112_…_33032_mx-xx_mc-32 \
SD card \ Firmware” folder of the unpacked “HoTT_
Software_VX” file. The file matching the mx-16
transmitter is called: “mx-16_1vXXX_German.bin” (or
“…English.bin”).
Now press the “Download Start” button to initiate the
update process. Wait for a moment until the status
44
Restoring the transmitter’s firmware
bar starts to advance, and only then switch the transmitter on. Don’t be surprised if the screen comes to
life, but displays no information.
(If the progress bar reaches the right-hand end before the transmitter is switched on, you will have to
click on the “Download Start” button again.)
After you switch the transmitter on, there may well
be a wait lasting a minute before the process actually starts.
The transmitter’s signal melody sounds, the transmitter screen switches itself on with the start display
“mx-16 HoTT”, and the current firmware version is
shown on the screen.
Finally click on “OK”. Switch the transmitter off, and
disconnect the USB lead from the transmitter and the
PC or laptop.
The progress bar indicates that the data transfer process is under way, and the screen displays [Process
Step] “No 4, Firmware downloading …”.
Ensure that the USB lead is making reliable contact,
and do not interrupt the update process.
The firmware transfer is finished when the progress
bar reaches the right-hand end; you will then see the
message “File Transfer Success” to indicate that the
transfer has been successful.
For your notes
45
Using the receiver for the first time
Preliminary notes regarding the GR-16 receiver
For more information please visit the Internet at www.graupner.de/en.
Receiving system
about one second.
The mx-16 HoTT radio control set includes a GR-16
Servo connections and polarity
2.4 GHz bi-directional receiver which is suitable for
The servo sockets of Graupner|SJ HoTT receivers are
connection to a maximum of eight servos.
numbered. The connector system is polarised: look for
If you switch a HoTT receiver on, and “its” transmitter is
the small chamfers when inserting the connectors, and
switched off or not within range, the red LED on the reon no account force the plugs into the sockets.
ceiver lights up steadily for about one second, and then
The sockets marked “1+B-” and “6+B-” are intended
starts to flash slowly. This means that no connection with for the connection of the battery. It is also possible to
a Graupner|SJ HoTT transmitter exists (at this stage).
connect the appropriate servos to both these sockets in
When the connection is made, the green LED glows
parallel with the power supply by using a Y-lead, Order
constantly, and the red LED goes out.
No. 3936.11.
In order to create a connection, the Graupner|SJ HoTT
Do not connect the battery to these
receiver must first be “bound” to “its” model memory in
sockets with reversed polarity, as this is
“its” Graupner|SJ HoTT transmitter; this procedure is
likely to ruin the receiver and any devices
known as “binding”. However, binding is only necessary
connected to it.
once for each receiver / model memory combination
The power supply voltage is through-connected via all
(see pages 80 or 88), and has been carried out at
the numbered sockets. The function of each individual
the factory for model memory 1 using the components
channel is determined by the transmitter you are using,
supplied in the set. You therefore only need to carry out
rather than by the receiver. Example: the throttle servo
the “binding” process - as described later - with additionsocket is defined by the radio control system, and may
al receivers, or if you switch to a different model memdiffer according to the make and type.
ory. The procedure can also be repeated whenever you
In the case of Graupner radio control systems the
wish - for instance, if you change the transmitter.
throttle function is assigned to channels 1 or 6, whereas
Receiver voltage display
it is allocated to channel 3 in the case of Futaba radio
Once a telemetry connection exists, the actual voltage
control systems, for example.
of the receiver power supply is displayed on the rightObserve the installation notes regarding the receiver,
hand side of the transmitter screen.
receiver aerial and servos, which you will find on page
54.
Temperature warning
If the temperature of the receiver falls below a limit value
set on the receiver (the default is -10°C), or exceeds
the upper warning threshold, which is also set on the
receiver (the default is +55°C), the transmitter generates
a warning in the form of steady beeps at intervals of
46
Using the receiver for the first time
Concluding notes:
The much higher servo resolution of the
•
HoTT system results in a substantially
more direct response compared with previous technologies. Please take a little time to be-
come accustomed to the finer control characteristics
offered by the system!
• If you wish to use a speed controller with integral
BEC* system in parallel with a separate receiver battery, in most cases (depending on the speed controller) the positive terminal (red wire) must be removed
from the three-pin connector, as shown in the diagram. Be sure to read the appropriate notes in the instructions supplied with your speed controller before
doing this.
Carefully raise the central lug of the connector slightred
ly (1), withdraw the red
1
wire (2) and insulate the
bare contact with tape
3
2
to avoid possible short
circuits (3).
Reset
To carry out a receiver reset, locate the SET button on
the top of the receiver and hold it pressed in while you
switch the receiver power supply on. Hold the receiver’s
SET button pressed in until the green and the red LED
goes out; this takes about four seconds.
If you carried out the reset with the transmitter switched
off, or with an unbound receiver, the receiver LED will
flash red slowly after a pause lasing about two seconds.
At this point it is immediately possible to initiate a Bind
process at the transmitter.
If the reset is carried out with an already bound receiver,
if the transmitter is switched on, and if the associated
model memory is active, then the LED lights up green
after a short interval to indicate that your transmitter /
receiving system is ready for use once more.
* Battery Elimination Circuit
Please note the following:
Resetting the receiver resets ALL the
settings stored in the receiver to the
default settings, with the exception of the
binding information!
If you carry out a RESET by mistake, this means
that you will have to restore all the receiver settings
entered using the Telemetry menu.
On the other hand, a deliberate RESET is particularly useful if you wish to “re-house” a receiver in a
different model, as it represents an easy method of
avoiding the transference of unsuitable settings.
Using the receiver for the first time
47
Firmware update of the receiver
Firmware updates for the receiver are carried out using
the telemetry socket on the side of the receiver, in conjunction with a PC running Windows XP, Vista or 7. For
this you require the optional USB interface, No. 7168.6
and the optional adapter lead, Order No. 7168.6S. The
software and files also required for the process can
be found in the Download area for the corresponding
product at www.graupner.de/en.
Note:
Once you have registered your transmitter at
https://www.graupner.de/en/service/
product_registration.aspx you will automatically be informed of new updates by e-mail as they
become available.
Updating the receiver firmware
Important notes:
Please note that reliable communica•
tion between your system’s HoTT components is only guaranteed if the firmware is compatible. That is why the programs
required to update all the HoTT components and
files are grouped in a single file, which is currently named HoTT_Software_V4.zip”.
• It is essential to check the state of charge of your
receiver battery before you carry out any update.
For safety’s sake recharge it before updating.
• The connection between the receiver and the PC
or laptop must not be interrupted during the update process, so please ensure that there is reliable contact between the receiver and the computer.
48
Updating the receiver firmware
1. Installing the driver
The driver software for the USB interface, Order No.
7168.6, is identical to the driver software of the interface fitted to the mx-16 transmitter. This means that
the driver only has to be installed once; the procedure is described on page 41.
2. Connecting the receiver to the PC
Connect the USB interface, Order No. 7168.6 to the
receiver socket marked “- + T” using the adapter lead,
Order No. 7168.6S. The connectors are polarised:
look for the small chamfer on the side. The connectors should engage easily; on no account use force.
al went to press, starts without being installed beforehand.):
Adapter lead
Order No. 7168.6A
If a central red wire is present,
cut through it
Open the “Controller Menu” and click on “Port Select”
in the “Upgrade” folder. Alternatively select the “Port
Select” entry under “Menu”:
Caution:
If your adapter lead is of the earlier three-core
type, first cut the central red wire in the adapter
lead, Order No. 7168.6A.
Now connect the USB interface to the PC or laptop
using the USB lead (PC USB / mini-USB) also supplied in the set. When the components are connected
correctly, a red LED on the interface circuit board
should light up red for a few seconds.
The receiver should be left switched off.
3. Firmware update
Start the program “Firmware_Upgrade_grStudio_
Ver-X.X.exe” by double-clicking on it, as described
for updating the transmitter software; see page 42.
(Version 1.9, which is current at the time this manu-
Now select the correct COM port in the “Port select”
window, i.e. the port to which the USB interface is
connected. You can recognise this by the name “Silicon Labs CP210x USB to UART Bridge” in the “Device Name” column. In the screen-shot above this
would be the “COM 3” port.
Now call up the “HoTT Receiver” option in the “Device” folder under “Controller Menu”. Alternatively select the “HoTT Receiver Upgrade” entry under
“Menu”:
the button marked “File Browse” and select the firmware update file matching your receiver in the “Open
file” dialogue which now appears; the file suffix will
be “bin”.
In the case of the zip file “HoTT_Software_VX” which
you have already downloaded and unpacked, this
will usually be found in the folder whose name starts
with the Order Number of the receiver to be updated. If your receiver is the GR-16 which is supplied in the set as standard, this would be the folder
“33508_8CH_RX”. The file appears in the associated
window. At the same time the “2” starts to flash red:
with the SET button pressed in. After a few seconds
“Line 3” appears in the column “No” of the Status display, with the message: “Found target device …”. Release the button at this point. The actual firmware
update process now starts automatically: “11, Start
Firmware upgrade…”.
If the device is not detected, a pop-up window appears with the message “Target device ID not found”.
If this should happen, check your update arrangements and try again:
When you have called up the program, you will see
the number “1” flashing red in the numeric row 1 … 5
at the top of the window, indicating that the program
is currently operating at “[Process Step] 1”.
In each case the meaning of the currently flashing
step is indicated immediately below the numeric row:
Note:
For example, at Step 1: “Connect USB lead to HoTT
receiver” and “Press File Browse button and select
Update file”, as shown here.
Note:
At any time you can call up an explanation of any step in the form of Quick-Info
by positioning the mouse pointer over a
number.
If you have not already done so, connect your receiver to the PC or laptop at this point. Now click on
The firmware files are encoded in a
manner specific to each product, i.e. if
you accidentally select a file which does
not match the product (e.g. transmitter update file
instead of receiver update file), the pop-up window
“Product code error” appears, and you will be unable
to continue the update process.
Follow the instructions for “[Process Step] 2”. With
the receiver still switched off, click on the “Download
Start” button in the “HoTT Receiver Upgrade” window.
(The display changes to “[Process Step] 3”.) Wait until the progress bar starts to advance; this may take
several seconds, depending on your computer.
Only at this point should you switch the receiver on
In the Status display the progress of the firmware update is indicated by the progress bar.
During the update process the green and the red
LED on the receiver glows a constant green and red.
You must not interrupt the connection between
the transmitter and the PC during the update process!
The update is finished when the progress bar reaches the right-hand end, and the message “12, Complete !!” appears in the bottom line of the Status display. At the same time the [Process Steps] display
moves on to “5”.
Updating the receiver firmware
49
When the update is completed, the green LED goes
out, and the red LED starts to flash.
If the process terminates before the 100% mark is
reached, switch the receiver power supply off and repeat the update procedure, i.e. carry out each of the
steps described above once more.
If you accidentally attempt to load a version of the
firmware which is correct, but older than the one currently in the receiver, the screen will display a corresponding warning:
Unless you really want to load older firmware, click
on “No” with the mouse, and load the correct *.bin file
using the “File Browse” button.
Finally you MUST initialise the receiver, i.e. reset
it to the factory default settings.
This is accomplished by switching the receiver off
and removing the interface lead.
4. Initialising the receiver
In the interests of safety you should now re-initialise the receiver before re-using it. The screen-shot
shown above indicates this:
Hold the SET button on the receiver pressed in while
you switch the receiver on. The red and green LEDs
flash four times, followed by a pause lasting about
two seconds. At this point the red LED starts flash50
Updating the receiver firmware
ing on its own. At this point you can release the SET
button.
Switch the transmitter on again, and wait until RF
transmission is active: about two or three seconds after this the green LED of the bound receiver will glow
constantly. If you have not yet bound the receiver to
the transmitter, you can now do so as described on
pages 80 and 88.
Important note:
With the exception of the binding information, all the receiver’s previously
programmed settings are now reset to
the default values. You must therefore enter the
data again if necessary; see the section entitled
“Reset” on page 46.
If you wish to “save” the data, you should run the
program “Receiver Setup” before updating the receiver. This will spare you the trouble of re-programming the receiver under the “Telemetry”
menu.
For your notes
51
Backing up receiver settings
The “Receiver Setup” segment of the program “Firmware_Upgrade_grStudio” can be used to save all the
data programmed in the receiver in a file on your computer, so that you can transfer the data set back into the
receiver in an emergency; this eliminates the need to
re-program the receiver using the “Telemetry” menu, as
would otherwise be necessary.
We recommend that you call up the “Receiver Setup” program from the “Firmware_Upgrade_grStudio”
program. Alternatively you can start the application
directly. You will find the file “Receiver_Setup.exe” in the
“Graupner_PC-Software” folder.
Note:
If you call up “Receiver Setup” from the
Firmware_Upgrade program, ensure that the
sub-program “Receiver_Setup.exe” is located
in the same folder as the “Firmware_Upgrade_grStudio”
program; see the screen-shot above!
For this program you need the USB interface, Order No.
7168.6, and the interface lead, Order No. 7168.S, supplied in the mx-16 radio control set, Order No. 33116.
Backing up receiver settings
1. Connecting the receiver to the PC
With the receiver switched off, connect the USB interface, Order No. 7168.6, to the socket marked “-+T”
on the receiver using the adapter lead, Order No.
7168.6S.
52
Backing up receiver settings
The connector system is polarised: note the small
chamfers on the edges. Do not use force under any
circumstances; the plugs should engage easily.
Adapter lead
Order No. 7168.6A
the “Controller Menu” (see earlier), and note the Com
port number at the entry “Silicon Labs CP210x USB
to UART Bridge”. In accordance with the previous update descriptions this would be the port “COM 3”.
If a central red wire is present,
cut through it
Caution:
If you are using the - earlier - adapter
lead, Order No. 7168.6A, and this is
fitted with a three-core lead, cut
through the central red wire of the adapter lead
before using it.
Now connect the USB interface to the PC or laptop
using the USB lead supplied in the set (PC-USB / mini-USB). If connected correctly, a red LED on the interface circuit board should light up.
The receiver should be left switched off at this point.
2. Receiver Setup: selecting the port
Start the program “Firmware_Upgrade_grStudio_
Ver-X.X.exe” by double-clicking on it, as described for
updating the transmitter software (see page 42).
(Version 1.9, which is current at the time this manual went to press, starts without being installed beforehand.)
Open the “Controller Menu” and click on “Receiver
Setup” in the “Upgrade / Link” folder. Alternatively select the “Receiver Setup” entry under “Menu”.
A program window now appears, in which you should
start by setting the “correct” COM port for the USB interface, Order No. 7168.6. If you are not sure of this,
check the COM port in the “Port select” window in
(If you select the wrong port, the program will alert
you to the error.)
3. Reading out receiver data
Click on the “Connect” button and wait until the Status bar below it starts to advance:
Locate the SET button on the receiver and hold it
pressed in while you switch it on. After about three
seconds the receiver’s current values will be displayed in the corresponding fields. If the progress bar
is “faster than you are”, and reaches the end before
you have switched the receiver on, the pop-up window shown here appears. In this case repeat the procedure.
backed up when you click on the “Save” button. When
the process is complete, this message appears:
Important:
The active connection is terminated using
the “Disconnect” button, but you should
only do this if you wish to initialise the receiver directly, as described on page 46 or 50,
and do not wish to overwrite it with a data set you
have already saved.
4. Saving receiver data
The “File Save” button backs up the current servo
configuration on the PC.
The Windows “Save as” dialogue now opens:
First select a folder of your choice in which to save
the file, and enter under “File name” an appropriate and unambiguous name, so that you can easily
find the file again at a later date. The program automatically appends the file suffix “rdf”. The data set is
Click on “OK” to close the window.
You can now reset the receiver to the default settings,
as mentioned earlier and described on page 46.
not be used at present. You can find out about the
latest state of the software in the Download area
for the mx-16 on the Graup­ner website.
A separate manual for the whole “Firm•
ware_Upgrade_grStudio_Ver-X.X” program package is in preparation, and
will be updated constantly as soon as new options are available.
Copying a data set to the receiver
You can re-load the backed-up data into the receiver
using the “File Load” function of the Receiver Setup
program.
The first step is to connect the receiver as described
under point 3 “Reading out receiver data”, and click
on the “Connect” button. Assuming that the receiver has
been previously initialised, the program reads out the
default settings.
Now select the desired “rdf” file from the appropriate
folder and click on “OK” in the “File Load” pop-up window. Click on the “Write” button to transfer the data to
the receiver connected to the PC.
When the data transfer is complete, the pop-up window
“Receiver Data Write Success” appears.
Finally you can click on “OK” to confirm the action, then
on the “Disconnect” button to disconnect the Receiver
Setup program from the receiver.
Important notes:
The “Receiver Setup” program in•
cludes additional functions which are
currently still in preparation; they must
Backing up receiver settings
53
Installation notes
Installing the receiver
Regardless of which Graupner receiving system you are
using, the procedure is always the same:
Please note that the receiver aerials must be
arranged at least 5 cm away from all large
metal parts and leads which are not attached
or connected directly to the receiver. This includes steel
and carbon fibre components, servos, fuel pumps,
cables of all sorts, etc. Ideally the receiver should be
installed in an easily accessible position in the model,
away from all other installed components. Under no
circumstances run servo leads immediately adjacent to
the receiver aerials, far less coil them round it!
Tests have shown that a vertical (upright) position of a
single aerial produces the best results when long approaches are flown with a model. If the receiver features
a diversity aerial system (two aerials), the second aerial
should be deployed at an angle of 90° to the first.
The servo sockets of Graupner receivers are numbered.
The power supply is through-connected via all the numbered sockets, and in principle can be connected to any
of the servo sockets. It is also possible to connect the
power supply via a Y-lead, Order No. 3936.11, in parallel
with a servo.
The function of each individual channel is determined
by the transmitter in use, rather than by the receiver.
However, it is possible to alter the channel assignment
(mapping) by changing the programming in the Telemetry menu. Nevertheless, we recommend that you carry
out this process using the “Receiver output” option; see
page 79 or 87.
The following section contains notes and helpful
ideas on installing radio control components in the
model:
1. Wrap the receiver in foam rubber at least 6 mm thick.
Fix the foam round the receiver using rubber bands,
to protect it from vibration, hard landings and crash
damage.
2. All switches must be installed in a position where
they will not be affected by exhaust gases or vibration. The switch toggle must be free to move over its
full range of travel.
3. Always install servos using the vibration-damping
grommets and tubular metal spacers supplied. The
rubber grommets provide some degree of protection
from mechanical shock and severe vibration. Don’t
over-tighten the servo retaining screws, as this will
compress the grommets and thereby reduce the vibration protection they afford. The system offers good
security and vibration protection for your servos, but
only if the servo retaining screws are fitted and tightened properly. The drawing below shows how to install a servo correctly. The brass spacers should be
pushed into the rubber grommets from the underside.
Servo mounting lug
Retaining screw
Rubber grommet
Tubular brass spacer
4. The servo output arms must be free to move over
their full arc of travel. Ensure that no parts of the me54
Installation notes
chanical linkage can obstruct the servo’s movement.
The sequence in which the servos are connected to the
receiver is dictated by the model type. Please see the
socket assignments listed on pages 63 and 65.
Be sure to read the additional safety notes on pages
4 … 9.
If the receiver is ever switched on when the transmitter
is off, the servos may carry out uncontrolled movements.
You can avoid this by switching the system on in this
order:
Always switch the transmitter on first,
then the receiver.
When switching the system off:
Always switch the receiver off first,
then the transmitter.
When programming the transmitter you must always
ensure that any electric motors in the system cannot
possibly burst into life accidentally, and that an I.C.
engine fitted with an automatic starter cannot start
unintentionally. In the interests of safety it is always best
to disconnect the flight battery, or cut off the fuel supply.
Receiving system power supply
A reliable power supply is one of the basic
essentials for reliable model control.
Free-moving pushrods, a fully-charged
battery, battery connecting leads of adequate cross-section, minimal transfer resistance at the connectors etc.
all help to minimise energy consumption, but if you have
attended to all this, and the receiver voltage displayed
on the transmitter screen still collapses repeatedly, or is
generally (too) low, then please note the following:
The first point to check is that your batteries are always
fully charged at the start of each flying session. Check
that contacts and switches are low in resistance. It is a
good idea to measure the voltage drop over the installed
switch harness under load, as even a new, heavy-duty
switch can cause a voltage drop of up to 0.2 Volt. Ageing
effects and oxidation of the contacts can increase this
several times over. Constant vibration and movement
at the contacts also “gnaws away” at the contacts, and
tends to produce a creeping increase in transfer resistance.
It is also true that even small servos, such as the
Graupner/JR DS-281, can draw currents of up to 0.75
Ampere when stalled (mechanically obstructed). Just
four servos of this type in a “foamy” can therefore place
a load of up to 3 Amps on the airborne power supply ...
For this reason you should always choose a receiver
battery which constantly delivers an adequate voltage,
i. e. which does not collapse under severe load. To “calculate” the necessary battery capacity we recommend
as a starting point that you provide 350 mAh for each
analogue servo, and at least 500 mAh for each digital
servo.
For example, a 1400 mAh battery would represent an
absolute minimum as the power supply for a receiving
system with a total of four analogue servos. When making your calculations, however, please bear the receiver
in mind as well, as it draws a current of around 70 mA
due to its bi-directional function.
Regardless of these considerations, it is generally
advisable to connect the power supply to the receiver
using two leads: lead “1” is connected to the 6+B receiver socket in the usual way, and lead “2” to the opposite
socket, marked 1+B, at the other end of the receiver
socket bank. For example, you could use a switch or
voltage regulator with two power supply leads running
to the receiver. You might install a Y-lead, Order No.
3936.11, between lead and receiver, as shown in the
diagram below, if you wish to use one or both of the
receiver sockets to connect a servo, speed controller,
etc. The dual connection at the switch or voltage regulator not only reduces the risk of a cable fracture, but
also ensures a more even energy supply to the servos
connected to the receiver.
Auxiliary function
Y-lead,
Order No. 3936.11
PRX stabilised
receiver power supply,
Order No. 4136
Four-cell NiMH battery packs
Traditional four-cell packs are a good choice for powering your Graupner|SJ HoTT receiving system, provided
that you observe the conditions described above, i. e.
you must ensure that the packs have adequate capacity
and maintain their voltage well.
Five-cell NiMH battery packs
Five-cell batteries offer a wider margin of safety in terms
of voltage compared with four-cell packs. However,
please note that not all servos available on the market
can tolerate the voltage of a five-cell pack (in the longterm), especially when the battery is freshly charged.
For example, many of these servos respond to the high
voltage with a clearly audible “rumble”.
It is therefore important to check the specification of the servos you intend to use before
you make the decision to use five-cell packs.
Two-cell LiFe 6.6 V batteries
Taking into account the current situation, these new cells
are now regarded as the optimum choice for receiver
packs.
LiFe cells are also available in plastic hard-case housings, to protect them from mechanical damage. Like
LiPo cells, LiFe cells can be fast-charged in conjunction
with a suitable battery charger, and are comparatively
robust.
It is also true that a much higher number of charge / discharge cycles is attributed to this cell type than, for example, to LiPo cells. The nominal voltage of 6.6 Volt of a
two-cell LiFe pack presents no problems to Graupner|SJ
HoTT receivers, nor to those servos, speed controllers,
gyros, etc. which are expressly approved for use at
these higher voltages.
Please note, however, that virtually all
servos, speed controllers, gyros etc. sold
in the past, and also most of those currently available, are only approved for use on an
operating voltage in the range 4.8 to 6 Volt. If you
wish to connect these devices to the receiver, it is
essential to use a stabilised regulated power supply,
such as the PRX, Order No. 4136; see Appendix. If you
neglect this, there is a danger that the connected
devices will quickly suffer permanent damage.
Installation notes 55
Two-cell LiPo battery packs
For a given capacity LiPo batteries are lighter than NiMH
batteries. To protect them from mechanical damage LiPo
batteries are also available in plastic hard-case housings. Moreover LiPo batteries only have a limited ability
to be fast-charged, and generally do not survive such a
high number of charge / discharge cycles as is claimed
for other batteries, such as Nanophosphate® types.
The comparatively high nominal voltage of 7.4 Volt of a
two-cell LiPo pack presents no problems to Graupner|SJ
HoTT receivers, nor to those servos, speed controllers,
gyros, etc. which are expressly approved for use at
these higher voltages.
Please note, however, that virtually all
servos, speed controllers, gyros etc. sold
in the past, and also most of those currently available, are only approved for use on an
operating voltage in the range 4.8 to 6 Volt. If you
wish to connect these devices to the receiver, it is
essential to use a stabilised regulated power supply,
such as the PRX, Order No. 4136; see Appendix. If you
neglect this, there is a danger that the connected
devices will quickly suffer permanent damage.
56
Installation notes
For your notes
57
Definition of terms
Control functions, transmitter controls, function inputs, control channels, mixers, switches, control switches
To make it easier for you to understand the mx-16
HoTT manual, the following section contains definitions
of many terms which crop up again and again in the
remainder of the text.
Control function
The term “control function” can be thought of as the
signal generated for a particular function which needs
to be controlled - initially independent of its subsequent
progress through the transmitter. In the case of fixedwing model aircraft the control functions include throttle,
rudder and aileron, whereas collective pitch, roll and
pitch-axis are typical of those used for helicopters. The
signal of a control function may be assigned directly, or
to several control channels simultaneously via mixers.
A typical example of the latter is separate aileron servos, or pairs of roll-axis or pitch-axis servos in a model
helicopter. The essential feature of a control function is its
influence on the mechanical travel of the corresponding
servo.
Transmitter control
The term “transmitter control” refers to the mechanical
elements on the transmitter which are operated directly
by the pilot. Their movements in turn generate corresponding movements in the servos, speed controllers
etc. at the receiver end. The transmitter controls include
the following:
• The two dual-axis stick units for the control functions
1 to 4; for both model types (“fixed-wing” and “helicopter”) these four functions can be interchanged in any
way you wish using the “Mode” function, e. g. throttle
left or right, without having to re-connect the servos.
The dual-axis stick function for throttle (or airbrakes) is
often referred to as the Ch 1 (Channel 1) control.
• The three rotary proportional controls CTRL 6, 7 + 8
58
Definition of terms
• The switches SW 4/5 and 6/7, and CTRL 9 and 10
• The switches SW 1 … 3, plus 8 and 9, if they have
been assigned to a control channel in the “Transmitter control settings” menu.
When a proportional transmitter control is operated, the
servo or servos follow the position of the control directly,
whereas a switched channel provides just the two or
three set servo positions.
Function input
This is an imaginary point on the signal path, and must
not be considered the same as the point on the circuit
board where the transmitter control is connected! The
two menus “Stick mode” and “Transmitter control
settings” affect the course of the signal “after” this point,
and it is possible (and likely) that there will be differences
between the number of the transmitter control (as stated
above) and the number of the subsequent control channel.
Control channel
There is a point on the signal path where the signal contains all the control information required for a particular
servo – this may be directly generated by a transmitter
control or indirectly via a mixer – and from this point on
we call the signal a “control channel”. This signal is only
affected by any adjustments carried out in the “Servo
settings” menu before leaving the transmitter via the RF
module. Once picked up at the receiver, this signal may
be modified by any settings made in the Telemetry menu
before finally passing to the corresponding servo in the
model.
Mixer
The transmitter’s software includes a wide range of mixer
functions. Their purpose is to enable a control function to
affect multiple servos at the branching point of the mixer
input, or alternatively to allow several control functions
to affect one servo. For more information please refer to
the numerous mixer functions as described in the section
starting on page 108 of the manual.
Switch
The three standard switches SW 2, 3 and 8, the two
three-position switches SW 4/5 and 6/7 and the two
momentary buttons SW 1 and 9 can also be incorporated into the programming of the transmitter controls.
However, all these switches are also generally intended
for switching program options, e. g. starting and stopping
timers, switching mixers on and off, transferring control in
Trainer mode etc. Each physical switch function can be
assigned to as many functions as you wish. Numerous
examples are described in the manual.
Transmitter control switch
It is often desirable to switch a function on or off automatically at a particular position of another transmitter
control, e. g. at a defined position of one of the dual-axis
sticks. Typical examples are switching a stopwatch on
and off to allow you to record the motor run time, extending spoilers automatically (and many others). The mx16 HoTT software includes a total of two (three - for
helicopters) “control switches” of this type.
Two transmitter control switches are available for the Ch
1 stick in each model memory, both for fixed-wing model
aircraft and helicopters. For helicopters a third is present
in the form of the throttle limiter; see the right-hand side
and page 86.
This manual includes a range of instructive examples
which make programming as simple as child’s play.
Please refer to the programming examples in the section
starting on page 164.
Assigning switches and control switches
The basic procedure
At many points in the program there is the option of
using a switch (SW 1 … 9) or a control switch (G1 … 3;
see below) to operate a function, or to switch between
settings, such as the DUAL RATE / EXPO function, flight
phase programming, mixers and more. The mx-16
HoTT allows you to assign several functions to a single
switch.
The process of assigning switches is exactly the same
in all the relevant menus, and we will explain the basic
programming procedure at this point so that you can
concentrate on the special features when reading the
detailed menu descriptions.
A switch symbol appears in the bottom line of the
screen at all programming points where switches can be
assigned:
Move to the appropriate column using the arrow buttons
of the left or right touch-key.
This is the procedure for assigning a switch:
1. Briefly press the SET button of the right-hand touchkey. The following message appears on the screen:
push desired switch
into position ON
2. Now simply move the switch you wish to use to the
“ON” position, press the push-button, or move the
Ch 1 stick from the “OFF” position in the direction of
“ON”. Please note: the so-called control switches assigned to this transmitter control (see right) carry out
the task of an ON / OFF switch in software; the same
applies to the throttle limiter (see page 99) which
is available in the “Helicopter” model type. This completes the assignment process.
Changing the direction of switching:
If the switch turns out to work in the wrong direction, you
can correct it as follows: move the switch to the desired
OFF position, activate switch assignment once more
and assign the switch again, this time with the switch
direction you prefer.
Erasing a switch:
Activate the switch symbol as described under
Point 2, then briefly press the button combination
 or  of the right-hand touch-key (CLEAR)
simultaneously
Transmitter control switches
Many functions are best controlled automatically by a
particular (freely programmable) position of the Ch 1
transmitter stick (or the throttle limiter in the case of helicopters), rather than by a conventional physical switch.
Typical applications:
• Automatically switching an on-board glowplug energizer on and off according to the throttle position of
the Ch 1 stick (“G1” or “G2”). In this case the switch
for the plug energizer is controlled by a mixer at the
transmitter.
• Automatically switching a stopwatch on and off to record the pure “flight time” of a model helicopter; this
is accomplished using the “G3” switch of the throttle limiter.
• Automatically switching the “AIL  RUD” mixer off
when the airbrakes are extended, in order to keep
the wings parallel with the ground when landing on
a slope face, without the (usually coupled) rudder affecting the model’s heading.
• Automatically extending landing flaps with coupled elevator trim adjustment on the landing approach, as
soon as the throttle stick is reduced below the set
threshold point.
• Automatically switching a stopwatch on and off in order to time the run of an electric motor.
For both model types the mx-16 HoTT transmitter’s
software caters for these purposes with two “control
switches” of this type; they can be assigned to the Ch 1
stick: “G1” is switched on at around -80% of full travel,
while “G2” is switched on at around +80%. The Helicopter program also includes an extra control switch “G3”
on the throttle limiter close to the 100% point; see page
99.
All these control switches can be included without
restriction in the free programming of the switches, i. e.
they can be assigned to a function instead of a physical
switch. This means that you are able to assign one of
the control switches G1 … G2 (or G1 … G3) instead
of a physical switch at any point in the software where
switches are assigned. All you have to do is move the
Ch 1 stick or the throttle limiter control (by default the
rotary proportional control CTRL 6) from the desired
“OFF” position in the direction of “ON”.
Assigning switches and control switches
59
Digital trims
Description of function, and Ch 1 cut-off trim
60
Digital trims
1. Fixed-wing models
The Ch 1 trim features a special cut-off trim which is
designed for glowplug motors: you initially use the trim
lever in the usual way to select a reliable idle setting for
the motor.
If you now move the Ch 1 trim lever to its end-point in
the direction of “motor cut-off”, pushing the lever in a
single movement, a marker appears on the screen in the
last position. You can now return to the idle setting for
starting the motor simply by pushing the stick one click
in the direction of “open throttle”.
Last idle position
Current trim position
2. Model helicopters
In helicopter mode the Ch 1 trim has another feature
in addition to “cut-off trim”, as described under “Fixedwing models” on the left; this time in conjunction with
the “Throttle limit function” (see page 99): while the
throttle limit slider is in the bottom half of its travel, i. e. in
the “start-up range”, the Ch 1 trim lever acts as idle trim
on the throttle limit, and the idle trim is displayed on the
screen:
Last idle position
Current trim position
stop
flt
Throttle limit control
M
CTRL 6
Ch 1 trim lever
stop
flt
Idle direction
Digital trims with visual and audible indicators
Both the dual-axis stick units are fitted with digital trim
systems. When you give the trim lever a brief push (one
“click”), the neutral position of the associated stick channel changes by one increment. If you hold the trim lever
in one direction, the trim value changes continuously in
the corresponding direction with increasing speed.
The degree of trim offset is also “audible”, as the pitch of
the tone changes to reflect the setting. When you are flying a model, you can find the trim centre position easily
without having to look at the screen: if you over-run the
centre setting, the trim stays in the centre position for a
moment.
The current trim values are automatically stored when
you switch from one model memory to another. The digital trims are also stored separately for each flight phase
within a model memory, with the exception of the “Ch 1”
(Channel 1) trim, which is the throttle / airbrake trim on a
fixed-wing model.
The Ch 1 trim includes another special function which
makes it easy to re-locate the idle throttle setting of a
glowplug motor.
However, since the trim functions described in these
instructions only affect the “Motor off” direction, the trim
display on the transmitter’s screen will vary according
to your individual set stick mode, i. e. the “forward” or
“back” throttle / collective pitch minimum position of the
Ch 1 stick, and also according to “left stick” or “right
stick” for throttle / collective pitch. The illustrations in
these instructions always refer to “Throttle / Collective
pitch right” for both model types, and to “Throttle back”
for fixed-wing models and “Collective pitch forward” for
model helicopters.
M
Trim at motor OFF position
In contrast to a fixed-wing model aircraft, this display is
suppressed if the throttle limit control is moved to the
“right” half of its travel.
Trim at motor OFF position
The cut-off trim feature is disabled if you enter “none” or
“none / inv” in the “Motor at Ch 1” line within the “Base
settings” menu (page 74 / 75).
Note:
Since this trim function is only effective in the
“Motor off” direction, the above illustration
will not apply if you change the direction of
the Ch 1 stick for throttle minimum from “back” (which is
reflected in the illustration above) to “forward” in the
“Motor at Ch1” line of the “Base settings” menu.
stop
flt
M
Throttle limit control
CTRL 6
Note regarding helicopters:
The Ch 1 trim only affects the throttle servo
and not the collective pitch servos; it also
works evenly over the full stick travel. Please
note that the helicopter throttle servo must be connected
to receiver output 6 (see Receiver socket assignment,
page 65).
For your notes
61
Fixed-wing model aircraft
This program provides convenient support for normal
model aircraft with up to two aileron servos and two flap
servos, V-tail models, flying wings and deltas with two
elevon (aileron / elevator) servos and two flap servos.
The majority of power models and gliders belong to the
“normal” tail type with one servo each for elevator, rudder, ailerons and throttle or electronic speed controller
(airbrakes on a glider). There is also the special model
type “2 EL Sv” which provides a means of connecting
two elevator servos to channels 3 and 8 in parallel.
If your model features two separate aileron servos (and
also in some cases two flap servos), the aileron travel of
both pairs of control surfaces can be set up with differential movement in the “Wing mixers” menu, i. e. the
down-travel can be set independently of the up-travel.
Finally the program caters for camber-changing flaps,
which can be operated by any of the transmitter controls
“CTRL 6 … 10”. Alternatively a phase-specific trim is
available for flaps, ailerons and elevator in the “Phase
trim” menu.
If the model features a V-tail instead of a conventional
tail, you need to select the tail type “V-tail” in the “Base
settings” menu, as this automatically superimposes the
elevator and rudder control functions in such a way that
each tail panel can be actuated by a separate servo.
For deltas and flying wings it is easy to set up mixed
elevons, i. e. the aileron and elevator functions can be
carried out via common control surfaces at the trailing
edge of the right and left wing. As standard the program
contains the appropriate mixer functions for the two
servos.
Up to four flight phases can be programmed in each of
the twenty model memories.
The digital trim positions are stored separately for each
flight phase, with the exception of the Ch 1 trim. The Ch
1 trim provides a simple means of re-locating the correct
idle throttle setting.
Two timers are available at all times when flying. The
screen also displays the transmitter operating time since
the battery was last charged.
All the transmitter controls (CTRL) and switches (SW)
can be assigned to virtually any of the inputs 5 … 8 in
the “Transmitter control settings” menu.
“Dual Rate” and “Exponential” can be programmed
separately for aileron, rudder and elevator, giving two
modes of control.
Depending on the model type you have selected, the
“Wing mixers” menu presents you with up to twelve
additional pre-defined mixers and coupling functions
which you can simply select and set up when necessary,
in addition to three free mixers:
1. Aileron differential (switchable)
2. Flap differential (switchable)
3. Aileron  rudder (switchable)
4. Aileron  flap (switchable)
5. Airbrake  elevator (switchable)
6. Airbrake  flap (switchable)
7. Airbrake  aileron (switchable)
8. Elevator  flap (switchable)
9. Elevator  aileron (switchable)
10. Flap  elevator (switchable)
11. Flap  aileron (switchable)
12. Differential reduction
Airbrake-Function 1
ro
n
Ai
le
Ail e r o
t
va
er
Ele
A il
Flap
left
le
v a tor
Airbrake Flap
Airbrake Elevator
r Flap
F la p E
va
Ele to
l e ro n
r
Elevator Flap
right
left
Rudder/Elevator
V-Tail
F la p E le v ator
right
A il e r o n R u dder
E le v at or A ileron
62
Fixed-wing model aircraft
Aileron
Airbrake Flap
Airbrake Elevator
A leron
F la p
Fl a p
Ai
dde
A il e r o n
n
Ru
n
Ailero
n Rudder
A il e ro
F la p
Fl ap
at or
E l ev
on
Airbrake n Flap
Ail e r o
E ev
ato
r
Fla p
Fl a p or
F la
p
A leron
Installation notes
The servos MUST be connected to the
receiver outputs in the order shown on
this page.
Outputs not required are simply left vacant.
Please note the following points in particular:
• If you are using only one aileron servo, receiver
output 5 (right aileron) is left unused; it can also be
used for another purpose if you select “1 AIL” in the
line “aile/flap” of the “Base settings” menu.
• If you are using only one flap servo, receiver output
7 (right flap) MUST be left unused, assuming that
you have selected “2 FL” in the line “aile/flap” of the
“Base settings” menu.
Please also read the information on the following
pages.
Winged aircraft with and without motor, having up to
4 aileron servos and up to 4 fl ap servos …
… and tail plane type “normal” or “2 elevator servos”
2nd elevator or aux. function or free
Flap or left flap or free
Receiver power supply
Right aileron or aux. function
Rudder
Elevator or 1st elevator
Aileron or left aileron
Receiver power supply
Airbrake or throttle servo or
speed controller (electric motor)
Right flap or free or aux. function
… and tail plane type “V tail unit”
Aux. function or free
Flap or left flap or free
Receiver power supply
Right aileron or aux. function
Right rudder / elevator
Left rudder / elevator
Aileron or left aileron
Receiver power supply
Airbrake or throttle servo or
speed controller (electric motor)
Right flap or free or aux. function
As there are several possible combinations of servo
orientation and control surface linkage, you may find that
the direction of rotation of one or more servos is incorrect. Use the following table to solve the problem.
Model
type
V-tail
Delta/flying wing aircraft models with and without
motor having up to two aileron/elevator servos and
up to 2 fl ap/elevator servos
Free or aux. function
Free or left flap / elevator
Receiver power supply
Free or aux. function
Free or rudder
Right elevon
Left elevon
Receiver power supply
Airbrake or throttle servo or
speed controller (electric motor)
Free or right flap / elevator
Delta,
flying
wing
Servo rotating in
wrong direction
Remedy
Rudder and elevator
reversed
Reverse servos 3 + 4 in
the “servo set.” menu
Rudder correct,
elevator reversed
Swap over servos 3 + 4
at the receiver
Elevator correct,
rudder reversed
Reverse servos 3 + 4 in
the “servo set.” menu,
AND swap over at the
receiver
Elevator and ailerons Reverse servos 2 + 3 in
reversed
the “servo set.” menu
Elevator correct,
ailerons reversed
Reverse servos 2 + 3 in
the “servo set.” menu,
AND swap over at the
receiver
Ailerons correct,
elevator reversed
Swap over servos 2 + 3
at the receiver
All menus which are relevant to fixed-wing models are
marked with an “aeroplane” symbol in the “Program
descriptions”:
This means that you can easily skip irrelevant menus
when programming a fixed-wing model aircraft.
Fixed-wing models: receiver assignment
63
Model helicopters
The continued development of model helicopters and
helicopter components, such as gyros, speed governors,
rotor blades etc., has led to the current position where
helicopters are capable of sophisticated 3-D aerobatics.
In contrast, if you are a beginner to helicopter flying, you
need a simple set-up so that you can quickly get started on the initial stages of hovering practice, and then
gradually learn to exploit all the options provided by the
mx-16 HoTT.
The helicopter program of the mx-16 HoTT can cope
with all current model helicopters equipped with 1 … 4
servos for collective pitch control, entirely regardless of
whether they are powered by a fuel-driven or electric
motor.
Each model memory can include three flight phases
plus auto-rotation.
Two timers are constantly included in the basic screen
display. At the same time the period which has elapsed
since the last charge process is also displayed.
You can return to the correct idle position for the digital
Ch 1 trim simply by pressing a button.
“Dual Rate” and “Exponential” are available for roll,
pitch-axis and tail rotor; they can be coupled together,
and programmed to provide two settings.
All the transmitter controls (CTRL) and switches (SW)
can be assigned to inputs 5 … 8 in virtually any order.
This is carried out in the “Transmitter control settings”
menu.
In addition to three linear mixers, which can be assigned
to any functions and can also be switched on and off,
the “Helicopter mixers” menu provides five-point curves
for the collective pitch, throttle and tail rotor mixers,
variable separately for each flight phase; these provide
non-linear mixer characteristics.
1. Collective pitch
2. Ch 1  throttle
3. Ch 1  tail rotor
Such advanced features are not needed by the beginner, who will initially simply set the hover point to coin-
Collective
Pitch Curve
Channel 1
64
Model helicopters
Throttle
cide with the centre point of the stick arc, and adjust the
collective pitch travel as required.
Moreover the “Heli mixers” menu offers two additional
set-up options in the lines “Gyro” and “Inp8”, plus a
“swashplate limiter”.
The mixer inputs for collective pitch, roll and pitch-axis
can then be adjusted in the “Swashplate mixers” menu.
The throttle limit function in the “Transmitter control
settings” menu provides an effective means of starting
the motor in any flight phase. By default the proportional
rotary control CTRL 7 is assigned to this input, and this
control function determines the maximum throttle servo
position, i. e. the trim lever controls the motor over the
idle range. Only when this rotary knob is turned in the direction of full-throttle do the programmed throttle curves
take effect. If you have set up the two timers, they also
start recording the flight time automatically at this point.
See page 99 for more information on this.
Channel
1
Tail Rotor
Note for modellers upgrading from earlier Graupner
systems:
Compared with the previous receiver channel sequence, servo socket 1 (collective
pitch servo) and servo socket 6 (throttle
servo) have been interchanged. The servos must be
connected to the receiver output sockets in the order
shown at bottom right. Outputs not required are simply
left vacant. For more information on the different types of
swashplate, please refer to the “Base settings” menu
described on page 82 / 83.
Installation notes
The servos MUST be connected to the
receiver outputs in the order shown on
this page:
Outputs not required are simply left vacant.
Please note the additional information on the following pages.
Note:
To be able to exploit all the convenience and
safety features of the throttle limiter (see
page 99), the speed controller should be
connected to receiver output “6”, and not to receiver
output “8”, as shown in the drawing on the left. See page
117 for more details.
Receiver layout for helicopter models …
… with 1 to 3 swashplate servos
Free or speed governor or aux. funct.
Throttle servo or
speed controller
Receiver power supply
Free or aux. function
Tail rotor servo (gyro system)
Pitch-axis 1 servo
Roll 1 servo
Receiver power supply
Collective pitch or roll 2 or
Pitch-axis 2 servo
Gyro gain
… with 4 swashplate servos
Free or speed governor or aux. funct.
Throttle servo or
speed controller
Receiver power supply
Pitch-axis 2 servo
Tail rotor servo (gyro system)
Pitch-axis 1 servo
Roll 1 servo
Receiver power supply
Roll 2 servo
Gyro gain
All menus which are relevant to model helicopters are
marked with a “helicopter” symbol in the “Program
descriptions”:
This means that you can easily skip irrelevant menus
when programming a model helicopter.
Model helicopters: receiver assignment
65
Detailed description of programming
Setting up a new model memory
If you have already read through the manual to this
point, you will undoubtedly have made your first attempt
at programming the system already. Even so, it is important to describe each menu here in detail, to ensure that
you have comprehensive instructions for each application you are likely to encounter.
In this section we start with setting up a “free” model
memory prior to “programming” a new model:
#01
5.6V
0:00h
stop
flt
M
0:00
0:00
HoTT
0.0V
From the basic display press the central SET button of
the right-hand touch-key to move to the “Multi-function
list”. (You can return to the basic screen at any time by
pressing the central ESC button of the left-hand touchkey.) By default the menu point “Model memory” is
displayed inverse (black background) and is therefore
active when you first call up the multi-function select
menu after switching the transmitter on. If this is not the
case, select the “Model memory” menu using the arrow
buttons (, ) of the left or right-hand touch-key,
then briefly press the central SET button of the righthand touch-key:
mod.mem.
ser vo set.
D/R expo
wing mixer
ser vo disp
fail-safe
66
base sett.
contr set.
phase trim
free mixer
basic sett
telemetr y
Program description: reserving a new memory
select model
clear model
copy mod–>mod
expor t to SD
impor t from SD
=>
=>
=>
=>
=>
Now touch the central SET button of the right-hand
touch-key once more to move on to the “select model”
sub-menu.
01
02
03
04
05
06
free
free
free
free
free
R08
In the transmitter’s default state the first model memory
is already initialised with the “Fixed-wing model” model
type, and the receiver supplied in the set is “bound” to
it. This is indicated by the receiver code displayed at top
right of the screen; in the example above this is R08. If,
on the other hand, the model memory is “unbound”, you
will see “---”.
The remainder of the model memories are not yet
occupied, and are “unbound”; these are entitled “
free”. If you want to set up a fixed-wing model, then
you can immediately start the programming procedure
after leaving the “select model” sub-menu and the “Model memory” menu by pressing the central ESC button
of the left-hand touch-key each time … alternatively you
can select one of the free model memories using the left
or right-hand touch-key …
01
02
03
04
05
06
free
free
free
free
free
R08
... and then briefly press the central SET button of the
right-hand touch-key to confirm your choice.
After this you are invited to select the basic model type,
i. e. either “Fixed-wing” or “Helicopter”:
Sel model type
( empty mod mem )
Use the  or  button of the left or right-hand touchkey to select the appropriate basic model type, then
touch the central SET button of the right-hand touch-key
to confirm your choice. Your chosen model memory is
now initialised with the selected basic model type, and
the screen switches back to the basic display. The model
memory is now reserved for that use.
However, if you wish to get started with a helicopter,
then use the  or  button of the left or right-hand
touch-key to select one of the model memories marked
as “free”, and confirm your choice with a brief
touch of the central SET button of the right-hand touchkey. You are now requested to define the basic model
type, i. e. either “fixed-wing” or “helicopter”. Use the 
or  button of the left or right touch-key to select the
corresponding symbol, then again press the central SET
button of the right-hand touch-key briefly in confirmation.
This initialises the selected model type for the model
memory you have just selected, and you can now start
programming your model in this memory.
It is now only possible to change this memory to a
different model type if you first erase the model memory
(“Model memory” menu, page 70).
Notes:
•
If you wish to erase the model memory
which is currently active in the basic display, you will have to define one of the two
model types “fixed-wing” or “heli­copter” immediately
after completing the erase procedure. You cannot
avoid making this choice by switching the transmitter
off. If you wish to remove a model memory which you
inadvertently occupied, you can simply erase it from
a different model memory.
However, if you erase a model memory which is not
currently active, after the procedure you will see the
memory marked as “free” under Model Select.
• After the selected model memory has been initialised with your preferred basic model type, the screen
shifts to the newly reserved model memory. At the
same time the following warning appears for a few
seconds …
BIND N/A
OK
… as an indication that this memory has not yet been
bound to a receiver. With a brief touch of the central
SET button of the right-hand touch-key you can move
directly to the corresponding option. For more detailed information on binding a receiver please refer
to pages 80 and 88.
• The warning “BIND. n/v” just described is now followed for a few seconds by this warning …
fail safe
setup
t.b.d
… as an indication that no Fail-Safe settings have
been entered. For more information on this please refer to page 136.
• If the warning …
throttle
too
high !
… appears on the screen, move the throttle stick (or
the limiter - by default the rotary knob CTRL 6 - if setting up a helicopter) back to idle. This warning only
appears in accordance with the settings you have
entered in the “Motor at Ch1” or “Collective pitch
min.” section of the “Base settings” menu, as described on pages 74 and 85. If you are setting
up a non-powered fixed-wing model, enter “none” or
“none/inv” at this point; this disables the throttle warning message, and makes available the “Brake  NN
*“ mixers in the “Wing mixers” menu, which would
otherwise be suppressed.
• If the transmitter’s model memories are already occupied, then a pictogram of the selected model type
appears in the appropriate model memory, followed
by a blank line, or the model’s name if a name has
already been entered in the “Base settings” menu
(pages 74 and 82), together with an indicator
that the memory is bound to a receiver, if appropriate.
• If the battery voltage is too low, the software prevents
you switching model memories in the interests of
safety. In this case the screen displays this message:
not possible now
voltage too low
Basically there are now four different options for assigning the four control functions aileron, elevator, rudder
and throttle / airbrakes (fixed-wing model), and roll,
pitch-axis, tail rotor and throttle / collective pitch (model
helicopter) to the two primary dual-axis sticks. Which
of these options is adopted depends on the personal
preference of the individual model pilot. This function
is set in the “Stick mode” line for the currently active
model memory in the “Base settings” menu (page 74
or 82):
mod Name
stick mode
motor at C1
CH8 delay
tail type
1
no
yes
normal
As mentioned earlier, for maximum flexibility the
transmitter controls 5 … 8 are by default not assigned
to transmitter controls, and can be assigned to any
channels you like; this also helps to avoid accidental
mishandling.
This means that in the default state of the
equipment only those servos connected
to receiver outputs 1 … 4 can usually be
controlled by the two dual-axis sticks, whereas
servos connected to sockets 5 … max. 8 remain
steadfastly at their centre position. If you set up a
* NN = Nomen Nominandum (name to be stated)
Program description: reserving a new memory
67
new model helicopter, servo 6 may also respond to
some extent to the controls - depending on the position
of the throttle limiter CTRL 6. For both model types this
situation only changes once you have carried out the
appropriate assignments in the “Transmitter control
settings” menu.
If you wish to use a newly initialised model memory,
then this MUST first be “bound” to a (further) receiver
before any servos connected to the receiver can be
controlled from the transmitter. For more information on
this please refer to the “Binding” section on pages 80
and 88.
You will find a description of the basic steps for programming a fixed-wing model aircraft in the Programming
Examples section starting on page 164; for model
helicopters the equivalent section starts on page 186.
The following menu descriptions are arranged in the
order that they are listed in the individual menus in the
multi-function list.
68
Program description: reserving a new memory
For your notes
69
Model memories
Calling up a model, erasing a model, copying model  model
The section on pages 24 and 25 explains the basic
method of using the buttons, while the previous two
double-pages explains how to move to the Multi-function
list and reserve a new model memory. At this point we
wish to start with the “normal” description of the individual menu points in the sequence in which they occur on
the transmitter itself. For this reason we start with the
menu …
select model
Model memory
If you now briefly press the SET button again, you move
to the “Call up model” sub-menu:
mod.mem.
ser vo set.
D/R expo
wing mixer
ser vo disp
fail-safe
select model
clear model
copy mod–>mod
expor t to SD
impor t from SD
base sett.
contr set.
phase trim
free mixer
basic sett
telemetr y
The transmitter can store up to twenty complete sets
of model data, including the digital trim values set by
the four trim levers. The trims are automatically stored,
which means that the settings you have carefully established through test-flying are never lost when you swap
models. A pictogram of the selected model type, and - if
you have entered a model name in the “Base settings”
menu (pages 74 and 82) - the name appears in all
three sub-menus of the “Model memory” menu following the model number.
If necessary, use the arrow buttons of the left or righthand touch-key to select the “Model memory” menu,
then briefly touch the SET button of the right-hand
touch-key:
clear model
01
02
03
04
05
06
GRAUBELE
ULTIMATE
STARLET
BELL47G
free
free
Program description: model memories
R08
R08
R08
–––
Now use the arrow buttons  of the left or right-hand
touch-key to select from the list the model memory you
wish to use, and confirm your selection by pressing the
SET button. Pressing ESC takes you back to the previous menu page without switching models.
Notes:
•
If the warning message “Throttle too high”
appears when you switch models, the
throttle or collective pitch stick (Ch 1), or
the throttle limiter, is positioned too far towards
full-throttle.
• If the battery voltage is too low, it may not be possible
to switch model memories for safety reasons. In this
case the screen displays the following message:
not possible now
voltage too low
70
=>
=>
=>
=>
=>
select model
clear model
copy mod–>mod
expor t to SD
impor t from SD
=>
=>
=>
=>
=>
Use the arrow buttons  of the left or right-hand
touch-key to select the “clear model” sub-menu, then
touch the SET button.
Select the model to be erased using the arrow buttons
 of the left or right-hand touch-key, …
model
01
02
03
04
to be cleared:
R08
GRAUBELE
R08
ULTIMATE
R08
STARLET
–––
BELL47G
… then touch the SET button again; the program responds with the security query:
model
GRAUBELE
01
to be erased ?
NO
YES
If you answer NO, the process is interrupted, and you
are returned to the previous screen page. If you answer
YES with the  button of the left or right-hand touchkey and confirm your choice with the SET button, then
the selected model memory is erased.
The erasure process is irrevocable. All
data in the selected model memory is
reset to the factory default settings.
Note:
If you wish to erase the currently active
model memory in the basic display, you will
be required to define the model type
“Helicopter” or “Fixed-wing” immediately. However, if you
erase a non-active model memory, then the message
“free” appears in the Model select menu.
copy model  model
Use the arrow buttons  of the left or right-hand
touch-key to select the “copy model  model” submenu, then touch the SET button.
=>
select model
>
l
l
SWITCHING RF OFF >
>
OK
>
impor t from SD
If this message appears, the transmitter’s RF module is
active.
You can interrupt the process by briefly pressing the central ESC button of the left-hand touch-key. Alternatively a
short press of the SET button of the right-hand touch-key
switches the RF circuit off, and the menu you called up
opens. For safety’s sake you should switch the receiving
system off at this point, if it is already operating.
Select the model to be copied using the arrow buttons
 of the left or right-hand touch-key …
copy from model:
01
GRAUBELE
ULTIMATE
02
03
STARLET
04
BELL47G
model memory.
R08
R08
R08
–––
… then briefly press the SET button of the right-hand
touch-key in the “Copy to model” window. You can now
select the target memory using the arrow buttons 
of the left or right-hand touch-key, and confirm your
choice with SET. Alternatively you can interrupt the
process with ESC. It is possible to overwrite a model
memory which already contains model data.
copy to model:
01
GRAUBELE
ULTIMATE
02
03
STARLET
04
BELL47G
free 
05
R08
R08
R08
–––
When you confirm the selected model memory by touching the SET button, the security query appears:
model
01
ULTIMATE
free 
03
to be copied ?
NO
YES
Selecting NO interrupts the process, and returns you to
the previous page. If you select YES with the  button,
and confirm your choice by touching the SET button,
then the selected model is copied into the chosen target
Note:
When you copy a model memory, the binding
data is copied together with the model data,
so that a receiving system bound to the
original model memory can also be operated with the
copy of the memory, i. e. it does not require another
binding process.
Export to SD
Use the arrow buttons  of the left or right-hand
touch-key to select the “Export to SD” sub-menu, then
touch the SET button.
select model
clear model
copy mod–>mod
expor t to SD
impor t from SD
=>
=>
=>
=>
=>
Use the arrow buttons  of the left or right-hand
touch-key to select the model to be exported:
expor t
01
02
03
04
to SD-CARD:
GRAUBELE
ULTIMATE
STARLET
BELL47G
R08
R08
R08
–––
When you confirm the selected model memory with a
brief press of the SET button, this security query appears:
Program description: model memories
71
model
01
ULTIMATE
SD-CARD
expor t ?
NO
YES
You can interrupt the process with NO; if you do this,
you are returned to the starting screen. However, if you
select YES with the  button, and confirm your choice
by touching the SET button, then the selected model is
copied to the SD card.
Notes:
•
If the warning …
SD-CARD
INSERT
OK
… appears instead of a model selection, there is no
SD card in the card slot; see page 22.
• When you copy a model memory, the binding data is
copied along with the model data, so that the receiving system associated with the original model memory can also be operated using the SAME transmitter
and the copied memory without repeating the binding procedure.
• An exported fixed-wing model is stored on the memory card under \\Models\mx-16 with the format “aModelname.mdl” and a model helicopter with the format
“hModelname.mdl”. However, if you export a “nameless” model, then you will find its data stored on the
memory card under “a-” and “hNoName.mdl”.
• Some of the special characters used in certain model names cannot be accepted due to specific limita72
Program description: model memories
tions of the FAT or FAT32 file system used by memory cards. During the copy process they are replaced
by a tilde (~) character.
• If the memory card already contains a model file of
the same name, it will be overwritten without warning.
Import from SD
Use the arrow buttons  of the left or right-hand
touch-key to select the “Import from SD” sub-menu, then
briefly press the SET button.
=>
>
SWITCHING RF OFF >
>
OK
>
impor t from SD
select model
If this message appears, the transmitter’s RF module is
active.
You can interrupt the process by briefly pressing the central ESC button of the left-hand touch-key. Alternatively a
short press of the SET button of the right-hand touch-key
switches the RF circuit off, and the menu you called up
opens. For safety’s sake you should switch the receiving
system off at this point, if it is already operating.
Use the arrow buttons  of the left or right-hand
touch-key to select the model to be imported from the
SD memory card:
impor t from SD-CARD:
11/03/10
ALPINA
11/03/11
EXTRA
11/03/11
COBRA
11/03/12
BELL47G
Note:
The export date displayed to the right of the
model name is shown in the format “Year/
Month/Day”.
When you do this, and briefly press the SET button of
the right-hand touch-key again, an “Import to model:”
window is displayed. Use the arrow buttons  of the
left or right-hand touch-key to select the target memory,
confirm your choice with SET, or press ESC to interrupt
the process. An occupied memory can be overwritten:
impor t
01
02
03
04
05
to model :
GRAUBELE
ULTIMATE
STARLET
BELL47G
free 
E08
E08
E08
–––
When you confirm the selected model memory by touching the SET button, this security query is displayed:
model
01
03
impor t ?
NO
ULTIMATE
free
YES
You can interrupt the process with NO; if you do this, you
are returned to the starting screen. However, if you use
the  button to select YES, and confirm your choice
by touching the SET button, then the selected model is
imported into the selected model memory.
Notes:
•
If the warning …
SD-CARD
INSERT
OK
… appears instead of a model selection, there is no
SD card in the card slot; see page 22.
• When you import a model memory, the binding data
is copied along with the model data, so that the receiving system associated with the original model
memory can also be operated using the SAME transmitter and the copied memory without repeating the
binding procedure.
Program description: model memories
73
Base settings
Basic model-specific settings for fixed-wing model aircraft
Before you start programming specific parameters,
some basic settings must be entered which apply only
to the currently active model memory. Select the “Base
settings” (basic model settings) menu using the arrow
buttons of the left or right-hand touch-key, then touch the
central SET button of the right-hand touch-key:
base sett.
contr set.
phase trim
free mixer
basic sett
telemetr y
model name
“MODE 1” (Throttle at right stick)
left aileron
left aileron
left rudder
right aileron
idle
“MODE 3” (Throttle at right stick) “MODE 4” (Throttle at left stick)
idle
elev. down
idle
left rudder
right rudder
elev. up
full throttle
left aileron
Motor Vollgas
left rudder
elev. down
GRAUBELE
mod name
stick mode
1
no
motor at C1
CH8 delay
yes
tail type
normal
Briefly press the SET button to highlight the current stick
mode (black background). Now use the arrow buttons
of the right-hand touch-key to select one of the options
1 to 4.
Simultaneously pressing the  buttons or the 
buttons of the right-hand touch-key (CLEAR) returns the
display to stick mode “1”.
Touching the SET button again disables the select field
once more, so that you can switch lines.
motor at C1
GRAUBELE
mod name
stick mode
1
no
motor at C1
CH8 delay
yes
tail type
normal
elev. up
Basically there are four possible ways of arranging the
principal control functions of a fixed-wing model on the
two dual-axis sticks: the primary functions are aileron,
elevator, rudder and throttle (or airbrakes). Which of
these options you select depends on your individual
preferences and flying style.
Use the arrow buttons  of the left or right-hand
Use the arrow buttons of the left-hand touch-key to select the desired character, then move to the next position
74 Program description: base settings - fixed-wing model
touch-key to move to the “Stick mode” line. You will see
the select field framed:
elev. up
right aileron
GRAUB
idle
elev. down
right rudder
model name
full throttle
right rudder
0123456789 : ;
?
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNO
PQRSTUVWXYZ
elev. up
right aileron
Touch the SET button of the right-hand touch-key to
move to the next screen page, where you can select
characters to assemble the model name. You can enter
up to nine characters to define a model name:
“MODE 2” (Throttle at left stick)
full throttle
right aileron
no
yes
normal
elev. down
left rudder
1
right rudder
mod name
stick mode
motor at C1
CH8 delay
tail type
stick mode
left aileron
mod.mem.
ser vo set.
D/R expo
wing mixer
ser vo disp
fail-safe
in the name by pressing the arrow button  of the righthand touch-key, or its central SET button, where you can
select the next character.
Simultaneously pressing the or  buttons of the
right-hand touch-key (CLEAR) inserts a space at that
point.
You can move to any character position within the input
field using the  buttons of the right-hand touch-key.
Touching the central ESC button of the left-hand touchkey returns you to the previous menu page.
The model name entered in this way appears in the
basic display, and also in the sub-menus of the “Model
memory” menu.
When you select “motor at C1” using the arrow buttons
 of the left or right-hand touch-key, you will see the
corresponding input field framed. Touch the central SET
button of the right-hand touch-key to highlight the current setting. Now use the arrow buttons of the right-hand
touch-key to switch between the four possible options:
“idle fr.”:
The idle position of the throttle / airbrake
stick (C1) is forward, i. e. away from the pilot.
The throttle warning message “Throttle
too high”, see page 36, and the – following – option “cut off” are activated. In
the “Wing mixer” menu the “Brake  NN
*” mixers and the option “CH8 delay” are
disabled.
“idle re.”: The idle position of the throttle / airbrake
stick (C1) is back, i. e. towards the pilot.
The throttle warning message “Throttle
too high”, see page 36, and the – following – option “cut off” are activated. In
the “Wing mixer” menu the “Brake  NN
*” mixers and the option “CH8 delay” are
disabled.
“no”:
The brake system is “retracted” in the forward position of the throttle / brake stick. In
the “Wing mixer” menu the “Brake  NN *”
mixers are activated.
The throttle warning message “Throttle too
high”, see page 36, and the option “cut
off” are disabled.
„no/inv“ The brake system is “retracted” in the back
position of the throttle / brake stick. In the
“Wing mixer” menu the “Brake  NN *”
mixers are activated.
The throttle warning message “Throttle too
high”, see page 36, and the option “cut
off” are disabled.
* NN = Nomen Nominandum (name to be stated)
Notes:
•
During the programming process it is
important to ensure that any internalcombustion engine or electric motor
cannot start running accidentally. The safe option
is always to disconnect the fuel supply or the
flight battery.
Depending on your choice in this menu,
•
the Ch 1 trim acts “normally” (over the full
control travel), or just at the idle end of
the range, i. e. only at the “back” or “forward” end of
the stick travel.
• Please note the Cut-off trim function, which is described on page 60.
CH8 delay
Notes:
•
If you select “Idle forward / back” in the
“Motor at C1” line, this menu line is suppressed.
• This option is also only effective if you have activated at least one flight phase; see below under
“Phases”.
GRAUBELE
mod name
stick mode
1
no
motor at C1
CH8 delay
yes
tail type
normal
If you select “no”, the transition delay for control channel
8 of about one second, which takes effect every time
you switch flight phases, is switched off; selecting “yes”
switches it on.
When you select the “K8 delayed” line using the arrow
buttons  of the left or right-hand touch-key, the corresponding input field is framed. Briefly press the central
SET button of the right-hand touch-key to highlight the
current setting (black background). Now use the arrow
buttons of the right-hand touch-key to select one of the
two options.
cut off
Note:
This menu line is suppressed if you choose
“none” or “none/inv” in the “Motor at Ch 1”
line.
If you select “Idle forward / back” in the “Motor at Ch1”
line, you can make use of the “Motor stop” option by
assigning a physical switch to it. When the switch is
operated, the speed controller or throttle servo move to
a pre-set position, i.e. the throttle setting of the speed
controller is reduced, or the carburettor control (throttle)
servo moves to the motor OFF position (or idle position).
The motor OFF (or idle) position is entered in the lefthand column above the “SEL” field; the optimum setting
must be found experimentally.
However, the speed controller or throttle servo only
takes up this defined position in response to the switch if
the throttle signal is below a particular servo position or
switching threshold. This point is defined by entering the
desired servo position (switching threshold) in the centre
column above the “STO” field. Your preferred ON / OFF
switch can be selected in the right-hand column.
• If the % value entered in the centre column is higher
than the current servo position, i.e. the current servo
position is below the switching threshold, then the
change takes effect as soon as you move the switch
Program description: base settings - fixed-wing model
75
to the ON position.
• If the % value entered in the centre column is lower
than the current servo position, i.e. the current servo
position is above the switching threshold, and you
move the assigned switch to the ON position, then
the change (speed controller reduces motor speed,
or throttle servo closes the carburettor to the point
defined in the left-hand column) only takes effect
when the servo position first falls below the switching
threshold (max. +150%).
The speed controller or throttle servo remains at
this motor OFF position until you operate the selected switch again, and use the throttle / brake stick to
move the throttle servo or speed controller beyond
the pre-programmed switching threshold.
The default value in the left-hand column for the “motor
OFF” position of the throttle servo is -100%; the default
switching threshold in the centre column is a servo
position of +150%:
GRAUBELE
mod name
stick mode
1
idle re.
motor at C1
cut off –100% +150% –––
tail type
normal
STO
it is important to ensure that the throttle servo does not
strike its mechanical end-stop, e.g. -125%:
GRAUBELE
mod name
stick mode
1
idle re.
motor at C1
cut off –125% +150% –––
tail type
normal
STO
The default value in the centre column is deliberately
high, as this enables you to stop the motor over the
maximum possible range of servo travel (or speed controller range) simply by operating the switch; the switch
is assigned in the right-hand column later.
However, if you prefer to set a lower switching threshold,
so that the switch only takes effect when the throttle servo or speed controller is below a certain point, then you
should reduce the pre-set servo travel from +150%. This
is accomplished by moving the throttle / brake stick until
the throttle servo or speed controller is at the position
you prefer, then briefly pressing the central SET button
of the right-hand touch-key:
GRAUBELE
mod name
stick mode
1
idle re.
motor at C1
cut off –125% +100% –––
tail type
normal
STO
Programming
This is the procedure for changing the default value for
the “motor OFF” position of the throttle servo: briefly
The final step is to move to the right-hand column
press the central SET button of the right-hand touch-key:
and assign a switch which you would like to use to cut
the current setting is now highlighted (dark background).
the motor (in an emergency) or activate the switching
Now use the arrow buttons of the left or right-hand
threshold.
touch-key to enter a value at which the motor is reliably
“off”. If you are controlling a throttle servo (carburettor)
76 Program description: base settings - fixed-wing model
GRAUBELE
mod name
stick mode
1
idle re.
motor at C1
cut off –125% +100% 9
tail type
normal
STO
Notes:
•
You must ensure that the throttle servo
does not strike its mechanical end-stop
when the motor stop switch is operated.
• To set a switching threshold higher than +100%, temporarily increase the travel of servo 1 to more than
100% in the “Servo settings” menu, and then restore
the original value once you have stored the switching threshold.
tail type
GRAUBELE
mod name
stick mode
1
idle re.
motor on C1
cut off –125% +100% 9
tail type
normal
When you select “tail type” using the arrow buttons
 of the left or right-hand touch-key, you will see
the corresponding input field framed. Touch the central
SET button of the right-hand touch-key to highlight the
current setting. Now use the arrow buttons of the righthand touch-key to select the option which matches your
model:
„normal“:
This setting caters for all models in which
each of the functions elevator and rudder
„V-tail“:
„Delt/FlW“:
„2elev sv“: is operated by one servo.
The elevator and rudder functions are
operated by two control surfaces set in a
V-shape, each controlled by a separate
servo. The two-way coupling function for
the rudder and elevator control systems
is automatically carried out by the transmitter software. If necessary, the ratio
of rudder travel to elevator travel can be
adjusted in the “Dual Rate” menu (page
102).
The mixed elevon (aileron and elevator)
control system requires two or four separate servos, one or two in each wing.
However, the elevator trim only affects
servos 2 + 3, even if you select “2ail2fl” see below.
This option is designed for model aircraft
with two elevator servos. When the elevator stick is moved, the servo connected
to receiver output 8 moves in parallel with
servo 3. The elevator trim lever affects
both servos.
Note regarding “2elev sv”:
In this mode a transmitter
control which is assigned to
input 8 in the “Transmitter
control settings” menu is de-coupled
from servo “8”; this is for safety reasons.
Ailerons / Camber-changing flaps
When you select the “Aileron / Flap” line using the arrow
buttons  of the left or right-hand touch-key, you will
see the corresponding input field framed:
stick mode
1
idle re.
motor at C1
cut off –125% +100% 9
tail type
normal
aile/flap
1aile
Touch the central SET button of the right-hand touchkey to highlight the current setting. Now use the arrow
buttons of the right-hand touch-key to select one of the
three options , which are.
“1aile”
Both ailerons are actuated by a single
servo.
“1ail1fl”
Both ailerons are actuated by a single
servo, and both flaps are actuated by a
single servo,
“2aile”
Each aileron is actuated by one servo.
2ail1fl”
Aileron actuation as above, but with one
flap servo,
“2ail2fl”
Each aileron is actuated by a separate
servo; there are also one or two camber-changing flap servos.
The mixers and associated adjustment facilities which
appear in the “Wing mixers” menu (see section starting
on page 108) vary according to the data you enter
here. The software provides a maximum of twelve
ready-made mixers for up to two aileron servos and two
camber-changing flap servos.
timer Two timers are shown in the basic display: one stopwatch and one flight timer:
GRAUBELE
#01
stop
flt
5.6V
0:00h
M
0:00
0:00
HoTT
0.0V
You can assign a physical switch or a control switch to
these two timers in the right-hand column of the “timer”
line, indicated by the switch symbol
at the bottom
edge of the screen.
idle re.
motor at C1
cut off –125% +100% 9
tail type
normal
aile/flap
2aile
timer
0:00 –––
The assigned switch starts both timers, and also halts
the stopwatch.
The method of assigning a physical switch or a control
switch is described on page 59.
The flight timer, and the saving of telemetry data on a
memory card fitted in the card slot (see page 22),
always starts simultaneously with the stopwatch, but
continues to run even when the stopwatch is halted
(switched off). It can only be stopped by touching the
central ESC button of the left-hand touch-key when the
stopwatch is already halted.
Once the timers are stopped, you can reset both timers
to their initial value by briefly pressing the  or 
Program description: base settings - fixed-wing model 77
buttons of the right-hand touch key (CLEAR).
Switching between “count-up” and “count-down”
Count-up timer (stopwatch function)
If you assign a switch and start the stopwatch with the
initial value of “0:00”, the timer runs up until the maximum of 180 minutes and 59 seconds, then re-starts at
0:00.
Count-down timer (alarm timer function)
You can select a starting time within the range 0 to 180
minutes in the left-hand minutes field, and a starting
time within the range 0 to 59 seconds in the right-hand
seconds field. Any combination of times can also be
selected.
Simultaneously touching the  or  buttons of the
right-hand touch-key (CLEAR) resets any settings you
have made to “0” or “00”.
idle re.
motor at C1
cut off –125% +100% 9
tail type
normal
aile/flap
2aile
timer
2
0:00
5. Once you have switched back to the basic display by touching the central ESC button of the lefthand touch-key the required number of times, touch
the  or  buttons of the right-hand touchkey (CLEAR) simultaneously, with the stopwatch
stopped, to switch the stopwatch to the “Timer” function; see top right in the following illustration:
GRAUBELE
#01
stop
flt
10:01
0:00
5.6V
0:00h
M
HoTT
0.0V
When you operate the assigned switch, the stopwatch
now starts from the set initial value, counting down
(“Timer function”). When the set time has elapsed, the
timer does not stop, but continues to run so that you can
read off the time elapsed after reaching zero. To make
this clear, the over-run time is shown highlighted (black
background).
Sequence of sounds
30 sec. before zero: triple beep
single beep every two seconds
20 sec. before zero: double beep
single beep every two seconds
10 sec. before zero: single beep
single beep every second
5 sec. before zero: single beep every second at higher
rate
zero: longer beep; display switches to
inverse video
The “alarm timer” is reset by simultaneously touching
Procedure
1. Select the desired input field using the arrow buttons
 of the left or right-hand touch-key.
2. Touch SET in the centre of the right-hand touch-key.
3. Select the required time in the highlighted minutes
and seconds fields using the arrow buttons of the
right-hand touch-key.
4. Touch the central SET button to conclude the input
process.
78 Program description: base settings - fixed-wing model
the  or  buttons of the right-hand touch-key
(CLEAR), once you have halted the timer.
Note:
A count-down timer is indicated in the basic
display by a flashing colon (:) between the
minutes field and the seconds field.
Phase 2, Phase 3 and Phase 4
You will automatically be in the “normal” flight phase 1
unless you have already assigned a switch to phases 2,
3 or 4.
Both the number and name of this flight phase are fixed
permanently as “normal”, and cannot be changed. For
this reason the “normal” phase is simply concealed, i. e.
it is not displayed as phase 1.
aile/flap
timer
phase 2
phase 3
phase 4
10:01
takeoff
speed
landing
2aile
2
–––
–––
–––
It is also important to understand that the flight phases
have their own inherent priorities which need to be observed, particularly when assigning individual switches.
The underlying scheme can be described as follows:
• If all assigned flight phase switches are closed or
open, the “normal” flight phase is active.
• If only one switch is closed, then the flight phase
assigned to the currently closed switch is active.
• If two switches are closed, then the flight phase with
the lower number is active.
For example, this would be phase 2, if one of the
switches assigned to phase 3 or 4 is also closed, or
phase 3, if the switches assigned to phases 3 and 4
are closed.
• As a result you may wish to take the inherent phase
priorities into account when assigning names to the
flight phases; see below.
• At the servo end the transition does not occur
“abruptly”, but with a fixed transition period of about
one second.
Programming
When you select “phase 2”, “phase 3” or “phase 4” using
the arrow buttons  of the left or right-hand touchkey, the “Name” field for that flight phase is already
framed.
If the default name does not seem appropriate, touch
the central SET button of the right-hand touch-key, and
the current setting is shown highlighted. Now use the
arrow buttons of the right-hand touch-key to select an
appropriate name from those available. Touch the SET
button to conclude the input process.
Now press the  button of the left or right-hand touchkey to move to the right-hand column at the bottom of
, and
the screen, indicated by the switch symbol
briefly touch the central SET button. You can now assign
a switch to the phase as described on page 59. We
recommend one of the two three-position switches SW
4/5 or SW 6/7, in each case starting from the centre
toggle position.
For more information on flight phase programming
please refer to page 106, in the section entitled “Phase
trim”.
Receiver output
For maximum flexibility in terms of receiver socket
assignment, the mx-16 HoTT software provides the
means to swap over the servo outputs 1 to max. 8;
this is carried out on the second page of the “Receiver
output” sub-menu.
timer
phase
phase
phase
receiv
2
3
4
out
10:01
takeoff
speed
landing
2
7
–––
6
Note:
Touch the central SET button of the right-hand touch-key
to move to the next page of the display. Here you can
assign the “control channels” for servos 1 … 8 to any
receiver output you wish to use. However, please note
that the display in “Servo display” - which you can access from virtually any menu position by simultaneously
touching the  and  buttons of the left-hand touchkey - refers exclusively to the “control channels”, i. e. the
outputs are NOT swapped over.
S
S
S
S
S
1
2
3
4
5
output
output
output
output
output
arrow buttons, and confirm your choice with SET … or
alternatively touch the  or  buttons of the righthand touch-key (CLEAR) simultaneously to revert to the
default sequence.
Please note that any subsequent changes to servo
settings, such as servo travel, Dual Rate / Expo, mixers
etc., must be carried out according to the original
(default) receiver socket sequence.
1
2
3
4
5
Use the arrow buttons  of the left or right-hand
touch-key to select the servo / output combination you
wish to change, then touch the central SET button of the
right-hand touch-key. Now you can assign the desired
servo (S) to the selected output using the right-hand
It is also possible to distribute the control
functions amongst as many receivers as you
wish, using the channel-mapping function in
the mx-16 HoTT’s integral Telemetry menu, or even to
assign the same control function to multiple receiver
outputs. For example, you might wish to actuate each
aileron with two servos instead of just one, etc. However,
we strongly recommend that you use only one of the two
options, as a combination will soon lead to confusion.
rx bind
Graupner|SJ HoTT receivers have to be “instructed” to
communicate exclusively with a particular model (i. e.
model memory) of a Graupner|SJ HoTT transmitter. This
process is known as “binding”, and is only necessary
once for each new combination of receiver and model. It
can be repeated at any time.
Important note:
When carrying out the binding procedure,
please ensure that the transmitter aerial
is always an adequate distance from the
receiver aerials: keeping the aerials about 1 m apart
is safe in this respect. Otherwise you risk a failed
connection to the down-link channel, and consequent malfunctions.
Program description: base settings - fixed-wing model
79
“Binding” multiple receivers to one model
If necessary, it is possible to bind more than one receiver to a single model. This is accomplished by initially
binding the receivers individually, as described in the
next section.
When operating the system, please note
that only the receiver which was bound
last will establish a telemetry link to the
transmitter. For this reason all telemetry sensors
installed in the model must be connected to this receiver, since only the last bound receiver is able to transmit
their data via the down-link channel. The second, and all
other receivers, run in parallel to the receiver last bound
to the transmitter, but completely independently of it;
they operate in Slave mode with the down-link channel
switched off.
The receiver is in Bind mode as long as the LED flashes
red / green.
Within this period of about three seconds briefly touch
the central SET button of the right-hand touch-key to
initiate the so-called binding process between a receiver
and the current model memory. At the same time the
word “BINDING” starts flashing on the screen in the
frame of the “Bound receiver” line, instead of the three
“---”:
“Binding” transmitter and receiver
Use the arrow buttons  of the left or right-hand
touch-key to move to the “rx bind” line:
The receiver LED is now flashing red again, and if it
goes out without about ten seconds, and instead glows
a constant green, then the binding process has been
completed successfully. Your model / receiver combination is now ready for use. In parallel with this the screen
displays the code number for the receiver now “bound”
to this model memory. For example:
phase 2
phase 3
phase 4
receiv out
rx bind
takeoff
speed
landing
7
–––
6
phase 2
phase 3
phase 4
receiv out
rx bind
–––
If you have not already done so, switch on the power
supply to your receiver now: the red LED on the receiver
flashes.
Press and hold the SET button on the receiver until,
after about three seconds, the red-flashing LED starts to
flash red / green; this will last for a further three seconds.
You can now release the SET button on the receiver.
80
phase 2
phase 3
phase 4
receiv out
rx bind
takeoff
speed
landing
7
–––
6
BINDING
takeoff
speed
landing
7
–––
6
R08
If, in contrast, the red LED on the receiver flashes
for longer than about ten seconds, then the binding
process has failed. In parallel with this the screen will
display three “---” once more. If this should occur, alter
Program description: base settings - fixed-wing model
the relative position of the aerials, and repeat the whole
procedure.
range test
The integral range-check reduces the transmitter’s output power in such a way that you can test the system’s
operation at a distance of less than hundred metres.
Carry out the range-check of the Graupner|SJ HoTT
system in accordance with the following instructions.
We recommend that you ask a friend to help with
range-checking.
1. Install the receiver in the model as required, preferably after completing the binding process with the
transmitter.
2. Switch the radio control system on and wait until the
green LED on the receiver glows. Now you can observe the servo movements.
3. Place the model on a flat surface (paving, close-mown
grass or earth), with the receiver aerials at least
15 cm above the ground. This means that you may
have to place the model on a raised object for the period of the check.
4. Hold the transmitter at hip-height, and away from
your body. However, do not point the aerial straight
at the model; instead rotate and / or angle the tip of
the aerial so that it is vertical while you carry out the
check.
5. If you have not already done so, use the arrow buttons  of the left or right-hand touch-key to move
to the “Test range” line, and initiate range-check mode
by briefly pressing the central SET button of the righthand touch-key:
phase 3
phase 4
receiv out
rx bind
range test
speed
landing
–––
6
R08
99sec
When you start the range-check, the transmitter’s
output power is significantly reduced, and the blue
LED on the aerial base starts to flash. At the same
time the time display on the transmitter screen starts
counting down, and a double beep sounds every five
seconds.
From five seconds before the end of the range-check
you will hear a triple beep every second. When the
99 seconds of the range-check period have elapsed,
the transmitter switches back to full power, and the
blue LED glows constantly once more.
6. Within this period walk away from the model, moving
the sticks all the while. If at any point within a distance
of about fifty metres you notice a break in the connection, attempt to reproduce it.
7. If the model is fitted with a motor, switch it on in order
to check the system’s interference rejection.
8. Walk further away from the model until you no longer
have full control over it.
9. At this point wait until the test period has elapsed, with
the model still switched on and ready for use. When
the range-check period is over, the model should respond again to control commands. It this is not 100%
the case, do not use the system. Contact your nearest
Service Centre of Graupner GmbH & Co. KG.
10.Carry out the range-check before every flight, and
simulate all the servo movements which are likely to
occur in a typical flight. To ensure safe operation of
the model, the range must always be at least fifty metres on the ground.
attention:
Never initiate a range-check when you are
actually operating a model!
RF transmit
In this menu line you can manually switch the transmitter’s RF transmission on and off again for a specific
model for the current period that the transmitter is
switched on. For example, you might wish to do this to
save power when demonstrating the programming of a
model.
If you switch the transmitter off with the
RF module switched off, next time you
switch the transmitter on it will be switched back on again.
Use the arrow buttons  of the left or right-hand
touch-key to move to the “RF module” line, and touch
the central SET button of the right-hand touch-key to
activate the value window:
phase 4
landing 6
receiv out
rx bind
R08
range test
99sec
RF transmit
OFF
Now you can use the right-hand arrow buttons to switch
between OFF and ON. Touch the central SET button of
the right-hand touch-key again to conclude the input.
Program description: base settings - fixed-wing model
81
Base settings
Basic model-specific settings for model helicopters
Before you start programming specific parameters,
some basic settings must be entered which apply only
to the currently active model memory. Select the “Base
settings” (Basic model settings) menu using the arrow
buttons of the left or right-hand touch-key, and press the
central SET button of the right-hand touch-key:
mod.mem.
ser vo set.
D/R expo
free mixer
ser vo disp
fail-safe
base sett.
contr set.
heli mixer
swashp. mix
basic sett
telemetr y
Model name
mod name
stick mode
1
1 ser vo
swashplate
cut off –100% +150% –––
right
rotor direct
tons  of the right-hand touch button, or its central
SET button, to move to the next position in the name, at
which point you can again select a character. Simultaneously touching the  or  buttons of the righthand touch-key (CLEAR) inserts a space at that point.
You can move to any character position within the input
field using the  buttons of the right-hand touch-key.
You can return to the previous menu page by briefly
pressing the central ESC button of the left-hand touchkey.
The model name entered in this way appears in the
basic display, and also in the sub-menus of the “Model
memory” menu point.
Stick mode
Basically there are four possible ways of arranging the
principal control functions of a model helicopter on
the two dual-axis sticks: the primary functions are roll,
pitch-axis, tail rotor and throttle / collective pitch. Which
of these options you select depends on your individual
preferences and flying style:
Touch the SET button of the right-hand touch-key to
move to the next screen page, where you can select
characters to assemble the model name. You can enter
up to nine characters to define a model name:
“MODE 1” (Throttle at right stick) “MODE 2” (Throttle at left stick)
0123456789 : ;
?
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNO
PQRSTUVWXYZ
“MODE 3” (Throttle at right stick) “MODE 4” (Throttle at left stick)
throttle
tail rotor
roll
tail rotor
roll
tail rotor
pitch axis
tail rotor
roll
throttle
STARLET
mod name
stick mode
1
1 ser vo
swashplate
cut off –100% +150% –––
right
rotor direct
Briefly press the SET button: the current stick mode
appears highlighted. Now use the arrow buttons of the
right-hand touch-key to choose one of the options 1 to 4.
By simultaneously touching the  or  buttons of
the right-hand touch-key (CLEAR) the display reverts to
stick mode “1”.
A further brief press on the SET button disables the
select field again, so that you can change to a different
line.
Swashplate type
STARLET
mod name
stick mode
1
1 ser vo
swashplate
cut off –100% +150% –––
right
rotor direct
roll
Motor/Pitch
throttle
pitch axis
roll
pitch axis
tail rotor
pitch axis
pitch axis
throttle
tail rotor
STAR
throttle
roll
model name
roll
tail rotor
pitch axis
throttle
tail rotor
throttle
roll
pitch axis
is now framed:
pitch axis
Use the arrow buttons  of the left or right-hand
Use the arrow buttons of the left-hand touch-key to
touch-key to select the “Stick mode” line; the select field
select the desired character. Touch one of the arrow but82 Program description: base settings - model helicopter
You will require a particular program variant to suit the
number of servos which operate the collective pitch
function.
Select “Swashplate” with the arrow buttons  of
the left or right-hand touch-key, and the select field is
framed. Touch the SET button: the current number of
collective pitch servos is highlighted on the screen. You
can now determine the required variant using the arrow
buttons of the right-hand touch-key:
“1 servo”:
The swashplate is tilted by one roll servo
and one pitch-axis servo. Collective pitch
is controlled by one separate servo.
The “Swashplate mixer” menu point is
suppressed in the multi-function menu if
you select “1 servo” as the swashplate
type. This is because model helicopters
with only one collective pitch servo are
controlled WITHOUT transmitter mixers
for the swashplate functions collective
pitch, pitch-axis and roll.
The swashplate is moved axially by two
“2 servo”:
roll servos for collective pitch control;
pitch-axis control is de-coupled by a
mechanical compensating rocker.
“3sv(2rol)”: A symmetrical three-point swashplate
linkage using three linkage points arranged equally at 120°, actuated by one
pitch-axis servo (front or rear) and two
roll servos (left and right). For collective
pitch control all three servos move the
swashplate axially.
“3sv(140)”: Asymmetrical three-point swashplate linkage using three linkage points, connected
to one pitch servo (rear) and two roll
servos (front left and right). For collective
pitch control all three servos move the
swashplate axially.
“3sv(2nic)”: A symmetrical three-point linkage as
above, but rotated through 90°, i. e. one
roll servo on one side, and two pitch-axis
servos front and rear.
“4sv(90)”:
Four-point swashplate linkage using two
roll and two pitch-axis servos.
Simultaneously pressing the  or  buttons of the
right-hand touch-key (CLEAR) resets the swashplate
type to “1 servo”.
Swashplate type: 1 servo
Swashplate type: 3 servos (pitch-axis)
1
3
2
Swashplate type: 4 servos (90°), 2 pitch / 2 roll
2
Swashplate type: 2 servos
2
5
3
1
Note:
2
1
Swashplate type: 3 servos (2 roll)
2
3
1
Swashplate type: 3 servos (140°)
2
3
1
With the exception of the “1 servo” pre-set,
the swashplate mixer ratios are set in the
“Swashplate mixers” menu; see page 132.
Cut off
The auto-rotation settings of the mx-16 HoTT transmitter’s Helicopter program include a facility for defining
a “motor OFF” position for the throttle servo or speed
controller for use in an emergency; see the programming
suggestion on page 180. However, you may wish to set
an idle position instead of an (emergency) OFF position
in the “Throttle” line of the “Helimix” menu, perhaps in
order to avoid having to re-start the engine after every
practice auto-rotation landing. This effectively circumvents the “motor cut” facility, but there is an alternative
method of setting up an emergency OFF system: this is
the “Motor stop” option, which is described in the following section.
If you select “front / rear” in the “Collective pitch min.”
Program description: base settings - model helicopter
83
line of the “Base settings” menu, you can make use of
the “Motor stop” option by assigning a physical switch to
it. When the switch is operated, the speed controller or
throttle servo move to a pre-set position, i.e. the throttle
setting of the speed controller is reduced, or the carburettor control (throttle) servo moves to the motor OFF
position (or idle position).
The motor OFF (or idle) position is entered in the lefthand column above the “SEL” field; the optimum setting
must be found experimentally.
However, the speed controller or throttle servo only
takes up this defined position in response to the switch if
the throttle signal is below a particular servo position or
switching threshold. This point is defined by entering the
desired servo position (switching threshold) in the centre
column above the “STO” field. Your preferred ON / OFF
switch can be selected in the right-hand column.
• If the % value entered in the centre column is higher
than the current servo position, i.e. the current servo
position is below the switching threshold, then the
change takes effect as soon as you move the switch
to the ON position.
• If the % value entered in the centre column is lower
than the current servo position, i.e. the current servo
position is above the switching threshold, and you
move the assigned switch to the ON position, then
the change (speed controller reduces motor speed,
or throttle servo closes the carburettor to the point
defined in the left-hand column) only takes effect
when the servo position first falls below the switching
threshold (max. +150%).
The speed controller or throttle servo remains at
this motor OFF position until you operate the selected switch again, and use the throttle / brake stick to
84
move the throttle servo or speed controller beyond
the pre-programmed switching threshold.
The default value in the left-hand column for the “motor
OFF” position of the throttle servo is -100%; the default
switching threshold in the centre column is a servo
position of +150%:
STARLET
mod name
stick mode
1
3sv(2rol)
swashplate
cut off –100% +150% –––
right
rotor direct
STO
Programming
This is the procedure for changing the default value for
the “motor OFF” position of the throttle servo: briefly
press the central SET button of the right-hand touch-key:
the current setting is now highlighted (dark background).
Now use the arrow buttons of the left or right-hand
touch-key to enter a value at which the motor is reliably
“off”. If you are controlling a throttle servo (carburettor)
it is important to ensure that the throttle servo does not
strike its mechanical end-stop, e.g. -125%:
STARLET
mod name
stick mode
1
3sv(2rol)
swashplate
cut off –125% +150% –––
right
rotor direct
STO
The default value in the centre column is deliberately
high, as this enables you to stop the motor over the
maximum possible range of servo travel (or speed controller range) simply by operating the switch; the switch
Program description: base settings - model helicopter
is assigned in the right-hand column later.
However, if you prefer to set a lower switching threshold,
so that the switch only takes effect when the throttle servo or speed controller is below a certain point, then you
should reduce the pre-set servo travel from +150%. This
is accomplished by moving the throttle / brake stick until
the throttle servo or speed controller is at the position
you prefer, then briefly pressing the central SET button
of the right-hand touch-key:
STARLET
mod name
stick mode
1
3sv(2rol)
swashplate
cut off –125% +100% –––
right
rotor direct
STO
The final step is to move to the right-hand column
and assign a switch which you would like to use to cut
the motor (in an emergency) or activate the switching
threshold.
STARLET
mod name
stick mode
1
3sv(2rol)
swashplate
cut off –125% +100% 1
right
rotor direct
STO
Notes:
•
You must ensure that the throttle servo
does not strike its mechanical end-stop
when the motor stop switch is operated.
• To set a switching threshold higher than +100%, temporarily increase the travel of servo 1 to more than
100% in the “Servo settings” menu, and then restore
the original value once you have stored the switching threshold.
Direction of rotation of main rotor
STARLET
mod name
stick mode
1
3sv(2rol)
swashplate
cut off –125% +100% 1
right
rotor direct
In the “Rotor direction” line you enter the direction of
rotation of the main rotor using the arrow buttons of the
right-hand touch-key, after briefly pressing the central
SET button:
“right”: the main rotor spins clockwise as viewed from
above.
the main rotor spins anti-clockwise as viewed
“left”:
from above.
Simultaneously touching the  or  buttons of the
right-hand touch-key (CLEAR) switches to “right”.
right-hand
rotation
the mixers which compensate for rotor torque and motor
power. You will find these in the “Helicopter mixer”
menu:
Pitch
Ch1  throttle
Ch1  tail rotor
Pitch
Collective pitch min.
stick mode
1
3sv(2rol)
swashplate
cut off –125% +100% 1
right
rotor direct
pitch min
rear
In the “Collective pitch min.” line you can set up the
direction of operation of the throttle / collective pitch
stick to suit your preference. This setting is crucial to the
correct operation of all the other options in the helicopter
program which affect the throttle and collective pitch
functions, i. e. the throttle curve, idle trim, tail rotor mixer
etc.
Briefly touch the central SET button of the right-hand
touch-key, and the direction of operation of the throttle /
collective pitch stick is highlighted. Now you can select
the required variant using the arrow buttons of the righthand touch-key:
The meaning is as follows:
“front”: minimum collective pitch when the collective
pitch stick (Ch 1) is “forward” (away from you);
“rear”: minimum collective pitch when the collective
pitch stick (Ch 1) is “back” (towards you).
Simultaneously pressing the  or  buttons of
the right-hand touch-key (CLEAR) returns the collective
pitch min. position to “rear”.
Notes:
•
By default what is known as the “throttle
limiter” is set (see page 99); this limits
the travel of the throttle servo in the direction of maximum throttle, acting separately from the
collective pitch servos. This point can be programmed
using the “Lim” input in the “Transmitter control settings” menu.
• The Ch 1 trim always affects the throttle servo only.
left-hand
rotation
The program requires this information in order to set up
the mixers to work in the correct “sense”; this applies to
Program description: base settings - model helicopter
85
timer
Two timers are shown in the basic display: one stopwatch and one flight timer.
STARLET
#02
stop
flt
5.6V
0:00h
M
0:00
0:00
HoTT
0.0V
A physical switch or a control switch - e. g. the control
switch G3 located on the throttle limiter - can be assigned to these two timers in the “Timers” line …
3sv(2rol)
swashplate
cut off –125% +100% 1
right
rotor direct
pitch min
rear
timer
0:00 –––
the right-hand touch-key (CLEAR).
Switching between “count-up” and “count-down”
Count-up timer (stopwatch function)
If you assign a switch and start the stopwatch with the
initial value of “0:00”, the timer runs up until the maximum of 180 minutes and 59 seconds, then re-starts at
0:00.
Count-down timer (timer function)
In the left-hand minutes field you can select a starting
time within the range 0 to 180 minutes; in the right-hand
seconds field the range is 0 to 59 seconds. Any combination of times can also be selected.
Simultaneously pressing the  buttons of the righthand touch-key (CLEAR) resets any settings you have
entered to “0” or “00”.
3sv(2rol)
swashplate
cut off –125% +100% 1
right
rotor direct
pitch min
rear
timer
10:01 G3
… using the switch symbol
at the bottom right-hand
side of the screen. The assigned switch starts both
timers, and also halts the stopwatch.
The method of assigning a physical switch or a control
Procedure
switch is described on page 59.
1. Select the desired input field using the arrow buttons
The flight timer, and the saving of telemetry data on a
 of the left or right-hand touch-key.
memory card inserted in the card slot (see page 22)
2. Touch SET in the centre of the right-hand touch-key.
always starts simultaneously with the stopwatch, but
continues to run even when the stopwatch is halted
3. Select the required time in the highlighted minutes
(switched off). It can only be stopped by touching the
and seconds fields using the arrow buttons of the
central ESC button of the left-hand touch-key with the
right-hand touch-key.
stopwatch halted.
4. Touch the central SET button to conclude the input
Once stopped, both timers can be reset to the initial
process.
value by simultaneously touching the  buttons of
86 Program description: base settings - model helicopter
5. Switch back to the basic display by repeatedly touching the central ESC button of the left-hand touch-key.
With the stopwatch halted, press the  buttons of
the right-hand touch-key simultaneously (CLEAR) to
switch the stopwatch to the “Timer” function; see top
right in the next illustration:
STARLET
#02
stop
flt
10:01
0:00
5.6V
0:00h
M
HoTT
0.0V
If you now operate the assigned switch, the stopwatch
starts from the set initial value, counting down (“Timer
function”). When the set time has elapsed, the timer
does not stop, but continues to run to allow you to read
off the time elapsed after reaching zero. To make this
clear, the over-run time is shown highlighted (black
background).
Sequence of sounds
30 sec. before zero: triple beep
single beep every two seconds
20 sec. before zero: double beep
single beep every two seconds
10 sec. before zero: single beep
single beep every second
5 sec. before zero: single beep every second at higher
rate
zero: longer beep; display switches to
inverse video
The “alarm timer” is reset by simultaneously pressing
the  or  buttons of the right-hand touch-key
(CLEAR) after you have halted the timer.
Note:
A count-down timer is indicated in the basic
display by a flashing colon (:) between the
minutes field and the seconds field.
Phase 2 / Phase 3
You will automatically be in the “normal” flight phase 1
unless you have already assigned a switch to phases 2
or 3.
Both the number and name of this flight phase are fixed
permanently as “normal”, and cannot be changed. For
this reason the “normal” phase is simply concealed, i. e.
it is not displayed as phase 1.
rotor direct
pitch min
timer
phase 2
phase 3
right
rear
10:01 G3
hover –––
speed –––
It is also important to understand that the flight phases
have their own inherent priorities which need to be observed, particularly when assigning individual switches.
The underlying scheme can be described as follows:
• If all assigned flight phase switches are closed or
open, the “normal” flight phase is active.
• If only one switch is closed, then the flight phase
assigned to the currently closed switch is active.
• If two switches are closed, then the flight phase with
the lower number is active.
For example, this would be phase 2 if the switches
assigned to phase 2 and 3 are closed.
• The “auto-rotation phase” ALWAYS has precedence
over all other flight phases, regardless of the priorities outlined above. When the auto-rotation phase
is selected, the switch is always made WITHOUT
DELAY.
• With this in mind, you may wish to take the inherent
phase priorities into account when assigning names
to the flight phases; see below.
• At the servo end the transition does not occur
“abruptly”, but with a fixed transition period of about
one second.
Programming
When you select “Phase 2” or “Phase 3” using the arrow
buttons  of the left or right-hand touch-key, the
“Name” field for that flight phase is already framed.
If the default name does not seem appropriate, touch
the central SET button of the right-hand touch-key, and
the current setting is shown highlighted. Now use the
arrow buttons of the right-hand touch-key to select an
appropriate name from those available. Touch the SET
button to conclude the input process.
Now press the  button of the left or right-hand touchkey to move to the right-hand column at the bottom of
, and
the screen, indicated by the switch symbol
briefly touch the central SET button. You can now assign
a switch to the phase as described on page 59. We
recommend one of the two three-position switches SW
4/5 or SW 6/7, in each case starting from the centre
toggle position.
For more information on flight phase programming
please refer to page 114, in the section entitled “Flight
phase specific settings for collective pitch, throttle and
tail rotor”.
Auto-rotation
pitch min
timer
phase 2
phase 3
autorotat.
rear
10:01 G3
hover 5
speed 4
–––
The name “Auto-rotation” is permanently assigned to
Phase 4, and CANNOT be altered. The only available
option is to assign a switch to it using the switch symbol
at the right of the screen.
For more information on programming flight phases
please refer to the “Helicopter mixers” section starting
on page 114.
Receiver output
For maximum flexibility in terms of receiver socket
assignment, the mx-16 HoTT software provides the
means to swap over the servo outputs 1 to max. 8;
this is carried out on the second page of the “Receiver
output” sub-menu.
timer
phase 2
phase 3
autorotat.
receiv out
10:01 G3
hover 5
speed 4
2
Touch the central SET button of the right-hand touchkey to move to the next page of the display. Here you
can assign the “control channels” for servos 1 … 8 to
any receiver output you wish to use. However, please
note that the display in “Servo display” - which you can
Program description: base settings - model helicopter
87
access from virtually any menu position by simultaneously touching the  and  buttons of the left-hand
touch-key - refers exclusively to the “control channels”,
i. e. the outputs are NOT swapped over.
S
S
S
S
S
1
2
3
4
5
output
output
output
output
output
1
2
3
4
5
Use the arrow buttons  of the left or right-hand
touch-key to select the servo / output combination you
wish to change, then touch the central SET button of the
right-hand touch-key. Now you can assign the desired
servo (S) to the selected output using the right-hand
arrow buttons, and confirm your choice with SET … or
alternatively touch the  or  buttons of the righthand touch-key (CLEAR) simultaneously to revert to the
default sequence.
Please note that any subsequent changes to servo
settings, such as servo travel, Dual Rate / Expo, mixers
etc., must be carried out according to the original
(default) receiver socket sequence.
Typical application:
In the helicopter program of the mx-16 HoTT the
outputs for one collective pitch servo and the throttle
servo have been interchanged compared to all earlier
GRAUPNER/JR mc-systems. The throttle servo is now
assigned to receiver output “6” and the collective pitch
servo to output “1”. However, you may wish to retain the
earlier configuration.
88
S
S
S
S
S
S
6
2
3
4
5
1
output
output
output
output
output
output
1
2
3
4
5
6
Note:
It is also possible to distribute the control
functions amongst as many receivers as you
wish, using the channel-mapping function in
the mx-16 HoTT’s integral Telemetry menu, or even to
assign the same control function to multiple receiver
outputs. However, we strongly recommend that you use
only one of the two options, as a combination will soon
lead to confusion.
rx bind
(Bound receiver)
Graupner|SJ HoTT receivers have to be “instructed” to
communicate exclusively with a particular model (i. e.
model memory) of a Graupner|SJ HoTT transmitter. This
process is known as “binding”, and is only necessary
once for each new combination of receiver and model. It
can be repeated at any time.
Important note:
When carrying out the binding procedure,
please ensure that the transmitter aerial
is always an adequate distance from the
receiver aerials: keeping the aerials about 1 m apart
is safe in this respect. Otherwise you risk a failed
connection to the down-link channel, and consequent malfunctions.
Program description: base settings - model helicopter
“Binding” multiple receivers to one model
If necessary, it is possible to bind more than one receiver to a single model. This is accomplished by initially
binding the receivers individually, as described in the
next section.
When operating the system, please note
that only the receiver which was bound
last will establish a telemetry link to the
transmitter. For this reason all telemetry sensors
installed in the model must be connected to this receiver, since only the last bound receiver is able to transmit
their data via the down-link channel. The second, and all
other receivers, run in parallel to the receiver last bound
to the transmitter, but completely independently of it;
they operate in Slave mode with the down-link channel
switched off.
“Binding” transmitter and receiver
Use the arrow buttons  of the left or right-hand
touch-key to move to the “rx bind” line:
phase 2
phase 3
autorotat.
receiv out
rx bind
hover
speed
5
4
2
–––
If you have not already done so, switch on the power
supply to your receiver now: the red LED on the receiver
flashes.
Press and hold the SET button on the receiver until,
after about three seconds, the red-flashing LED starts to
flash red / green; this will last for a further three seconds.
You can now release the SET button on the receiver.
The receiver is in Bind mode as long as the LED flashes
red / green.
Briefly touch the central SET button of the right-hand
touch-key within this period of about three seconds:
this initiate the binding process between a receiver and
the current model memory. At the same time the word
“BINDING” starts flashing in the frame of the “rx bind”
line on the screen, instead of the three “---”:
phase 2
phase 3
autorotat.
receiv out
rx bind
hover
speed
5
4
2
BINDING
The receiver LED is now flashing red again, and if it
goes out within about ten seconds, and instead glows
a constant green, then the binding process has been
completed successfully. Your model / receiver combination is now ready for use. In parallel with this the screen
displays the code number for the receiver now “bound”
to this model memory. For example:
phase 2
phase 3
autorotat.
receiv out
rx bind
hover
speed
5
4
2
R08
If, in contrast, the red LED on the receiver flashes
for longer than about ten seconds, then the binding
process has failed. In parallel with this the screen will
display three “---” once more. If this should occur, alter
the relative position of the aerials and repeat the whole
procedure.
Range test
The integral range-check reduces the transmitter’s output
power in such a way that you can test the system’s operation at a distance of up to about fifty metres.
Carry out the range-check of the Graupner|SJ HoTT
system in accordance with the following instructions.
We recommend that you ask a friend to help with
range-checking.
1. Install the receiver in the model as required, preferably after completing the binding process with the
transmitter.
2. Switch the radio control system on and wait until the
green LED on the receiver glows. Now you can observe the servo movements.
3. Place the model on a flat surface (paving, close-mown
grass or earth), with the receiver aerials at least 15
cm above the ground. This means that you may have
to place the model on a raised object for the period of
the check.
4. Hold the transmitter at hip-height, and away from your
body. Do not point the aerial straight at the model; instead rotate and / or angle the aerial tip so that it is
vertical while you carry out the check.
5. If you have not already done so, use the arrow buttons  of the left or right-hand touch-key to move
to the “Test range” line, and initiate range-check
mode by briefly pressing the central SET button of
the right-hand touch-key:
phase 3
autorotat.
receiv out
rx bind
range test
speed
4
2
R08
99sec
When you start the range-check, the transmitter’s
output power is significantly reduced, and the blue
LED on the aerial base starts to flash. At this point
the time display on the transmitter screen starts
counting down, and a double beep sounds every five
seconds.
From five seconds before the end of the range-check
you will hear a triple beep every second. When the
99 seconds of the range-check period have elapsed,
the transmitter switches back to full power, and the
blue LED glows constantly once more.
6. Within this period walk away from the model, moving
the sticks all the while. If at any point within a distance
of about fifty metres you notice a break in the connection, attempt to reproduce it.
7. If the model is fitted with a motor, switch it on in order
to check the system’s interference rejection.
8. Walk further away from the model until you no longer
have full control over it.
9. At this point wait until the test period has elapsed,
with the model still switched on and ready for use.
When the range-check period is over, the model
should respond again to control commands. It this is
not 100% the case, do not use the system. Contact
your nearest Graupner Service Centre.
10.Carry out a range-check before every flight, and simulate all the servo movements which are likely to oc-
Program description: base settings - model helicopter
89
cur in a typical flight. To ensure safe operation of the
model, the range must always be at least fifty metres
on the ground.
attention:
Never initiate a range-check when you are
actually operating a model!
RF transmit
In this menu line you can manually switch the transmitter’s RF transmission on and off again for a specific model for the period that the transmitter is currently switched
on. For example, you might wish to do this to save power
when demonstrating the programming of a model.
If you switch the transmitter off with the
RF module switched off, next time you
switch the transmitter on it will be switched back on again.
Use the arrow buttons  of the left or right-hand
touch-key to move to the “RF transmit” line, and touch the
central SET button of the right-hand touch-key to activate
the value window:
autorotat.
receiv out
rx bind
range test
RF transmit
2
R08
99sec
ON
Now you can use the right-hand arrow buttons to switch
between OFF and ON. Touch the central SET button of
the right-hand touch-key again to conclude the input.
90
Program description: base settings - model helicopter
For your notes
91
Servo settings
Servo direction, centre, travel
S1
S2
S3
S4
S5
rev
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
cent
100% 100%
100% 100%
100% 100%
100% 100%
100% 100%
trav +
In this menu you can adjust parameters which only affect the servo connected to a particular receiver output,
namely the direction of servo rotation, neutral point and
servo travel. Always start with the servo setting in the
left-hand column.v
Basic procedure:
1. Use the arrow buttons  of the left or right-hand
touch-key to select the relevant servo (1 to 8).
2. If necessary, use the arrow buttons  of the left
or right-hand touch-key to select the desired column,
and move the associated transmitter control from its
centre position if you wish to define an asymmetrical setting.
3. Touch the central SET button of the right-hand touchkey, and the corresponding input field is highlighted
(black background).
4. Set the appropriate value using the arrow buttons of
the right-hand touch-key.
5. Touch the central SET button of the right-hand touchkey to conclude the input process.
6. Simultaneously pressing the arrow buttons  or
 of the right-hand touch-key (CLEAR) resets any
settings you have entered to the default value.
92
Program description: servo settings
Important:
The numbers in the servo designations refer
to the receiver output socket to which a
particular servo(s) is connected, assuming
that these have not been swapped over. This means that
changing the stick mode does not affect the numbering
of the servos.
Column 2 “Rev.”
The direction of servo rotation can be adjusted to suit
the actual installation in your model. This means that
you don’t need to concern yourself with servo directions
when installing the mechanical linkages in the model,
as you can reverse them as and when necessary. The
direction of rotation is indicated by the symbols “=>” and
“<=”. Be sure to set the direction of servo rotation before
you make adjustments to the remaining options!
Simultaneously pressing the arrow buttons  or 
of the right-hand touch-key (CLEAR) resets the direction
of rotation to “=>”.
normal
normal
reversed
reversed
Column 3 “Centre”
The facility to offset the servo travel centre is intended
for adjusting servos whose centre setting is not standard
(servo centre point at 1.5 ms or 1500 μs), and also for
minor adjustments, e. g. when fine-tuning the neutral
position of the model’s control surfaces.
The neutral position can be shifted over the range
-125% to +125% of normal servo travel, within the maximum servo travel of +/- 150%, regardless of the trim lever position and any mixers you have set up. The setting
affects the associated servo directly, independently of all
other trim and mixer settings.
However, please note that an extreme shift of the servo’s neutral point may result in servo travel to one side
of neutral only, as total servo travel is limited to +/- 150%
for both electronic and mechanical reasons.
Simultaneously pressing the arrow buttons  or 
of the right-hand touch-key (CLEAR) resets the value in
the highlighted input field to “0%”.
Ser vo travel
tre adjustment
Cen
+1
%
25
25
%
-1
Column 4 “- Servo travel +”
In this column you can adjust servo travel symmetrically
or asymmetrically (different each side of neutral). The
adjustment range is 0 … 150% of normal servo travel.
The reference point for the set values is the setting in
the “Centre” column.
To set symmetrical travel, i. e. to adjust travel equally on
both sides of neutral, move the associated transmitter
control (stick, proportional rotary knob or switch) to a
position in which the marking frame encloses both sides
of the travel setting.
the control signal for this servo is generated, i. e. either
directly by a stick channel, or by means of any type of
mixer function.
Note:
To set up asymmetrical travel, move the associated
transmitter control (stick, rotary proportional knob or
switch) to the side to be adjusted, so that the marking
frame only encloses the value you wish to change.
Touch the central SET button of the right-hand touchkey to activate value adjustment; the value field is now
highlighted. Use the arrow buttons of the right-hand
touch-key to change the values. A further brief press
on the central SET button of the right-hand touch-key
concludes the input process.
Simultaneously pressing the arrow buttons  or 
of the right-hand touch-key (CLEAR) resets the parameter in the highlighted input field to 100%.
Important:
In contrast to the “Transmitter control settings” menu,
this setting affects the servo directly, regardless of how
Servo travel
You may need to assign a transmitter control
to a servo which is connected to one of the
control channels 5 … 8; this is accomplished
in the “Transmitter control settings” menu; see next
page.
The graph alongside
shows an example of
asymmetrical servo
travel, with a setting of
-50% and +150%.
Transmitter control travel
Program description: servo settings
93
Transmitter control settings
Basic procedures for assigning transmitter controls and switches
I5
I6
I7
I8
free
free
free
free
+100%
+100%
+100%
+100%
+100%
+100%
+100%
+100%
tr v
+
In addition to the two dual-axis stick units for the control
functions 1 to 4, the mx-16 HoTT is fitted as standard
with a range of supplementary controls:
• Two three-position switches: SW 4/5 or CTRL 9 and
SW 6/7 or CTRL 10. These are assigned in this menu
as “CTRL 9” and “CTR 10” respectively.
• Three rotary proportional controls: CTRL 6, 7 and
8. These are included in the menu as “CTRL 6”,
“CTRL 7” and “CTRL 8”.
• Three two-position switches: SW 2, 3 and 8. These
are indicated in the menu by “2”, “3” and “8” plus a
switch symbol, which indicates the direction of operation of the switch.
• Two momentary switches: SW 1 and SW 9. These
are indicated by “1” and “9” plus a switch symbol and
direction indicator, as mentioned above.
The two dual-axis stick units directly affect the servos
connected to receiver outputs 1 … 4 (assuming that you
have set up a newly initialised model memory with the
model type “Fixed-wing model”). In contrast, the “supplementary” transmitter controls listed above are inactive
when the transmitter is in its default state (as delivered).
As already mentioned on page 20, this means that
the transmitter in its basic form only controls servos
connected to receiver outputs 1 … 4 using the primary
sticks - even when you have initialised a new model
memory with the model type “Fixed-wing model” and
94
“bound” it to the receiver you intend to install. Any
servos connected to receiver sockets 5 … 8 simply stay
at their centre point when you operate the associated
transmitter controls.
This may seem rather inconvenient at first sight, but
it is the only way to ensure that you can select any of
the “supplementary” transmitter controls for any task
you like, and that you are not required deliberately to
“program away” the transmitter controls which are not
required for a particular model.
Any superfluous transmitter control will
have an effect on your model if you
operate it by mistake - unless it is inactive, i. e. unless no function is assigned to it.
That is why you can select these “supplementary” transmitter controls with complete freedom in the “Transmitter
control settings” menu and assign them to any function
input (see page 58) you like, as this method ensures
that the transmitter meets your own requirements
exactly. This also means that each of these transmitter
controls can be assigned to several functions simultaneously. For example, the same toggle switch SW X,
which you assign to an input in this menu, can also be
assigned as the On / Off switch controlling the “Timers”
in the “Base settings” menu.
Important:
In contrast to servo travel adjustments,
changing the transmitter travel setting affects
all mixer and coupling inputs derived from it,
i. e. in the final analysis all the servos which can be
operated using the associated transmitter control.
Program description: transmitter control settings - fixed-wing model
The basic procedure:
1. Select the appropriate input I5 … I8 using the arrow
buttons  of the left or right-hand touch-key.
2. If necessary, use the arrow buttons  of the left or
right-hand touch-key to switch to the desired column.
3. Touch the central SET button of the right-hand touchkey, and the corresponding input field is highlighted.
4. Operate the transmitter control you wish to use, and
set the desired value using the arrow buttons of the
right-hand touch-key.
5. Touch the central SET button of the right-hand touchkey to conclude the input process.
6. Simultaneously pressing the  or  buttons
of the right-hand touch-key (CLEAR) resets any settings you have entered to the appropriate default value.
Column 2 “Assigning transmitter controls and
switches”
Select one of the function inputs 5 to 8 using the 
buttons of the right-hand touch-key.
Touch the central SET button of the right-hand touch-key
to activate the assignment facility.
I5 free
+100% +100%
operate desired
switch or control
I8 free
+100% +100%
tr v
+
Now move the appropriate transmitter control (CTRL
6 to 10), or operate the selected switch (SW 1 to 3, 8
or 9). Note that the rotary proportional controls are not
detected until they have moved a few “ratchet clicks”, i. e.
they need to be operated for slightly longer. If the travel
is not sufficient for the transmitter to detect it, move the
control in the opposite direction.
If you assign one of the two-position switches, then this
control channel works like an On / Off switch. It is then
possible to switch to and fro between two end-point
values using this simple switch, e. g. motor ON / OFF.
The three-position switches SW 4/5 and 6/7, which you
will find in the “Transmitter control settings” menu as
“Control 9” and “Control 10”, provide a centre position in
addition to the two end-points.
Simultaneously pressing the  or  buttons of the
right-hand touch-key (CLEAR) with the switch assignment activated - see illustration above - resets the input
to “free”.
Tips:
•
When assigning the switches please take
care to set them to the appropriate direction of travel, and ensure that all inputs
not required are left at or set to “free”, to eliminate
the possibility of errors if unused transmitter controls
are operated accidentally.
• You can alter the effective end-points of an assigned
switch by adjusting servo travel, as described in the
next section.
The screen now displays either the transmitter control
number or the switch number, followed by a switch symbol which indicates the direction of operation, e. g.:
I5
+100% +100%
3
I6 ctrl 7 +100% +100%
+100% +100%
I7 free
+100% +100%
I8 free
tr v
+
Column 3 “-Travel+”
In this column the transmitter control can be adjusted
symmetrically or asymmetrically, i. e. different to either
side. The available range is +/-125% of the normal servo
travel.
Use the arrow buttons  of the left or right-hand
touch-key to select one of the inputs 5 to 8.
If you wish to set up symmetrical travel, i. e. the same in
both directions, move the associated transmitter control
(rotary proportional controls CTRL 6 … 8 or switches
4/5 and 6/7) to a position at which the marking frame
encloses both sides of the travel setting:
+100% +100%
I5
3
I6 ctrl 7 +100% +100%
+100% +100%
I7 free
+100% +100%
I8 free
tr v
+
If you wish to set up asymmetrical travel, i. e. different for
both directions, move the associated transmitter control
(rotary proportional control or switch) to a position at
which the marking frame encloses the side of the travel
setting you wish to change:
I5
+100% +100%
3
I6 ctrl 7 +100% +100%
+100% +100%
I7 free
+100% +100%
I8 free
tr v
+
Touch the central SET button of the right-hand touch-key
to activate the value setting; the value field is now shown
highlighted. Use the arrow buttons of the right-hand
touch-key to alter the values:
+100% +100%
I5
3
I6 ctrl 7 +111% +111%
I7 free
+100% +100%
+100% +100%
I8 free
tr v
+
I5
+100% +100%
3
+88% +111%
I6 ctrl 7
+100% +100%
I7 free
I8 free
+100% +100%
tr v
+
Touch the central SET button of the right-hand touch-key
to conclude the input process.
Negative and positive parameter values are possible;
this enables you to set the appropriate direction of
movement of the transmitter control or its direction of
effect to suit your model.
Simultaneously pressing the arrow buttons  or 
of the right-hand touch-key (CLEAR) resets the altered
parameter in the highlighted input field to +100%.
Program description: transmitter control settings - fixed-wing model
95
Transmitter control settings
Basic procedures for assigning transmitter controls and switches
I5
thr
gyr
I8
lim
free
free
free
free
ctrl 6
+100% +100%
+100% +100%
+100% +100%
+100% +100%
+100% +100%
tr v +
In addition to the two dual-axis stick units for the control
functions 1 to 4, the mx-16 HoTT is fitted as standard
with a range of supplementary controls:
• Two three-position switches: SW 4/5 or CTRL 9 and
SW 6/7 or CTRL 10. These are assigned in this menu
as “CTRL 9” and “CTR 10” respectively.
• Three rotary proportional controls: CTRL 6, 7 and
8. These are included in the menu as “Control 6”,
“Control 7” and “Control 8”.
• Three two-position switches: SW 2, 3 and 8. These
are indicated in the menu by “2”, “3” and “8” plus a
switch symbol, which indicates the direction of operation of the switch.
• Two momentary switches: SW 1 and SW 9. These
are indicated by “1” and “9” plus a switch symbol and
direction indicator, as mentioned above.
The two dual-axis stick units directly affect servos
connected to receiver outputs 1 … 4 and 6 (assuming
that you have set up a newly initialised model memory
with the model type “Helicopter”). In contrast, the “supplementary” transmitter controls listed above are inactive
when the transmitter is in its default state (as delivered).
The exception is the rotary proportional knob CTRL 7
(throttle limiter), which acts upon servo 6 by default.
As already mentioned on page 20, this means that
the transmitter in its basic form only controls servos
connected to receiver outputs 1 … 4 using the primary
96
sticks, plus servo 6 - depending on the position of the
throttle limiter - even when you have initialised a new
model memory with the model type “Helicopter” and
“bound” it to the receiver you intend to install. Any servos connected to receiver sockets 5, 7 and 8 simply stay
at their centre point when you operate the associated
transmitter controls.
This may seem rather inconvenient at first sight, but
it is the only way to ensure that you can select any of
the “supplementary” transmitter controls for any task
you like, and that you are not required deliberately to
“program away” the transmitter controls which are not
required for a particular model.
Any superfluous transmitter control will
have an effect on your model if you
operate it by mistake, unless it is inactive,
i. e. unless no function is assigned to it.
That is why you can select these “supplementary” transmitter controls with complete freedom in the “Transmitter
control settings” menu, and assign them to any function
input (see page 58) you like, as this method ensures
that the transmitter meets your own requirements
exactly. This also means that each of these transmitter
controls can be assigned to several functions simultaneously. For example, the same toggle switch SW X
which you assign to an input in this menu, can also be
assigned as the On / OFF switch controlling the “Timers”
in the “Base settings” menu.
Notes:
•
For model helicopters input 6 must always be left “free”. Please see the section
entitled “Throttle” on the next double-page.
• In contrast to servo travel adjustments, changing the
Program description: transmitter control settings – model helicopter
transmitter travel setting affects all mixer and coupling inputs derived from it, i. e. in the final analysis all
the servos which can be operated using the associated transmitter control.
The basic procedure
1. Select the appropriate input I5, throttle, gyro, I8 or
Lim using the arrow buttons  of the left or righthand touch-key.
2. If necessary, use the arrow buttons  of the left or
right-hand touch-key to switch to the desired column.
3. Touch the central SET button of the right-hand touchkey, and the corresponding input field is highlighted.
4. Operate the transmitter control you wish to use, and
set the desired value using the arrow buttons of the
right-hand touch-key.
5. Touch the central SET button of the right-hand touchkey to conclude the input process.
6. Simultaneously pressing the  or  buttons
of the right-hand touch-key (CLEAR) resets any settings you have entered to the appropriate default value.
Column 2 “Assigning transmitter controls and
switches”
Select one of the function inputs I5, throttle, gyro, I8
or lim using the  buttons of the left or right-hand
touch-key.
Touch the central SET button of the right-hand touch-key
to activate the assignment facility.
I5 free
+100% +100%
operate desired
switch or control
I8 free
+100% +100%
lim ctrl 6 +100% +100%
tr v +
Now move the appropriate transmitter control (CTRL
6 to 10), or operate the selected switch (SW 1 to 3, 8
or 9). Note that the rotary proportional controls are not
detected until they have moved a few “ratchet clicks”, i. e.
they need to be operated for slightly longer. If the travel
is not sufficient for the transmitter to detect it, move the
control in the opposite direction.
If you assign one of the two-position switches, then this
control channel works like an On / Off switch. It is then
possible to switch to and fro between two end-point
values using this simple switch, e. g. motor ON / OFF.
The three-position switches SW 4/5 and 6/7, which you
will find in the “Transmitter control settings” menu as
“CTRL 9” and “CTR 10”, provide a centre position in
addition to the two end-points.
Simultaneously pressing the  or  buttons of the
right-hand touch-key (CLEAR) with the switch assignment activated - see illustration above - resets the input
to “free”.
Tips:
•
When assigning the switches please take
care to set them to the appropriate direction of travel, and ensure that all inputs
not required are left at or set to “free”, to eliminate
the possibility of errors if unused transmitter controls
are operated accidentally.
• You can alter the effective end-points of an assigned
switch by adjusting servo travel as described in the
next section.
The screen now displays either the transmitter control
number or the switch number, followed by a switch symbol which indicates the direction of operation, e. g.:
I5
thr
gyr
I8
lim
3
+100% +100%
+100% +100%
free
ctrl 7 +100% +100%
free
+100% +100%
ctrl 6 +100% +100%
tr v +
Column 3 “-Travel+”
In this column the transmitter control can be adjusted
symmetrically or asymmetrically, i. e. different to either
side. The available range is +/-125% of the normal servo
travel.
Use the arrow buttons  of the left or right-hand
touch-key to select one of the inputs I5, throttle, gyro, I8
or lim.
If you wish to set up symmetrical travel, i. e. the same in
both directions, move the associated transmitter control
(rotary proportional control or switches 4/5 and 6/7) to a
position at which the marking frame encloses both sides
of the travel setting:
I5
thr
gyr
I8
lim
3
+100% +100%
+100% +100%
free
ctrl 7 +100% +100%
+100% +100%
free
ctrl 6 +100% +100%
tr v +
If you wish to set up asymmetrical travel, i. e. different for
both directions, move the associated transmitter control
(rotary proportional control or switch) to a position at
which the marking frame encloses the side of the travel
setting you wish to change:
I5
thr
gyr
I8
lim
3
+100% +100%
free
+100% +100%
ctrl 7 +100% +100%
free
+100% +100%
ctrl 6 +100% +100%
tr v +
Touch the central SET button of the right-hand touch-key
to activate the value setting; the value field is now shown
highlighted. Use the arrow buttons of the right-hand
touch-key to alter the values:
I5
thr
gyr
I8
lim
+100% +100%
3
+100% +100%
free
ctrl 7 +111% +111%
free
+100% +100%
ctrl 6 +100% +100%
tr v +
I5
thr
gyr
I8
lim
+100% +100%
3
+100% +100%
free
+88% +111%
ctrl 7
+100% +100%
free
ctrl 6 +100% +100%
tr v +
Touch the central SET button of the right-hand touch-key
to conclude the input process.
Negative and positive parameter values are possible;
this enables you to set the appropriate direction of
movement of the transmitter control or its direction of
Program description: transmitter control settings – model helicopter
97
effect to suit your model.
Simultaneously pressing the arrow buttons  or 
of the right-hand touch-key (CLEAR) resets the altered
parameter in the highlighted input field to +100%.
“Throttle”
„Gyr“
I5
thr
gyr
I8
lim
3
+100% +100%
free
+100% +100%
ctrl 7 +100% +100%
free
+100% +100%
ctrl 6 +100% +100%
tr v +
In principle all transmitter controls (rotary proportional
knob) and switches present on the transmitter can be
assigned to the individual inputs within the Helicopter
program.
However, please note that some inputs available in this
menu are already pre-defined for helicopter-specific
functions, and for this reason cannot be used without
restriction.
For example, the receiver sequence printed on page
65 shows that the throttle servo (or the speed controller of an electric-powered model helicopter) must be
connected to receiver output “6”, i. e. control channel “6”
is reserved for motor speed control.
However, in contrast to a fixed-wing aircraft, the throttle
servo or speed controller is not directly controlled by
the throttle stick or any other transmitter control, but
via a complex mixer system - see “Helicopter mixers”
menu, starting on page 114. The “throttle limit function”
(described on the next page) also has an influence on
this mixer system.
Assigning a transmitter control or switch in the “Throttle”
98
line, or its supplementary control signal, would only
unnecessarily “confuse” this complex mixer system.
For this reason the “Throttle” input MUST
always be left “free” when you are programming a model helicopter.
I5
thr
gyr
I8
lim
3
+100% +100%
+100% +100%
free
ctrl 7 +100% +100%
free
+100% +100%
ctrl 6 +100% +100%
tr v +
If the gyro you are using features infinitely variable gain
control, then you can pre-set the static gyro effect by
setting an “offset” within the range +/-125%, separately
for each flight phase, in the “Gyro” line of the “Helicopter
mixers” menu - see the section starting on page 118.
Once you have entered these pre-defined - static - gain
settings (set separately for each flight phase in the
“Helicopter mixers” menu), you can use a transmitter
control such as one of the rotary proportional controls
CTRL 7 or 8 to vary gyro gain around the set “offset
point”; all you have to do is assign that transmitter control in the “Gyro” line of this menu: in the centre position
of the transmitter control this corresponds to the setting
selected in the “Helicopter mixers” menu (see section
starting on page 118). If the transmitter control is
moved from this centre point in the direction of full travel,
gyro gain is increased; towards the opposite end-point
it is reduced. This is a fast, simple method of fine-tuning
gyro gain when the model is in flight - perhaps to suit
varying weather conditions - or alternatively to find the
optimum setting. In software terms you can also limit the
Program description: transmitter control settings – model helicopter
gain range to both sides by restricting the transmitter
control travel.
However, please be sure to read the
set-up notes provided with your gyro
before carrying out these adjustments, as
you could render your helicopter uncontrollable if
you make a mistake.
Throttle limit function
“Lim” input
By default the “lim” input is assigned to the rotary proportional control CTRL 6, which is located at top left on
the transmitter:
I5
thr
gyr
I8
lim
3
+100% +100%
free
+100% +100%
ctrl 7 +100% +100%
free
+100% +100%
ctrl 6 +100% +100%
tr v +
This pre-defined assignment eliminates the need to
program two flight phases - “with idle-up” and “without
idle-up” - as are often used by other radio control systems for this purpose, since the method of raising the
system rotational speed below the hover point is more
flexible with the mx-16 HoTT program, and can be
fine-tuned more accurately than using the conventional
“idle-up” function. However, if you prefer to program your
helicopter “with idle-up”, then switch off the “throttle limit”
function, described below, by setting the “Lim” input to
“free”.
Meaning and application of “throttle limit”
As mentioned previously under “Throttle”, the power
output of the engine or motor of a model helicopter is
not controlled directly using the throttle (Ch 1) stick - in
contrast to fixed-wing model aircraft. Instead it is controlled indirectly by the throttle curve settings which you
set up in the “Helicopter mixers” menu. Alternatively
the throttle is controlled by the speed controller if the
unit you are using is a governor or regulator.
Note:
Naturally it is possible to set up different
throttle curves to suit different stages of flight
using flight phase programming.
By their very nature, both methods of controlling power
have the same result, i. e. that a helicopter’s motor never
gets anywhere near its idle speed during “normal” flying,
so it is impossible to start or stop the motor easily unless
some other means is used.
The “Throttle limiter” function solves this problem in
an elegant manner: a separate transmitter control - as
standard this is the rotary proportional control CTRL 6
located at top left on the transmitter - is employed to limit
the setting of the throttle servo or the speed controller,
which means that you can throttle right back to the idle
position. At this setting the trim of the throttle / collective
pitch stick assumes control, and can be used to switch
off an electric motor directly. At the other extreme, the
throttle servo or speed controller can, of course, only
reach its full-throttle position if you release full servo
travel using the throttle limit control. That is why the
“lim” input is reserved in the Helicopter program for the
“Throttle limiter” function.
For this reason the right-hand positive value in the
“Travel” column must be large enough to ensure that it
does not limit the full-throttle setting available via the
throttle curve settings when the throttle limit control is at
its maximum position. Usually this means a value in the
range +100% to +125%. The left-hand negative value in
the “Travel” column should be set in such a way that the
throttle limit control reliably cuts the electric motor, or
closes the throttle to the point where you can cut the I.C.
motor using the (digital) Ch 1 trim. For this reason you
should leave this value at +100%, at least for the time
being.
This variable “limiting” of throttle travel provides a
convenient means of starting and stopping the motor.
However, it also gives an additional level of safety if, for
example, you have to carry your helicopter to the flight
line with the motor running: you simply move the control
to its minimum position, and this prevents any accidental
movement of the Ch 1 stick affecting the throttle servo.
If the carburettor is too far open (or the speed controller
not at “stop”) when you switch the transmitter on, you
will hear an audible warning, and the screen displays
the message:
throttle
too
high !
Tip:
You can call up the “Servo display” menu to
check the influence of the throttle limit slider.
This menu can be accessed from virtually
any menu points by simultaneously pressing the 
buttons of the left-hand touch-key. Bear in mind that
servo output 6 controls the throttle servo on the mx-16
HoTT.
Basic idle setting
Start by turning the throttle limiter - by default the rotary
proportional knob CTRL 6 located at top left on the
transmitter - clockwise to its end-point. Move the throttle
/ collective pitch stick to the maximum position, and
ensure that a standard throttle curve is active in the
“Channel 1  throttle” sub-menu of the …
“Heli mixer”
(page 114 … 125)
… menu. If you have already altered the standard
Program description: transmitter control settings – model helicopter
99
throttle curve which is present when you first initialise a
model memory, then this should be reset to the values
“Point 1 = 0%”, “Point 3 = +50%” and “Point 5 = +100%”
- at least temporarily.
ch1
input
output
point 3
thr
+50%
+50%
+50%
Note:
Since the throttle trim lever has no effect
when the throttle limiter is open, its position
is not relevant at this point.
Now - without starting the glow motor - adjust the
mechanical linkage of the throttle servo so that the
carburettor barrel is fully open; if necessary, carry out
fine-tuning using the travel setting for servo 6 in the
“Servo settings” menu.
Close the throttle limiter completely by turning the rotary
proportional knob CTRL 6 anti-clockwise to its endpoint. Use the trim lever of the throttle / collective pitch
stick to move the trim position marker to the motor OFF
position (see illustration in the right-hand column of the
next page).
Note:
In contrast, when the throttle limiter is
closed, the position of the throttle / collective
pitch stick is not relevant; it can therefore be
left in the maximum collective pitch position, i. e. the
throttle linkage can be adjusted between full-throttle
(throttle limiter open) and “motor OFF” (throttle limiter
closed) using just the throttle limiter.
Now, with the throttle limiter closed, adjust the mechanical throttle linkage so that the carburettor is just fully
closed. However, do check carefully that the throttle
servo is not stalled at either of its extreme end-points
(full-throttle / motor OFF).
To complete this basic set-up you still have to adjust the
idle trim range to coincide with point “1” of the throttle
curve. This is accomplished by setting point “1” of the
“Ch 1  throttle” mixer in the “Heli mixer” menu to a
value of about +15 to +18%:
ch1
input
output
point 1
0%
+16%
+16%
Throttle limit in conjunction with the digital trim
When used with the throttle limit control CTRL 6, the
Ch 1 trim places a marker at the set idle position of the
motor; at this point the motor can be stopped using the
Last idle position
Current trim position
thr
To check that the setting is exact, i. e. that there is a
seamless transition from idle trim to the throttle curve,
you need to close the throttle limiter and move the
collective pitch stick to and fro slightly at the minimum
end-point. When you do this, the throttle servo must not
move! In any case fine-tuning must be carried out with
the model flying.
The motor is always started with the throttle limiter
completely closed; this has the effect that the idle speed
is adjusted solely using the trim lever of the throttle /
collective pitch stick.
100 Program description: transmitter control settings – model helicopter
trim. If the trim is in its end-range (see screen-shot: top
picture in the right-hand column), then a single click
immediately takes you back to the marker, i. e. to the
pre-set idle position (see also page 60).
The cut-off trim only acts as idle trim in the left-hand half
of the travel of the throttle limit control, i. e. the marker is
only set and stored within this range.
stop
flt
Throttle limit control
M
CTRL 6
Trim at motor OFF position
For this reason the Ch 1 trim display is also completely
suppressed as soon as the throttle limit control is moved
to the right of the centre position.
stop
flt
M
Throttle limit control
CTRL 6
Note:
Since this trim function is only effective in the
“Motor off” direction, the illustration above
changes if you alter the transmitter control
direction for the collective pitch minimum position of the
Ch 1 stick from “back” (reflected in the picture above) to
“forward” in the “Collective pitch min.” line of the “Base
settings” menu. In the same way the effects shown in
the illustration swap sides if you change the stick mode
from collective pitch right (reflected in the pictures
above) to collective pitch left in the “Stick mode” line of
the “Base settings” menu; see page 82.
Program description: transmitter control settings – model helicopter 101
D/R Expo
Switchable control characteristics for aileron, elevator and rudder
Use the arrow buttons of the left or right-hand touchkey to leaf through to the “D/R Expo” menu point of the
multi-function menu:
mod. mem.
ser vo set.
D/R expo
wing mixer
ser vo disp
fail-safe
base sett.
contr set.
phase trim
free mixer
basic sett
telemetr y
A brief press on the central SET button of the right-hand
touch-key opens this menu point:
aile 100%
elev 100%
rudd 100%
0%
0%
0%
DUAL
EXPO
–––
–––
–––
The Dual Rate / Expo function provides a means of
switching to reduced control travels, and of influencing
the travel characteristics, for aileron, elevator and rudder
(control functions 2 ... 4).
Dual Rate works in a similar way to transmitter control
travel adjustment in the “Transmitter control settings”
menu, i. e. it affects the corresponding stick function, regardless of whether that function controls a single servo
or multiple servos via any number of complex mixer and
coupling functions.
For each switch position the servo travels can be set to
any value within the range 0 to 125% of full travel.
Expo works in a different way. If you set a value greater
than 0%, exponential provides fine control of the model
around the centre position of the primary control func102 Dual Rate / Expo - fixed-wing model
tions (aileron, elevator and rudder), without forfeiting
full travel at the end-points of stick movement. If you set
a value lower than 0%, travel is increased around the
neutral position, and diminishes towards the extremes of
travel. The degree of “progression” can therefore be set
to any value within the range -100% to +100%, where
0% equates to normal, linear control characteristics.
Another application for exponential is to improve the
linearity of rotary-output servos, which are the standard
nowadays. With a rotary servo the movement of the
control surface is inevitably non-linear, as the linear
movement of the output disc or lever diminishes progressively as the angular movement increases, i. e. the
rate of travel of the control surface declines steadily
towards the extremes, dependent upon the position of
the linkage point on the output disc or lever. You can
compensate for this effect by setting an Expo value
greater than 0%, with the result that the angular travel of
the output device increases disproportionately as stick
travel increases.
Like Dual Rates, the Expo setting applies directly to the
corresponding stick function, regardless of whether that
function controls a single servo or multiple servos via
any number of complex mixer and coupling functions.
The Dual Rate and Expo functions can be switched on
and off together if you assign a switch to the function.
The result of this is that Dual Rates and Expo can be
controlled simultaneously using a single switch, and
this can be advantageous - especially with high-speed
models.
Flight phase dependent Dual-Rate and Expo settings
If you have assigned a switch and - if you wish - a more
appropriate name to one of the phases 2 to 4 in the
“Base settings” menu (see page 78), then this appears at bottom left, e. g. “normal”. If necessary, operate
the associated switch in order to switch between the
flight phases.
The basic set-up procedure
1. Switch to the desired flight phase, and then select
the desired line “aile”, “elev” or “rudd” using the arrow
buttons  of the left or right-hand touch-key.
2. If necessary, use the  buttons of the left or righthand touch key to select the desired column.
3. Briefly press the central SET button of the right-hand
touch-key: the corresponding input field is now highlighted (black background).
4. Set the desired value using the arrow buttons of the
right-hand touch-key.
5. Touch the central SET button of the right-hand touchkey to conclude the input process.
6. Simultaneously press the  or  buttons of the
right-hand touch-key (CLEAR) to reset any changed
settings to the default values.
Dual Rate function
If you wish to switch between two possible D/R settings,
use the  button of the left or right-hand touch-key to
move to the right-hand column, marked at the bottom
, then
edge of the screen with the switch symbol
briefly touch the central SET button …
–––
0%
aile 100%
push desired switch
into position ON
normal
DUAL
EXPO
attention:
For safety reasons the Dual Rate value
should always be at least 20% of total
control travel.
aile 100%
elev 100%
rudd 100%
normal
DUAL
Examples of different Dual Rate values:
Simultaneously touching the  or  buttons of the
right-hand touch-key (CLEAR) resets an altered value in
the highlighted input field to 0%.
Servo travel
Servo travel
Servo travel
EXPO
Dual Rate = 20%
Dual Rate = 50%
Dual Rate = 100%
2
2
–––
+11%
+22%
0%
Examples of different Expo values:
Stick deflection
Stick deflection
Expo = –100%, DR = 50%
Expo = +100%, DR = 50%
Expo = +100%, DR = 125%
Servo travel
Stick deflection
Stick deflection
e. g. “switch back”:
88%
aile
77%
elev
rudd 100%
0%
0%
0%
normal
DUAL
EXPO
2
2
–––
and after moving switch “2” to the “forward” position:
aile 122%
elev 111%
rudd 100%
+11%
+22%
0%
normal
DUAL
EXPO
2
2
–––
Servo travel
Exponential function
If you wish to switch between two settings, use the 
button of the left or right-hand touch-key to move to the
right-hand column, marked at the bottom edge of the
screen with the switch symbol
, then briefly touch
the central SET button and assign a switch to the function, as described in the section “Assigning switches and
control switches” on page 59. The assigned switch
Expo = –100%
Expo = +50%
Expo = +100%
Stick deflection
Servo travel
Stick deflection
Servo travel
Stick deflection
Combined Dual Rate and Expo
If you enter values for both Dual Rates and Expo, the
two functions are superimposed as follows:
Servo travel
appears on the screen together with a switch symbol
which indicates the direction of operation when you
move the switch.
For example, the system enables you to fly with a linear
curve characteristic in the one switch position, and to
pre-set a value other than 0% in the other switch position.
Select the right-hand column, marked with EXPO at
the bottom edge of the screen, in order to change the
Dual-Rate value for each of the two switch positions in
the highlighted field, using the arrow buttons of the righthand touch-key.
Servo travel
… and assign a physical switch as described in the section “Assigning switches and control switches” on page
59. The assigned switch appears on the screen together with a switch symbol which indicates the direction
of operation of the switch. Select the left-hand column,
marked DUAL at the bottom edge of the screen, and set
the values for each of the two switch positions separately in the highlighted field using the arrow buttons of the
right-hand touch-key.
Simultaneously touching the  or  buttons of the
right-hand touch-key (CLEAR) resets an altered value in
the highlighted field to 100%.
Stick deflection
Stick deflection
In these examples the Dual Rate value is 100% in each
case.
Dual Rate / Expo - fixed-wing model 103
D/R Expo
Switchable control characteristics for roll, pitch-axis and tail rotor
roll
nick
tail
100%
100%
100%
0%
0%
0%
DUAL
EXPO
–––
–––
–––
The Dual Rate / Expo function provides a means of
switching to reduced control travels, and influencing the
travel characteristics, for the roll, pitch-axis and tail rotor
servos (control functions 2 … 4).
A separate curve for control function 1 (motor / collective
pitch) can be set individually for throttle, collective pitch
and tail rotor in the “Helicopter mixers” menu. These
curves feature up to five separately programmable
points; see the sections starting on page 114 and
189.
Dual Rate works in a similar way to transmitter control
travel adjustment in the “Transmitter control settings”
menu, i. e. it affects the corresponding stick function, regardless of whether that function controls a single servo
or multiple servos via any number of complex mixer and
coupling functions.
For each switch position the servo travels can be set to
any value within the range 0 to 125% of full travel.
Expo works in a different way. If you set a value greater
than 0%, exponential provides fine control of the model
around the centre position of the primary control functions (roll, pitch-axis and tail rotor), without forfeiting full
travel at the end-points of stick movement. If you set
a value lower than 0%, travel is increased around the
neutral position, and diminishes towards the extremes of
travel. The degree of “progression” can be set within the
range -100% to +100%, where 0% equates to normal,
linear control characteristics.
Another application for exponential is to improve the
linearity of rotary-output servos, which are the standard
nowadays. With a rotary servo the movement of the
control surface is inevitably non-linear, as the linear
movement of the output disc or lever diminishes progressively as the angular movement increases, i. e. the
rate of travel of the control surface declines steadily
towards the extremes, dependent upon the position of
the linkage point on the output disc or lever. You can
compensate for this effect by setting an Expo value
greater than 0%, with the result that the angular travel of
the output device increases disproportionately as stick
travel increases.
Like Dual Rates, the Expo setting applies directly to the
corresponding stick function, regardless of whether that
function controls a single servo or multiple servos via
any number of complex mixer and coupling functions.
The Dual Rate and Expo functions can also be switched
on and off together if you assign a switch to the function.
The result of this is that Dual Rates and Expo can be
controlled simultaneously using a single switch, and
this can be advantageous - especially with high-speed
models.
Flight phase dependent Dual-Rate and Expo settings
If you have assigned a switch and - if you wish - a more
appropriate name to one of the phases 2, 3 or Auto-rotation in the “Base settings” menu (see page 87), then
this appears at bottom left, e. g. “normal”. If necessary,
operate the associated switch in order to switch between
the flight phases.
104 Program description: Dual Rate / Expo – model helicopter
The basic set-up procedure
1. Switch to the desired flight phase, and then select
the desired line “Roll”, “Nick” or “Tail” using the arrow
buttons  of the left or right-hand touch-key.
2. If necessary, use the  buttons of the left or righthand touch key to select the desired column.
3. Briefly press the central SET button of the right-hand
touch-key: the corresponding input field is now highlighted (black background).
4. Set the desired value using the arrow buttons of the
right-hand touch-key.
5. Touch the central SET button of the right-hand touchkey to conclude the input process.
6. Simultaneously press the  or  buttons of the
right-hand touch key (CLEAR) to reset any changed
settings to the default values.
Dual Rate function
If you wish to switch between two possible D/R settings,
use the  button of the left or right-hand touch-key to
move to the right-hand column, marked at the bottom
, briefly
edge of the screen with the switch symbol
touch the central SET button …
0% –––
roll
100%
push desired switch
into position ON
DUAL
EXPO
… and assign a physical switch as described in the
section “Assigning switches and control switches” on
page 59. The assigned switch appears on the screen
together with a switch symbol which indicates the direc-
attention:
For safety reasons the Dual Rate value
should always be at least 20% of total
control travel.
Examples of different Dual Rate values:
Servo travel
+11%
+22%
0%
normal
DUAL
EXPO
roll
nick
tail
Examples of different Expo values:
Expo = –100%
Expo = +50%
Exponential function
If you wish to switch between two settings, use the 
button of the left or right-hand touch-key to move to the
right-hand column, marked at the bottom edge of the
screen with the switch symbol
, then briefly touch
the central SET button and assign a switch to the function, as described in the section “Assigning switches and
control switches” on page 59. The assigned switch
appears on the screen together with a switch symbol
which indicates the direction of operation when you
move the switch.
Servo travel
Stick deflection
Servo travel
Stick deflection
Stick deflection
Stick deflection
Servo travel
Stick deflection
Stick deflection
e. g. “switch back”:
Simultaneously touching the  or  buttons of the
right-hand touch-key (CLEAR) resets an altered value in
the highlighted input field to 0%.
Expo = +100%
Stick deflection
Expo = –100%, DR = 50%
Expo = +100%, DR = 50%
Expo = +100%, DR = 125%
Stick deflection
2
2
–––
Servo travel
Servo travel
Servo travel
Dual Rate = 20%
Dual Rate = 50%
Dual Rate = 100%
100%
100%
100%
roll
nick
tail
Combined Dual Rate and Expo
If you enter values for both Dual Rates and Expo, the
two functions are superimposed as follows:
Servo travel
For example, the system enables you to fly with a linear
curve characteristic in the one switch position, and to
pre-set a value other than 0% in the other switch position.
Select the right-hand column, marked with EXPO at
the bottom edge of the screen, in order to change the
Dual-Rate value for each of the two switch positions in
the highlighted field, using the arrow buttons of the righthand touch-key.
Servo travel
tion of operation of the switch.
Select the left-hand column, marked DUAL at the bottom
edge of the screen, and set the values for each of the
two switch positions separately in the highlighted field
using the arrow buttons  or  of the right-hand
touch-key.
Simultaneously press the  or  buttons of the
right-hand touch key (CLEAR) resets an altered value in
the highlighted field to 100%.
88%
77%
100%
0%
0%
0%
normal
DUAL
EXPO
2
2
–––
and after moving switch “2” to the “forward” position:
122%
111%
100%
+11%
+22%
0%
normal
DUAL
EXPO
roll
nick
tail
2
2
–––
Stick deflection
In these examples the Dual Rate value is 100% in each
case.
Program description: Dual Rate / Expo – model helicopter 105
Phase trim
Flight phase-specific trims for flaps, ailerons and elevator
If you have not assigned a switch to phases 2, 3 and 4
in the “Base settings” menu, i. e. you have not assigned
switches to these alternative phases, you automatically
remain in flight phase 1 - “normal”.
The number and name (“normal”) of this flight phase are
permanently assigned, and cannot be altered. For this
reason the “normal” phase is not stated as Phase 1 “normal” in the “Base settings” menu; it is simply concealed.
aile/flap
timer
phase 2
phase 3
phase 4
10:01
takeoff
speed
landing
2aile
2
–––
–––
–––
If you select the “Phase trim” menu with this basic
arrangement, you will find just the “normal” line on the
screen, whose pre-set values of 0% are not usually
altered.
P H A S E T R I M
normal
0%
0%
0%
FLA
AIL
ELE
Note:
In this menu you will have at least one
control function (ELE), and a maximum of
three functions (ELE, AIL and FLA), available
for phase-specific trim settings, depending on the
settings you have entered in the “Aileron / flap” line of
the “Base settings” menu (see page 77).
If you wish to enter values other than “0”, e. g. to have
more lift at launch, or to be able to fly more slowly
when thermalling, or faster when flying speed tasks, but
WITHOUT having to change the basic settings each
time, then you need to use alternative flight phases.
This is done by activating “Phase 2” and, if necessary,
“Phase 3” in the “Base settings” menu. You might then
use “Phase 4” for the “thermal” settings.
This is accomplished by moving to the “Base settings”
menu and assigning a switch to the selected phase or
phases. If you decide to use one of the three-position
switches SW 4/5 or 6/7 as the phase switch, then it is
advisable to assign it to the “Speed” phase and “Landing” phase at the extremes, with “normal” at the centre
position. In our example phase 2 contains the “Launch”
settings, and since this has top priority, you can shift to
this phase from any other phase using a two-position
switch.
Notes:
•
At the centre position of SW 4/5 or 6/7
the switch symbols on the screen should
look as in the picture at top right.
• Please note the priorities of the individual flight phases, as described in detail on page 78.
The default name for “Phase 2” is “take off”, that for
“Phase 3” is “speed”, and that for “Phase 4” is “landing”.
However, you can assign your own choice of names
at any time by selecting the appropriate line, pressing
the central SET button of the right-hand touch-key, and
selecting one of the following names in the highlighted
field using the arrow buttons of the right-hand touch-key.
• take off
• thermal
106 Program description: Phase trim – fixed-wing model
•
•
•
•
•
•
dist(ance)
speed
acro
landing
air-tow
test
timer
phase
phase
phase
receiv
2
3
4
out
10:01
takeoff
speed
thermal
2
2
7
6
These names will appear in the transmitter’s basic
display …
GRAUBELE
#01
5.2V
2:22h
0:00
stop
flt
0:00
«normal »
HoTT
M
5.5V
… and in the “Phase trim” menu - see lower picture.
Setting up flight phase trims
In the “Phase trim” menu you can adjust the trims for the
previously selected flight phases.
The first step is to use the phase switch you have
already assigned to move to the phase which you wish
to adjust (the “*” at far left indicates the currently active
phase).
P H A S E T R I M
normal
0%
0%
0%
takeoff
0%
0%
0%
speed
0%
0%
0%
thermal
0%
0%
0%
FLA
AIL ELE
Note:
In this menu you will have at least one
control function (ELE), and a maximum of
three functions (ELE, AIL and FLA), available
for phase-specific trim settings, depending on the
settings you have entered in the “Aileron / flap” line of
the “Base settings” menu (see page 77).
Select the desired control surface function using the
arrow buttons  of the left or right-hand touch-key,
then briefly press the central SET button of the righthand touch-key. The trim values in the highlighted value
field can now be adjusted using the arrow-buttons of the
right-hand touch-key.
You can activate each phase by operating the assigned
phase select switch or switches. Note that the servos
do not change from one setting to another abruptly;
they move smoothly with a transition time of around one
second.
With this option, which works in a similar way to transmitter control sub-trim or offset settings with other radio
control systems, it is possible to set values within the
range -99% to +99%. However, typical values are normally in single figures or low double figures.
P H A S E T R I M
normal
0%
0%
0%
takeoff
+8%
4% +2%
speed
–7% –5% –3%
 thermal +10% +5% +2%
FLA
AIL ELE
If you have made any changes, simultaneously pressing
the  or  buttons of the right-hand touch-key
(CLEAR) resets them to the default value of 0%.
Program description: Phase trim – fixed-wing model 107
What is a mixer?
Fixed-wing mixers
The basic function
In many models it is often desirable to use a mixer to
couple various control systems, e. g. to link the ailerons
and rudder, or to inter-connect a pair of servos where
two control surfaces are actuated by separate servos. In
all these cases the signal which flows directly from the
“output” of a transmitter stick to the associated servo
is “bled off” at a particular point - this effect can also
be “concealed” in transmitter control options such as
“D/R Expo” or “Transmitter control settings” - and
the derived signal is then processed in such a way that
it affects the “input” of another control channel, and
therefore eventually another receiver output.
For more information please refer to the general notes
on “Free mixers” in the section of this manual starting on
page 126.
Example: V-tail mixer
48V
e
C 577
48V
es N 410
Right rudder / elevator
C 577
4
Left rudder / elevator
Se v
er
dd
Ru
er
dd r
Ru vato
Ele
4
Control channels
(receiver outputs)
r
V-tail mixer
B s N 410
3
Ru
Ele dder
vat
or
3
o
vat
Ele
Control function inputs
Elevator stick
Rudder stick
The mx-16 HoTT transmitter software contains a
large number of pre-programmed coupling functions as
standard, designed to mix together two (or more) control
channels. The mixer required in this example is supplied
“ready-made” in the software, and just has to be activated in the “tail” line of the “Base settings” menu in the
form of “V-tail”.
The software also includes three freely programmable
linear mixers in the fixed-wing and helicopter programs,
all of which can be used in each model memory.
diff aile.
diff flaps
ail rudd
ail flaps
brak elev
brak flap
brak aile
elev flap
elev aile
elev
flap
aile
flap
diff–red
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
The display varies according to the information you have entered in the “Motor at Ch 1”
and “Ail / Flap” lines in the “Base settings”
menu. The selection above shows the maximum number
of options, and equates to the setting “No (motor)” and
“2AIL 2FL”.
The mx-16 HoTT transmitter’s program contains a
series of pre-programmed coupling functions, and all
you have to do is set the mixer ratios and (optionally)
assign a switch. The number of pre-programmed mixer
functions in the mixer list will vary according to the
pre-set “model type” (tail type, number of wing servos,
with or without motor - see the section starting on page
74). For example, if your model is not fitted with
camber-changing flaps, and you have not entered any
flap servos in the “Base settings” menu, the software
automatically suppresses all the flap mixers, as are the
“Brake  NN *“ mixers if you enter “Idle forward” or “Idle
back” in the “Motor at Ch 1” line. This makes the menus
clearer and easier to understand, and also avoids potential programming errors.
* NN = Nomen Nominandum (name to be stated)
108 Program description: wing mixers – fixed-wing model
–––
–––
–––
–––
–––
–––
–––
–––
–––
–––
–––
Notes:
•
There are various alternative methods of
positioning the camber-changing flaps;
these include:
a) settling on just one position per flight phase, simply by setting appropriate trim values in the “Phase trim” menu, as described on the preceding
double-page;
b) controlling the flaps manually using any transmitter control assigned to “Input 6” (in the “Transmitter control settings” menu - see page 94), after setting the basic flap positions in the “Phase
trim” menu, as described earlier. Ideally the transmitter control would be one of the rotary proportional controls CTRL 6 … 8.
The selected transmitter control directly operates
the two flap servos connected to receiver outputs
6 and 7, assuming that you have specified flaps in
the “Ail. / Flap” line of the “Base settings” menu.
The same control determines the flap setting of
the ailerons via the percentage value entered in
the “FL  AIL” mixer line.
However, for finer control of the flap positions, we
recommend that you reduce their travel to about
25% in the “E6” line of the “Transmitter control
settings” menu.
c) It is also possible to leave the default setting of
“0%” in the appropriate line of the “FL  AIL”
menu, and to assign the same transmitter control to both input 6 and input 5 in the “Transmitter
control settings” menu. The magnitude of the effect on the two pairs of wing flaps can then be adjusted using the servo travel adjustment facility.
• If a transmitter control is assigned to input “7”, it will
be de-coupled by the software if two camber-changing flaps are defined; this is intentional, as it eliminates the danger of errors when a flap command is
given.
The basic programming procedure
1. Use the  buttons of the left or right-hand touchkey to select the desired mixer.
2. Use the  button of the left or right-hand touch-key
to move to the right-hand column, marked by the
at the bottom edge of the screen.
switch symbol
3. Touch the central SET button of the right-hand touchkey; the corresponding input field is now highlighted
(black background).
4. Use the arrow buttons of the right-hand touch-key to
set the desired value, and assign the switch if necessary, as described on page 59.
With the exception of the “Diff. red.” line, negative and
positive parameter values are possible; this may be
necessary to obtain the correct direction of servo rotation (control surface deflection).
Simultaneously pressing the  or  buttons of
the right-hand touch-key (CLEAR) resets an altered
value to the default value.
5. Touch the central SET button of the right-hand touchkey to conclude the input process.
Mixer neutral point
(offset)
The neutral point of the mixers …
Aileron  NN *
Elevator  NN *
Elevator  NN *
… is by default the zero point of the transmitter control,
i. e. that is the point at which they have no effect. At the
end-point of the transmitter control the full mixer value is
applied.
The default neutral point (“offset”) of the mixers …
Airbrake  NN *
… at which the airbrakes are always retracted, is the
forward position of the Ch 1 stick (throttle / airbrakes) if
you select “none” in the “Motor at Ch 1” line of the “Base
settings” menu, and is the back position of the Ch 1
stick if you select “none/inv”.
diff aile (differential aileron travel)
Aileron differential compensates for an unwanted
side-effect which occurs when ailerons are deflected:
the problem known as “adverse yaw”. When ailerons are
deflected, the drag generated by the down-going aileron
is greater than that produced by the up-going aileron.
The differential drag causes a yawing motion around the
vertical axis in the opposite direction to the desired turn.
This effect is much more pronounced in model gliders
with high aspect ratio wings than in power models with
their much shorter moment arms, and usually has to be
countered by giving a simultaneous rudder deflection in
the opposite direction to the yaw. However, this in turns
causes additional drag and reduces the aircraft’s efficiency even further.
Aileron differential reduces the angular travel of the
down-going aileron relative to the up-going aileron, and
this reduces the drag and therefore the adverse yaw.
However, electronic differential can only be applied if
each aileron is actuated by its own servo, usually mounted in the wings themselves. The shorter pushrods also
result in virtually slop-free aileron linkages with reliable
centring.
* NN = Nomen Nominandum (name to be stated)
Program description: wing mixers – fixed-wing model 109
Mechanical solutions are also possible, but they usually
have to be “designed in” when the model is built, and the
degree of differential cannot be altered subsequently.
In any case significant mechanical differential tends to
cause additional slop in the control system. Electronic
differential offers several important advantages:
0% (normal)
50% (differential)
100% (split)
It is easily possible to vary the degree of differential
without affecting the travel of the up-going aileron. At
one extreme it is possible to suppress the down-aileron
deflection completely, i. e. only the up-going aileron
moves at all, and this arrangement is sometimes called
the “split” setting. Split ailerons not only tend to suppress
adverse yaw, but can even generate positive yaw, which
means that the model yaws in the direction of the turn
when an aileron command is given. In the case of large
model gliders, smooth turns can then be flown using
ailerons alone, which with most models of this type is
usually by no means the case.
The adjustment range of -100% to +100% makes it possible to set the correct direction of differential regardless
of the direction of rotation of the aileron servos. “0%”
corresponds to a normal linkage, i. e. no differential,
while “-100%” or “+100%” represents the “split” function.
For aerobatic flying it is necessary to set low absolute
differential values, to ensure that the model rotates
exactly along its longitudinal axis when an aileron
command is given. Moderate values around -50% or
+50% are typical for making thermal turns easier to fly.
The split setting (-100%, +100%) is popular with slope
flyers, when ailerons alone are often used for turning the
model.
Simultaneously pressing the  or  buttons of the
right-hand touch-key (CLEAR) resets an altered value
to 0%.
Note:
Negative values are not usually necessary if the correct
channels are used.
Note:
In this case the rudder automatically “follows” when an
aileron command is given, and the mixer ratio (degree of
following) can be set by the user. Coupled aileron / rudder (also known as “combi-switch”) is especially useful
for suppressing adverse yaw in conjunction with aileron
differential, and this combination usually makes smooth
turns very easy to fly. Naturally, the rudder can still be
controlled separately by means of its dedicated stick.
The adjustment range of +/- 150% enables the user to
set up the correct direction of travel according to the
direction of rotation of the flap servos. If an (optional)
non-centring switch (SW 2 … 8) is assigned to this
function, the mixer can be turned on and off in flight, so
that you can control the ailerons and rudder separately if
and when you so desire.
Simultaneously pressing the  or  buttons of the
right-hand touch-key (CLEAR) resets an altered value
to 0%.
This mixer is usually set up in such a way that the
rudder deflects automatically to the side of the up-going
aileron; a setting around 50% is likely to be approximately correct.
Although it is possible to enter negative
values in order to reverse the direction of
servo rotation, this is not usually necessary if
the correct channels are used.
diff flaps (Camber-changing flap differential)
The aileron / flap mixer (see below) is designed to
superimpose an aileron function on the flaps. Flap
differential works like aileron differential, and produces
a reduced flap movement in the down-direction when
these surfaces are used as supplementary ailerons.
The adjustment range of -100% to +100% makes it
possible to set the correct direction of differential regardless of the direction of rotation of the servo. “0%”
corresponds to a normal linkage, i. e. the servo travel is
the same up and down. A setting of “-100%” or “+100%”
means that the down-travel of the flaps is reduced to
zero when an aileron command is given (“split” setting).
Simultaneously pressing the  or  buttons of the
right-hand touch-key (CLEAR) resets an altered value
to 0%.
110 Program description: wing mixers – fixed-wing model
ail  rudd(Aileron  rudder)
ail  flaps(Aileron  flap)
This mixer feeds a variable amount of the aileron signal
into the flap channel. When an aileron command is
given, the flaps “follow” the ailerons, although usually
through a smaller angle, i. e. the mixer ratio is generally
less than 100%. The adjustment range of -150% to
+150% allows the user to set up the flap direction to
match that of the ailerons.
The flaps should not deflect more than about 50% of the
(mechanical) travel of the ailerons.
Simultaneously pressing the  or  buttons of the
right-hand touch-key (CLEAR) resets an altered value
to 0%.
brak  elev(Airbrake  elevator)
or
Extending any form of airbrakes usually generates an
unwanted change in airspeed; this is especially marked
when a butterfly (crow) braking system is deployed (see
next page).
This mixer feeds a corrective signal to the elevator to
compensate for such an effect. The adjustment range is
-150% to +150%.
Simultaneously pressing the  or  buttons of the
right-hand touch-key (CLEAR) resets an altered value
to 0%.
“Usual” values are generally in single to low double
figures. It is essential to check and adjust this setting at
a safe height, and it is also important to ensure that the
model does not slow down too much when the airbrakes
are extended. The danger is that you might need to
retract the brakes again on the landing approach when
you realise the model will “land short”; if its airspeed is
too low when you retract the brakes, the model will just
fall to the ground at that point.
brak  flap(Airbrake  flap)
of the servos concerned strikes its mechanical endstops (servos stalled). To achieve this, you may need
to limit the servo travel(s) using the “Travel -/+” option,
which is found on the “RX SERVO” display page of the
“Telemetry” menu.
brak  aile (Airbrake  aileron)
When you operate the brake function, both aileron
servos move together for the landing approach; the
mixer ratio can be set to any value in the range -150%
to +150%.
Simultaneously pressing the  or  buttons of the
right-hand touch-key (CLEAR) resets an altered value
to 0%.
Note:
It can also be useful to deflect both ailerons
up slightly when the airbrakes are extended;
in most cases this significantly reduces the
risk of a tip-stall.
When you operate the brake function (Ch 1 stick), both
flap servos move together for the landing approach; the
mixer ratio can be set to any value in the range -150% to
+150%. Down-flap is usually selected.
Combination of the “Brake  NN *” mixers:
“Crow” or “Butterfly” setting
Simultaneously pressing the  or  buttons of the
right-hand touch-key (CLEAR) resets an altered value
If you have set up all three airbrake mixers for your
to 0%.
model, it is then possible to program a special configuration known as the “crow” or “butterfly” arrangement for
At this point you select the value which causes the flaps
glide path control. In the butterfly setting both ailerons
to deflect down as far as possible when the airbrake
are deflected up by a moderate amount, and both flaps
function is deployed. However, please ensure that none
Program description: wing mixers – fixed-wing model 111
down by the maximum possible amount. The third mixer
provides elevator trim to counteract any unwanted pitch
trim change and maintain the model’s airspeed at a
safe level. This is necessary to avoid the danger of the
model slowing up excessively; if the landing approach is
started too soon, and has to be extended by retracting
the airbrakes again, the model could then stall abruptly.
This inter-action between the flaps, ailerons and elevator
is used to control the glide angle on the landing approach. Optionally the butterfly setting can also be used
without the airbrakes or spoilers; nowadays this is very
commonly used for sports and competition aircraft.
Note:
If your model features full-span (strip)
ailerons which also double as camber-changing flaps, the two mixers “Brake 
aileron” and “Brake  elevator” can be combined for
glide path control. In this case up-flap is applied, but the
flaps can still be controlled as ailerons. Elevator pitch
trim compensation is generally required.
If you have programmed aileron differential, the response of the ailerons will inevitably be adversely affected by the extreme “up” deflection of the ailerons in the
butterfly setting, because the differential travel reduces
or entirely suppresses the down-aileron deflection.
However, the “up” travel of the ailerons is also greatly
restricted because they are already at or close to their
“up” end-point. The remedy here is to apply “differential
reduction”, which is explained in its own section later.
elev  flap (Elevator  flap)
response in the same way as the previous mixer.
Simultaneously pressing the  or  buttons of the
right-hand touch-key (CLEAR) resets an altered value
to 0%.
The adjustment range is +/- 150%. For this mixer the
“usual” settings are again in the low two-digit range.
flap  elev The flaps can be used to enhance the effect of the elevator in tight turns and aerobatics, and this mixer feeds
part of the elevator signal to the flap servos. The mixer
direction must be set so that the flaps move down when
up-elevator is applied, and vice versa.
Simultaneously pressing the  or  buttons of the
right-hand touch-key (CLEAR) resets an altered value
to 0%.
The “usual” settings for this mixer are in the low two-digit
range.
elev  aile
(Elevator  aileron)
This mixer allows the ailerons to reinforce the elevator
* NN = Nomen Nominandum (name to be stated)
112 Program description: wing mixers – fixed-wing model
(Flap  elevator)
When the camber-changing flaps are lowered, either
using “Phase trim” or by means of a transmitter control
assigned to input “6”, a pitch trim change (up or down)
may occur. Alternatively it may be desirable for slight
down-elevator to be applied automatically when the
flaps are raised by a small amount, in order to increase
the model’s basic airspeed. This mixer can be used to
achieve both purposes.
When the flaps are deployed, this mixer causes the elevator setting to be corrected automatically in proportion
to the flap deflection.
The adjustment range is +/- 150%. For this mixer the
“usual” settings are in the single to low two-digit range.
Simultaneously pressing the  or  buttons of the
right-hand touch-key (CLEAR) resets an altered value
to 0%.
flap  aile (Flap  aileron)
This mixer causes a variable proportion of the flap signal
to be mixed in with the aileron channels 2 and 5 so that
the ailerons follow the movement of the flaps, albeit
normally with a smaller deflection.
The adjustment range is +/- 150%. For this mixer the
“usual” settings are around 50%.
Simultaneously pressing the  or  buttons of the
right-hand touch-key (CLEAR) resets an altered value
to 0%.
Note:
If you assign a transmitter control to inputs 5
and 6 in the “Transmitter control settings”
menu for adjusting the flap positions, then
you should leave the value for this mixer at 0%. See the
notes on page 109 in this regard.
reduced aileron response compared with the normal
setting of the control surfaces.
In this case you really should use “differential reduction”
if at all possible. This reduces the degree of aileron
differential when you invoke the butterfly setting using
the airbrake stick. Differential is reduced progressively,
or even eliminated altogether, as the airbrake stick is
moved towards its end-point.
A value of 0% at this point means that the full programmed aileron differential is retained. A value of 100%
means that the aileron differential is completely eliminated at the maximum butterfly setting, i. e. when the
airbrakes and other glide path control surfaces are fully
extended. If you set a value above 100%, the aileron
differential is eliminated even before full travel of the
airbrake stick is reached.
The adjustment range is 0 to 150%.
Simultaneously pressing the  or  buttons of the
right-hand touch-key (CLEAR) resets an altered value
to 0%.
diff red (Differential reduction)
The problem of reduced aileron response in the butterfly
configuration has been mentioned earlier: if aileron
differential is employed, the aileron response on the
landing approach may be adversely affected through the
extreme “up” deflection of the ailerons, permitting virtually no further up-movement; on the other hand the “down”
travel has already been reduced by the programmed
differential setting. The overall result is significantly
Program description: wing mixers – fixed-wing model 113
Helicopter mixers
Flight phase-specific mixers for collective pitch, throttle and tail rotor
In the “Base settings” menu a method of switching flight
phases can be activated by assigning the appropriate
switches to “Phase 2”, “Phase 3” and “Auto-rotation”.
You can then switch between the phases “normal” and a
second and third phase - to which you can assign more
appropriate names yourself, if necessary - using one of
the non-centring switches SW 2 … 8; a further switch
then selects “Auto-rotation”.
However, “Phase 2” always has precedence over the “normal”-phase and
“Phase 3” and auto-rotation always has
precedence over all other phases; see pages 87.
If you have not yet assigned switches for the flight phases, you should do so now. Use the arrow buttons of the
left-hand touch-key to move to the right-hand column,
symbol at the bottom of the
marked by the switch
screen, then touch the central SET button of the righthand touch-key. The switches are assigned as described
on page 59:
pitch min
timer
phase 2
phase 3
autorotat.
rear
10:01 C3
hover 5
speed 4
2
Phase 1 always bears the designation “normal”. Both
the number and name of this phase are permanently
assigned, and cannot be altered. For this reason the
“normal” phase is not stated as Phase 1 in the “Base
settings” menu; it is simply concealed.
By default “Phase 2” is assigned the phase name
“hover”, and “Phase 3” the name “speed”, but you can
change these at any time if you prefer: touch the central
SET button with the right-hand touch-key, and use the
arrow buttons of the right-hand touch-key to select one
of the following names:
• hover
• acro
• acro 3D
• speed
• test
Description of the helicopter mixers
Five-point curves are available for setting up the control
characteristics of “collective pitch”, “Ch 1  throttle” and
“Ch 1  tail rotor”. Using these curves it is possible to
program non-linear mixer ratios along the travel of the
transmitter stick for these mixers. Move to the display
page for setting 5-point curves by touching the central
SET button of the right-hand touch-key (see below).
In contrast, the mixers “Ch 1  throttle” and “Ch 1 
tail rotor” are not required for the “Auto-rotation” flight
phase (described in the section starting on page 124);
instead they are automatically switched to a (user-variable) pre-defined value.
A value must be entered in the “Gyro” and “Input 8” lines:
touch the central SET button of the right-hand touchkey, then enter a value in the highlighted field using the
arrow buttons of the right-hand touch key - in a similar
fashion to changing the transmitter centre position or
the offset position with other radio control systems. This
set-up facility is rounded off with the “Swashplate limit”
option: this restricts the maximum travel of the swashplate servos to the value you set, in the form of a limiter.
All these options are required for the basic process of
setting up a model helicopter.
Altered parameters can be reset to the corresponding
114 Program description: helicopter mixers – model helicopter
default values at any time by simultaneously pressing
the  or  buttons of the right-hand touch-key
(CLEAR).
The name of the currently selected flight phase is
displayed in the “Helicopter mixers” menu as well as in
the transmitter’s basic display; this is designed to ensure
that any changes you make actually apply to the appropriate flight phase. Note that the servos do not change
from one setting to another abruptly; they move smoothly with a transition time of around one second. This
does not apply to auto-rotation: when you switch INTO
auto-rotation, the change takes place immediately.
If you operate the switch selected for a particular flight
phase, the associated flight phase is superimposed at
the left-hand bottom edge of the screen, e. g. “normal”.
ptch
ch1
thro
tail
ch1
gyro
inp8
normal
0%
0%
Now you can program the settings for this flight phase.
Basic programming procedure
1. Use the arrow buttons  of the left or right-hand
touch-key to select the desired option.
2. Touch the central SET button of the right-hand touchkey, and the screen switches to the set-up page (
symbol at the bottom edge of the screen), or the
corresponding input field is highlighted (black background).
3. Define the mixer values using the arrow buttons of
the right-hand touch-key, moving the throttle / collec-
tive pitch stick at the same time if necessary.
4. Simultaneously pressing the  or  buttons of
the right-hand touch-key (CLEAR) resets an altered
value to the default value.
5. Touch the central SET button of the right-hand touchkey to conclude the input process.
ptch (Collective pitch (ch1  pitch))
Select the “Collective pitch” line using the arrow buttons
 of the left or right-hand touch key, then touch the
central SET button of the right-hand touch-key:
ptch
input
output
point 3
normal
0%
0%
0%
The control curve can be based on a maximum of
five nodes, known as “reference points”, which can be
placed along the length of the control travel; separate
curves can be programmed for each flight phase.
However, in most cases it is sufficient to use a smaller
number of reference points when defining the collective
pitch curve. As a basic rule we recommend that you
start with the three default reference points offered by
the software. These three points, i. e. the two end-points
“Point 1” (collective pitch minimum) and “Point 5” (collective pitch maximum), and “Point 3”, exactly in the centre
of the travel, initially describe a linear characteristic
for the collective pitch curve; this is represented in the
picture above.
The programming procedure in detail
The throttle / collective pitch stick can now be used to
move the vertical line in the graph between the two
end-points “Point 1” and “Point 5”; at the same time the
momentary position of the stick is displayed in numeric
form in the “Input” line (-100% to +100%).
The point where the vertical line crosses the curve is
termed the “Output”, and this point can be varied within
the range -125% and +125% at a maximum of five
reference points. The control signal, modified in this way,
affects the collective pitch servos only. In the picture on
the left the stick is exactly at the 0% position at “Point
3”, and also generates an output signal of 0% due to the
linear nature of the graph.
By default only points “1” (collective pitch minimum at
-100%), “3” (hover point at 0%) and “5” (collective pitch
maximum at +100% travel) are active.
To set a point you use the associated stick to move the
vertical line to the point you wish to change. The number
and current curve value of this point are displayed in
the bottom line in the left-hand half of the screen in the
“Point” line. The arrow buttons of the right-hand touchkey can now be used to change the current curve value
in the highlighted field to any value within the range
-125% to +125%, without affecting the adjacent points.
ptch
input
output
point 3
normal
0%
+75%
+75%
However, the optional points “2” and “4” can also be
activated. In the next example we activate point “2” at
-50% …
ptch
input
output
point 2
normal
–50%
–12%
deact
… and point “4” at +50% …
ptch
input
output
point 4
normal
+50%
+88%
deact
This is accomplished using the stick to move the vertical
line to the appropriate area. As soon as the message
“inactive” appears in the highlighted value field, you can
activate the associated point with the arrow buttons of
the right-hand touch-key; it can then be adjusted in the
same manner as the other points …
ptch
input
output
point 4
normal
+50%
–50%
–50%
… or reset to “inactive” by simultaneously pressing
the  or  buttons of the right-hand touch-key
(CLEAR).
In this example we have moved reference point “3” to
+75%.
Program description: helicopter mixers – model helicopter 115
ch1  thro
Points “1” and “5”, however, CANNOT be disabled.
Note:
ch1
The following illustration, and all the other
pictures on this page, show a control curve
which we prepared for illustration purposes
only. Please note that the curve characteristics by no
means represent real collective pitch curves!
input
output
point 3
normal
ptch
input
output
point 3
normal
0%
–50%
–50%
Typical collective pitch curves for different flight phases:
+100%
Output
Output
+100%
Output
+100%
100%
100%
100%
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
4
Control travel
Control travel
Control travel
Hover
Aerobatics
3D
5
(throttle curve)
thro
+50%
+50%
+50%
Helicopter with glow engine or electric motor and
STANDARD SPEED CONTROLLER
This setting only affects the control curve of the throttle
servo or speed controller.
The method of setting up a throttle curve for a
model helicopter fitted with a speed governor
or regulator is discussed later.
The throttle curve can be defined using up to five points,
in a similar way to the collective pitch curve (see previous
page).
• In all cases the control curve must be set up in such
a way that the throttle is fully open, or the speed
controller of an electric helicopter is at full power, at
the end-point of the throttle / collective pitch stick,
(exception: auto-rotation - see page 124).
• The hover point is normally located at the centre of
the stick travel, and the throttle setting should be
adjusted relative to the collective pitch curve in such
a way that the correct system rotational speed is
obtained at this point.
• At the minimum position of the throttle / collective
pitch stick the throttle curve should initially be set up
so that the (glow) motor runs at a distinctly higher
speed compared to the idle setting, with the clutch
reliably engaged.
116 Program description: helicopter mixers – model helicopter
In all flight phases the motor (glow or
electric) is started and stopped using the
throttle limiter (see below).
If you are used to a different radio control system which
uses two separate flight phases for this - “with idle-up”
and “without idle-up”; therefore incurring the “loss” of
one complete flight phase - please note that the throttle
limiter renders this complication superfluous, as the
increased system rotational speed below the hover point
in the mx-16 HoTT program is more flexible, and can
be fine-tuned more accurately, than the “idle-up” system
used with earlier mc radio control systems.
Ensure that the throttle limiter is closed before you start
the glow motor, i. e. the throttle can only be adjusted
within its idle range using the idle trim. Be sure to read
the safety notes on page 122 which refer to this. If the
idle is set too high when you switch the transmitter on,
you will see and hear a clear warning!
0:00
STARLET
stop
throttle
#02
0:00
too
mal »
high !
HoTT
5.2
5.5V
2:22h
M
The following three diagrams show typical 3-point throttle
curves for different flight phases, such as hover, aerobatics and 3-D flying.
Typical throttle curves for different flight phases:
+100%
Output
Output
+100%
Output
+100%
0%
0%
0%
1
2
3
4
Control travel
Hover
5
1
2
3
4
Control travel
Aerobatics
5
1
2
3
4
Control travel
3D
5
Notes on using the “Throttle limit” function:
We strongly recommend that you make
•
use of the throttle limit function (“Transmitter control settings” menu, page
99). When you use this function the throttle servo is
completely disconnected from the throttle / collective
pitch stick when the proportional throttle limit control is
at its left-hand end-point; the motor runs at idle and
only responds to the Ch 1 trim. This feature enables
you to start the motor from within any flight phase.
Once the motor is running, turn the throttle limiter
slowly to the opposite end-point, so that full control
of the throttle servo is returned to the throttle / collective pitch stick. It is important that the throttle limiter
should not restrict the throttle servo at its upper endpoint; you can avoid this by setting the control travel
to +125% in the “Lim” line of the “Transmitter control
settings” menu.
• Since electric motors by their nature require no idle
setting, the only important point when setting up an
electric-powered model helicopter is that the adjustment range of the throttle limiter should be set significantly higher and lower than the adjustment range of
the speed controller, which is usually from -100% to
+100%. It may therefore be necessary to set the “Travel” value of the throttle limiter to an appropriate point
in the “Lim” line of the “Transmitter control settings”
menu. However, the throttle curve itself has to be finetuned with the helicopter in flight, just like a glow-powered machine.
• Releasing the full throttle range, and imposing the
throttle limiter again, trips the switching threshold of
the control switch “C3” (i. e. in either direction); this
switch can be used for automatically starting and
stopping the stopwatch to record the flight time, or
some similar purpose; see page 59.
When you select auto-rotation, the mixer
automatically switches the value to a
variable pre-set value; see the section
starting on page 124.
Helicopter with speed GOVERNOR (REGULATOR)
In contrast to speed controllers, which simply adjust power output in the same way as a carburettor, speed governors maintain a constant rotational speed in the system
which they regulate; they accomplish this by adjusting the
power output as required. In the case of a glow-powered
helicopter the governor automatically controls the throttle
servo; in an electric-powered machine the governor does
the same with the speed controller. For this reason speed
governors do not require a classic throttle curve; they
just need a pre-set rotational speed. Once this is set, the
system rotational speed does not alter unless the system
calls for more power from the motor than is available.
In most cases a speed governor is connected to receiver
output 8; see the receiver socket sequence on page
65. If this socket is already in use, then the throttle
limiter function is not used, since this only affects output
6 - which is now not occupied - via the “Ch 1  throttle”
mixer.
However, if you wish to be able to exploit the convenience and safety features of the throttle limiter, the speed
governor should be connected to receiver output 6 - in
contrast to the usual socket sequence - and the throttle
curve adjusted so that it can simply assume the role of
the “usual” transmitter control.
In this case the “throttle curve” only determines the
nominal rotational speed of the speed controller, and this
nominal value is required to remain constant over the full
range of collective pitch; for this reason a horizontal line
should be set in the “Ch 1  throttle” mixer, i. e. every
(collective pitch) input value results in the same (“throttle”) output value. The “height” of the line in the graph
determines the nominal system rotational speed.
Initially, then, reference point “3” should be erased, and
reference points “1” (input = 0%) and “5” (input = +100%)
set to the same value; for example:
ch1
input
output
point 1
normal
thro
0%
+65%
+65%
The value to be set varies according to the speed governor you are using, and also to the desired nominal
rotational speed; you may wish to vary it, of course, in the
various flight phases.
When you select auto-rotation, the mixer
automatically switches the value to a
variable pre-set value; see the section
starting on page 124.
Program description: helicopter mixers – model helicopter 117
Ch1  tail rotor Ch1
input
output
point 3
normal
(static torque compensation)
CH1
tail
input
output
point 3
normal
0%
0%
0%
The default setting is a torque compensation curve with a
uniform linear mixer input of 0%, as is required for a gyro
sensor operating in “heading lock mode”; see illustration
above.
attention:
It is absolutely essential to read and
observe the set-up instructions supplied
with your gyro before entering any
settings at this point, as a mistake here could render
your helicopter uncontrollable.
If you use your gyro sensor in “normal” operating mode,
or if the gyro only offers “normal mode”, then you should
set up the mixer as follows:
The tail rotor control curve can be defined using up to
five points, in a similar way to the collective pitch curve
(see previous page). You can therefore modify the mixer
at any time when required, and enter symmetrical or
asymmetrical mixer inputs both above and below the
hover point. However, please ensure at the outset that
you have entered the correct direction of main rotor
rotation in the “Base settings” menu.
tail
0%
0%
0%
Starting from -30% at Point 1 and +30% at Point 5, this
mixer should be set up in such a way that the helicopter
does not rotate around the vertical (yaw) axis (i. e. does
not deviate from the hover heading) during a long vertical
climb or descent, due to the change in torque of the main
rotor. At the hover the yaw trim should be set using the
(digital) tail rotor trim lever only.
For a reliable torque compensation setting it is essential
that the collective pitch and throttle curves have been set
up correctly, i. e. that main rotor speed remains constant
over the full range of collective pitch.
When you select auto-rotation, this mixer
is automatically switched off.
Gyro (adjusting gyro gain)
Most modern gyro systems feature proportional, infinitely variable adjustment of gyro gain as well as a means
of selecting either of two different methods of working
from the transmitter.
If the gyro you wish to use features at least one of these
options, then it offers you the possibility of pre-setting
both “normal” gyro effect and - if available - “heading
lock mode”, and also of flying normal, slow circuits with
maximum gyro stabilisation, but reducing the gyro effect
for high-speed circuits and aerobatics. This is generally
similar to the transmitter control centre adjustment or
118 Program description: helicopter mixers – model helicopter
offset adjustment provided by other radio control systems.
We recommend that you set up switchable flight phases
for this, and set different gain settings for each phase in
the “Gyro” line; values between -125% and +125% are
possible.
ptch
ch1
thro
tail
ch1
gyro
inp8
normal
0%
0%
Based on the offset values determined for each flight
phase, gyro gain can be varied proportionally by means
of a transmitter control assigned in the “Gyro” line of the
“Transmitter control settings” menu (see page 98).
This could be CTRL 8, which would provide infinitely
variable gyro gain control:
• At the centre position of this transmitter control
the gyro effect always corresponds to the settings
selected here.
• If you turn the rotary proportional control CTRL 8,
which we are using in our example, in the direction of
full travel (away from centre), the gyro gain increases
accordingly …
• … and diminishes again if you turn it in the direction
of the opposite end-point.
attention:
It is absolutely essential to read and
observe the set-up instructions supplied
with your gyro before entering any
settings at this point, as a mistake here could render
your helicopter uncontrollable.
Adjusting the gyro sensor
If you wish to set up a gyro to achieve maximum possible stabilisation of the helicopter around the vertical
axis, please note the following points:
• The mechanical control system should be as
free-moving and accurate (slop-free) as possible.
• There should be no “spring” or “give” in the tail rotor
linkage.
• You must use a powerful and - above all - fast servo
for the tail rotor.
When the gyro sensor detects a deviation in yaw, the
faster it adjusts the thrust of the tail rotor, the further the
gyro gain adjuster can be advanced without the tail of
the model starting to oscillate, and the better the machine’s stability around the vertical axis. If the corrective
system is not fast enough, there is a danger that the
model’s tail will start to oscillate even at low gyro gain
settings, and you then have to reduce gyro gain further
using the rotary proportional control CTRL 8, as used
in our example, to adjust the pre-set “Gyro” value to
eliminate the oscillation.
If the model is flying forward at high speed, or hovering
in a powerful headwind, the net result of the stabilising
effect of the vertical fin combined with the gyro’s stabilising effect may be an over-reaction which manifests itself
as tail oscillation. In order to obtain optimum stabilisation
from a gyro in all flight situations, you should make use
of the facility to adjust gyro gain from the transmitter.
inp8 (Input 8)
ptch
Ch1
thro
tail
Ch1
gyro
inp8
normal
0%
0%
The adjustment facilities in this line of the menu are only
relevant if your model helicopter is fitted with a speed
governor (regulator) which maintains a constant system
rotational speed, and you wish to control it using the
“classic” method. The settings should then be entered
in accordance with the instructions supplied with the
governor you intend to use.
However, it is more convenient - and also safer - to
adopt the method described on the preceding double-page, using the “Ch1  thro” mixer.
Swashplate limiter
Ch1
thro
Ch1
tail
gyro
inp8
swash lim.
normal
0%
0%
off
This function acts like a circular mechanical gate acting
upon the swashplate control stick, restricting its range
of travel - which is usually rectangular - to a circular
pattern. This is designed to solve the following problem:
if the helicopter is set up in such a way that the roll and
pitch-axis travels extend to the maximum possible in
mechanical terms, e. g. for 3-D helicopter flying, then at
simultaneous full travel of roll and pitch-axis the actual
movement of the swashplate is higher (theoretically
141%). In this situation the mechanical swashplate system may strike its end-stops, and in the extreme case
the ball-links may even be forced off the linkage balls.
In the mx-16 HoTT transmitter a software function has
the effect of limiting the overall swashplate travel, i. e. the
tilt angle of the swashplate between 100% (the travel
is limited to the value which can be reached by one
function - roll or pitch-axis - alone) and 149% (no limiting
in force) is switched “off” (the function is completely
disabled). Swashplate limiting can also be adjusted to
suit individual models and flight phases.
This software solution is far more flexible than a physical
limiter disc attached to the stick unit, and such a disc
can only be used in any case if the roll and pitch-axis
functions are controlled by one of the two primary sticks.
The sketch alongside shows the effect of the limiter at a
setting of 100%: the dotted
area of travel is cut off, and
appears as a dead zone. If
this function is used, you
should leave “Dual Rate”
at 100%, and you should
not set Dual Rate values
greater than 100%, otherwise travel will be limited on
the roll or pitch-axis individually if the swashplate limiter
is set to 100%.
Adjustment range: 100 ... 149% and “off”.
Program description: helicopter mixers – model helicopter 119
Adjusting the throttle and collective pitch curves
A practical procedure
Although the throttle and collective pitch control systems
are based on separate servos, they are always operated
in parallel by the throttle / collective pitch stick (except
when auto-rotation is invoked). The Helicopter program
automatically couples the functions in the required way.
In the mx-16 HoTT program the trim lever of control
function 1 only affects the throttle servo, i. e. it acts as
idle trim (see “Digital trims” on page 60).
The process of adjusting “throttle” and collective pitch
correctly, i. e. setting the motor’s power curve to match
the collective pitch setting of the main rotor blades,
is the most important aspect of setting up any model
helicopter. The program of the mx-16 HoTT provides
independent adjustment facilities for the throttle, collective pitch and torque compensation curves.
These curves can be defined using a maximum of five
reference points. To define the control curves all you
have to do is set individual values for these five points in
order to determine each control curve.
However, before you set up the throttle / collective pitch
function it is important to adjust the mechanical linkages
to all the servos accurately, in accordance with the setup notes provided by the helicopter manufacturer.
of the throttle and collective pitch curve(s) must still be
carried out as described here, in a similar way to a
glow-powered helicopter.
Note:
Different throttle curves are programmed for each flight
phase, so that you can use the optimum set-up both for
hovering and aerobatics:
• Low system rotational speed with smooth, gentle
control response and low noise at the hover.
• Higher speed for aerobatics with motor power settings
close to maximum. In this case the throttle curve also
has to be adjusted in the hover range.
The hover point should always be set to
the centre position of the throttle /
collective pitch stick.
Idle setting and throttle curve
Note:
Since electric power systems by their nature
require no idle setting, it is not necessary to
adjust the idle value. However, the matching
The idle setting is adjusted solely using the trim lever
of the Ch 1 function, with the throttle limiter closed, as
described in detail on pages 99 to 101.
Reference point 1 of the throttle curve defines the throttle
setting when the helicopter is in a descent, but without
affecting the hover setting.
This is a case where you can exploit flight phase programming to use different throttle curves. An increased
system rotational speed below the hover point proves to
be useful in certain circumstances; for example, for fast,
steep landing approaches with greatly reduced collective
pitch, and for aerobatics.
The diagram shows a curve with
a slightly altered throttle setting
below the hover point at the centre of stick travel.
OUTPUT
+100%
0%
1
2
3
4
Control travel
The basic set-up procedure
Although the mx-16 HoTT transmitter provides a
120 Program description: helicopter mixers – model helicopter
5
broad range of adjustment for the collective pitch and
throttle curves, it is essential that you first adjust all
the mechanical linkages in the model according to the
information supplied by the helicopter manufacturer, i. e.
all the system linkages should already be approximately
correct in mechanical terms. If you are not sure of how
to do this, any experienced helicopter pilot will be glad to
help you with the basic set-up.
The throttle linkage must be adjusted in such a way
that the throttle is just at the “fully open” position at the
full-throttle setting, or the speed controller of an electric
helicopter is set to full-power. When the throttle limiter
is at the idle position, the Ch 1 trim lever should just be
able to close the throttle completely, without the servo
striking its mechanical end-stop (quick throttle adjustment using the “digital trim”: see page 60). With an
electric helicopter the motor should stop reliably when
the throttle limiter is closed.
Take your time, and carry out these adjustments very
carefully by adjusting the mechanical linkage and / or
changing the linkage point on the servo output arm or
the throttle lever. Only when you are confident that all is
well should you think about fine-tuning the throttle servo
using the transmitter’s electronic facilities.
warning:
Read all you can about motors and
helicopters, so that you are aware of the
inherent dangers and the cautionary
measures required before you attempt to start the
motor for the first time!
With the basic set-up completed, it should be possible to
start the motor in accordance with the operating instructions supplied with it, and adjust the idle setting using
the trim lever of the throttle / collective pitch stick. The
Hover
point
0%
1
3
4
Control travel
5
+100%
OUTPUT
b) Rotational speed too high
Remedy: on the “Collective pitch” graphic page,
increase the blade pitch
angle for collective pitch
by increasing the value at
Point 3.
2
Hover
point
0%
1
2
3
4
Control travel
5
2. The model lifts off below the centre point.
+100%
OUTPUT
a) Rotational speed too high
Remedy: on the “Ch 1
 throttle” graphic page,
reduce the throttle opening
by reducing the value at
Point 3.
Hover
point
0%
1
2
3
4
Control travel
Hover
point
0%
1
2
3
4
Control travel
5
Important:
It is important to persevere with this
adjustment procedure until the model hovers
at the correct rotational speed at the centre
point of the throttle / collective pitch stick. All the other
model settings depend upon the correct setting of these
parameters!
+100%
OUTPUT
a) Rotational speed too low
Remedy: on the “Ch 1
 throttle” graphic page,
increase the value at Point
3.
+100%
5
The standard set-up
The remainder of the standard adjustment procedure
is completed on the basis of the fundamental set-up
which you have just carried out, i. e. we now assume that
the model hovers in normal flight at the centre point of
the throttle / collective pitch stick, with the correct rotor
speed. This means that your model helicopter is capable
of hovering and also flying circuits in all phases whilst
maintaining a constant system rotational speed.
The climb setting
The combination of throttle hover setting, collective pitch
setting for the hover and the maximum collective pitch
setting (Point 5) now provides you with a simple method
of achieving constant system rotational speed from the
hover right to maximum climb.
Start by placing the model in an extended vertical climb,
holding the collective pitch stick at its end-point: motor
speed should not alter compared with the hover setting.
If motor speed falls off in the climb, when the throttle is
already fully open and no further power increase is possible (this assumes that the motor is correctly adjusted),
then you should reduce the maximum blade pitch angle
at full deflection of the collective pitch stick, i. e. the value
at Point 5. Conversely, if motor speed rises during the
vertical climb, you should increase the pitch angle. This
is done on the “Collective pitch” graphic page by moving
the vertical line to Point 5 using the collective pitch stick,
and changing its value accordingly using the arrow
buttons  of the right-hand touch-button.
+100%
OUTPUT
1. The model does not lift off until the collective
pitch stick is above the centre point.
b) Rotational speed too low
Remedy: on the “Collective
pitch” graphic page, reduce the blade pitch angle
by reducing the value at
Point 3.
OUTPUT
idle position which you set is indicated in the transmitter’s basic screen display by a horizontal bar in the display of the Ch 1 trim lever’s position. Refer to page 60
of this manual for a full explanation of the digital trims.
Around the mid-point of the collective pitch stick the
model should lift off the ground and hover at approximately the rotational speed you wish to use. If this is not
the case, correct the settings as follows:
This diagram shows the changes
to the collective pitch maximum
value only.
Hover
point
100%
1
2
3
4
Control travel
5
Now bring the model back to the hover, which again
should coincide with the mid-point of the Ch 1 stick.
If you find that the collective pitch stick now has to be
moved from the mid-point in the direction of “higher”,
then you should correct this deviation by slightly increasing the collective pitch angle at the hover - i. e. Point
3 - until the model again hovers at the stick centre point.
Conversely, if the model hovers below the mid-point,
correct this by reducing the pitch angle once more.
You may find that it is also necessary to correct the
throttle opening at the hover point (Point 3) in the “Ch 1
 throttle” menu.
Program description: helicopter mixers – model helicopter 121
Important final notes
+100%
OUTPUT
warning:
Before you start the motor, check carefully
This diagram only shows the
change in the hover point, i. e. colthat the throttle limiter is completely closed,
lective pitch minimum and maxiso that the throttle can be controlled by the
mum have been left at -100% and
Ch
1
trim
lever
alone. If the throttle is too far open when
Control travel
+100% respectively.
you switch the transmitter on, you will see and hear a
Continue adjusting these settings until you really do
warning. If you ignore this and start the motor with the
achieve constant main rotor speed over the full control
throttle too far advanced, there is a danger that the
range between hover and climb.
motor will immediately run up to speed after starting,
and the centrifugal clutch will at once engage.
Descent setting
For this reason you should:
The descent adjustment should now be carried out
always grasp the rotor head firmly
from a safe height by fully reducing collective pitch to
when starting the motor.
place the model in a descent from forward flight; adjust
However,
if
you
accidentally start the motor with the
the collective pitch minimum value (Point 1) so that the
throttle
open,
the
rule is this:
model descends at an angle of 60 … 80°. This is done
Don’t panic!
on the “Collective pitch” graphic page by moving the vertical line to Point 1 using the collective pitch stick, and
Hang on to the rotor head regardless!
adjusting the value accordingly using the arrow buttons
Don’t let go!
of the right-hand touch-key.
Immediately reduce the throttle limiter, even though
there may be a risk of damaging the helicopter’s drive
train, because:
Hover
it is vital that YOU ensure
point
that the helicopter cannot possibly
move off by itself in an uncontrolled manner.
As an example, this diagram
The
cost of repairing a clutch, a gearbox or even the
shows the changes in the collecControl travel
tive pitch minimum value only.
motor itself is negligible compared with the damage
which a model helicopter can cause if its spinning rotor
Once the model descends reliably as described, adjust
blades are allowed to wreak havoc.
the value for “Throttle minimum” - the value of Point 1
Make sure that nobody else is standing
on the graph of the “Ch 1  throttle” mixer - so that
in the primary hazard zone around the helicopter.
system rotational speed neither increases nor declines.
This completes the set-up procedure for throttle and
You must never switch abruptly from idle to the flight setcollective pitch.
ting by suddenly increasing system rotational speed, as
122 Program description: helicopter mixers – model helicopter
100%
1
2
3
4
5
2
3
4
5
OUTPUT
+100%
100%
1
this would cause the rotor to accelerate quickly, resulting
in premature wear of the clutch and gear train. The main
rotor blades are generally free to swivel, and they may
be unable to keep pace with such swift acceleration, in
which case they might respond by swinging far out of
their normal position, perhaps resulting in a boom strike.
Once the motor is running, you should s l o w l y increase system rotational speed using the throttle limiter.
For your notes 123
Helicopter mixers
Auto-rotation settings
Auto-rotation allows full-size and model helicopters to
land safely in a crisis, i. e. if the power plant should fail.
It can also be used if the tail rotor should fail, in which
case cutting the motor and carrying out an auto-rotation
landing is the only possible way of avoiding a highspeed uncontrollable rotation around the vertical axis,
invariably terminating in a catastrophic crash. And that is
the reason why switching INTO auto-rotation occurs with
zero delay.
When you switch to the auto-rotation phase the helicopter mixers change as shown in this screen shot:
ptch
thro
tail
gyro
inp8
Autorot
–90%
0%
0%
0%
During an auto-rotation descent the main rotor is not
driven by the motor; it is kept spinning only by the
airflow through the rotor disc caused by the speed of the
descent. The rotational energy stored in the still spinning
rotor can be consumed to allow the machine to flare out,
but this can only be done once. For this reason “autos”
are only likely to be successful if the pilot has plenty of
experience in handling model helicopters, and has also
set up the appropriate functions with great care.
Once you have sufficient experience you should practise
auto-rotation landings at regular intervals, not only so
that you can demonstrate your all-round flying skill by
flying the manoeuvre in competitions, but also so that
you are in a position to land the helicopter undamaged
from a great height if the motor should fail. For this
purpose the program provides a range of adjustment fa-
cilities which are designed to help you fly your helicopter
in its unpowered state. Please note that the auto-rotation
setting takes the form of a complete fourth flight phase,
for which all the adjustment facilities are available which
can be varied separately for all flight phases, especially
trims, collective pitch curve settings etc.
ptch (Collective pitch curve (Ch1  pitch))
In powered flight the maximum blade pitch angle is
limited by the motor power which is available; however,
in auto-rotation the angle is only limited by the point
at which the airflow over the main rotor blades breaks
away. Nevertheless, to provide sufficient upthrust even
when rotational speed is falling off, it is necessary to
set a greater maximum collective pitch value. Touch the
central SET button of the right-hand touch-key to select
the graph page of “Collective pitch”, and then move the
vertical line to Point 5 using the transmitter stick. Start
by setting a value which is about 10 to 20% higher
than your normal collective pitch maximum. Do NOT
set a much higher value compared with normal flight
initially, because collective pitch control will then differ
too greatly from the machine’s usual response after
you have thrown the switch. The danger is that you will
over-control the helicopter, and it may balloon up again
during the flare following the auto-rotation descent. If
this happens, the rotational speed of the main rotor will
quickly decline to the point where it collapses, and the
helicopter ends up crashing to the ground from a considerable height. Later, after a few trial autos, you may wish
to adjust the value again.
Under certain circumstances the collective pitch minimum setting may also differ from the normal flight setting; this depends on your piloting style for normal flying.
In any case you must set a sufficiently generous collec-
124 Program description: helicopter mixers / auto-rotation settings
tive pitch minimum value at Point 1 to ensure that your
model can be brought from forward flight at moderate
speed into a descent of around 60 ... 70° when collective pitch is reduced to minimum. Most helicopter pilots
already use such a setting for normal flying, and if this
applies to you, you can simply adopt the same value.
If you normally allow your model to “fall” at a shallower
angle, increase the value for “Point 1”, and vice versa.
Approach angle
in strong
wind
in moderate
wind
no wind
Approach angle
under varying wind
conditions.
75°
60°
45°
For auto-rotation the collective pitch stick itself may not
be positioned right at the bottom of its travel; typically it
will be between the hover position and the bottom endpoint, giving the pilot scope for correction if necessary,
i. e. the chance to adjust the model’s pitch inclination
using the pitch-axis control.
You can shorten the approach by pulling back slightly on
the pitch-axis stick and gently reducing collective pitch,
or alternatively extend the approach by pushing forward
on the pitch-axis stick and gently increasing collective
pitch.
Throttle
(throttle curve)
In a competition the pilot is expected to cut the motor
completely, but for practice purposes this is certainly
inconvenient, as after every practice “auto” landing you
would have to start the motor again.
For practice, then, you should set the value in this line
so that the motor runs at a reliable idle during auto-rotation, but without the clutch engaging, so that you can
open the throttle immediately to recover from an emergency; for an electric helicopter the motor should be
reliably “off”.
Tail rotor
(static torque compensation)
For normal flying the tail rotor is set up in such a way
that it compensates for motor torque when the helicopter is hovering. This means that it already generates
a certain amount of thrust even in its neutral position.
The level of thrust is then varied by the tail rotor control
system, and also by the various mixers which provide all
manner of torque compensation, while the tail rotor trim
is also used to compensate for varying weather conditions, fluctuations in system rotational speed and other
influences.
However, in an auto-rotation descent the main rotor
spins according to the windmill principle, i. e. it is not
driven by the motor, and therefore there is no torque
effect for which compensation is required, i. e. which
the tail rotor would have to correct. For this reason all
the appropriate mixers are automatically switched off in
auto-rotation mode.
However, the basic tail rotor setting therefore has to be
different for auto-rotation, as the compensatory thrust
described above is no longer required:
Stop the motor and place the helicopter horizontal on
the ground. With the transmitter and receiving system
switched on, select the “Auto-rotation” flight phase.
Fold both tail rotor blades down and change the blade
pitch angle to zero degrees in the “Tail rotor” line. Viewed
from the rear, the tail rotor blades should now lie parallel
to each other.
Depending on the friction and running resistance of the
gearbox, you may find that the fuselage still yaws slightly
in an auto-rotation descent. If necessary, the relatively
slight torque which causes this effect must then be
corrected by adjusting the tail rotor blade pitch angle.
This value will always be a small figure between zero
degrees and a pitch angle opposed to the direction of
tail rotor pitch required for normal flight.
Program description: helicopter mixers / auto-rotation settings 125
General notes regarding freely programmable mixers
The two menus “Fixed-wing mixers” and “Helicopter
mixers”, as described on the preceding pages, contain
a wide range of ready-programmed coupling functions.
The basic meaning of mixers has already been explained on page 108, together with the principle on
which they work. In the following section you will find
information relating to “free mixers”:
In addition to the pre-programmed mixers mentioned
above, the mx-16 HoTT offers three freely programmable linear mixers which can be used in every model
memory; their inputs and outputs can be selected to suit
your exact requirements.
Any control function (1 to 8), or what is known as a
“switch channel” (see below), can be assigned as the
input signal of a “free mixer”. The signal present at the
control channel, and passed to the mixer input, is determined by the transmitter control and any control characteristics as defined, for example, in the “D/R Expo” and
“Transmitter control settings” menus.
The mixer output acts upon a freely selectable control
channel (1 to max. 8 - depending on receiver type).
Before the signal is passed to the associated servo, the
only influences which can act upon it are those defined
in the “Servo settings” menu, i. e. the servo reverse,
centre and travel functions.
One control function can be set up to affect several
mixer inputs simultaneously, if, for example, you wish to
arrange several mixers to operate in parallel.
Conversely it is possible for several mixer outputs to
affect one and the same control channel.
The following description of the free mixers includes
examples of such arrangements.
In software terms the default setting for any “free mixer”
is that it is constantly switched on, but it is also possible
to assign an optional ON / OFF switch to it. However,
since there are so many functions to which switches
can potentially be assigned, you should take care not to
assign dual functions to particular switches accidentally.
The two important mixer parameters are as follows:
• … the mixer ratio, which defines the extent to which
the input signal acts on the output of the control
channel which is programmed as the mixer output.
• … the neutral point, which is also termed the
“offset”. The offset is that point on the travel of a
transmitter control (stick, rotary proportional knob
CTRL 6 … 8 and SW 1 … 9) at which the mixer has
no influence on the control channel connected to its
output. Normally this is the centre point of the transmitter control, but the offset can be placed at any
point on the control’s travel.
Switch channel “S” as mixer input
In some cases a constant control signal is all that is
required as the mixer output; a typical application would
be for slight up-elevator trim when an aero-tow coupling
is closed - completely independently of the normal
elevator trim.
If you then assign a switch, you can switch to and
fro between the two mixer end-points, and adjust the
supplementary elevator trim deflection by altering the
mixer ratio.
To identify this special arrangement, this mixer input
control function is designated “S” for “switch channel”
in the software. If you do not want the “target channel”
to be affected by the “normal” transmitter control, the
control can be de-coupled from the function input of
the associated control channel by entering “free” in the
“Transmitter control settings” menu; see pages 94
126 General notes regarding freely programmable mixers
and 96. The following menu description again includes
an example which makes this function clear.
Now use the arrow buttons of the left or right-hand
touch-key to leaf through to the “Free mixers” menu
point of the multi-function menu:
mod. mem.
ser vo set.
D/R expo
wing mixer
ser vo disp
fail-safe
base sett.
contr set.
phase trim
free mixer
basic sett
telemetr y
mod. mem.
ser vo set.
D/R expo
free mixer
ser vo disp
fail-safe
base sett.
contr set.
heli mixer
swashp.mix
basic sett
telemetr y
Touch the central SET button of the right-hand touch-key
to open this menu point.
Free mixers
Linear mixers
Regardless of the selected model type, three linear mixers are available for each of the twenty model memories,
with the additional possibility of setting up non-linear
characteristic curves.
In this first section we will concentrate on the programming procedure for the first screen page. We will then
move on to the method of programming mixer ratios, as
found on the second screen page of this menu.
The basic programming procedure
1. Use the arrow buttons  of the left or right-hand
touch-key to select the desired mixer.
2. Briefly press the central SET button of the righthand touch-key: the input field in the column marked
“fro(m)” at the bottom edge of the screen is now highlighted (black background).
3. Use the arrow buttons of the right-hand touch-key to
define the mixer input “fro(m)”.
4. Touch the central SET button of the right-hand touchkey; switch to the “to” column using the  button of
the left or right-hand touch-key, then touch the central
SET button of the right-hand touch-key once more:
the input field “to” is now highlighted.
5. Use the arrow buttons of the right-hand touch-key to
define the mixer input “to”.
6. Touch the central SET button of the right-hand touchkey, and (optionally) use the  button of the left or
right-hand touch-key to move to the column marked
“Type” at the bottom edge of the screen; you can now
include the Ch1 … Ch 4 trim lever for the mixer input
signal (“Tr” for trim) …
7. … and / or use the  arrow button of the left or righthand touch-key to move to the column marked with
at the bottom edge of the
the switch symbol
screen, touch the central SET button of the righthand touch-key again, and assign a switch if desired,
as described on page 59.
8. Use the arrow button  of the left or right-hand
touch-key to move to the => column, then touch the
central SET button of the right-hand touch-key.
9. Define the mixer ratios on the second screen page.
10.Press the central ESC button of the left-hand touchkey to switch back to the first page.
“fro(m)”
After briefly pressing the central SET button of the
right-hand touch-key, select the highlighted field of the
selected mixer line using the arrow buttons of the same
touch-key, and select one of the control functions 1 …
8 or S.
In the interests of clarity, the control functions 1 … 4 are
abbreviated as follows when dealing with the fixed-wing
mixers:
c1
Throttle / airbrake stick
ar
Aileron stick
el
Elevator stick
rd
Rudder stick
Note:
Don’t forget to assign transmitter controls to
the selected control functions 5 … 8 for a
fixed-wing model, or 5, 7 and 8 for a model
helicopter, in the “Transmitter control settings” menu.
“S” for switch channel
The letter “S” (switch channel) in the “from” column has
the effect of passing a constant input signal to the mixer
input, e. g. in order to apply a little extra up-elevator trim
when an aero-tow coupling is closed, as mentioned
earlier.
Once you have assigned a control function or the letter
“S” in the “from” column, an additional …
“to”
… appears at the bottom edge of the screen.
In the input field of this column you can define the
control channel as the mixer destination, i. e. the mixer
output. At the same time additional fields appear at the
bottom line of the screen:
M1
M2
M3
6
c1
S
el
el
el
fro
to
1
c1
2
… and in the Heli program:
1
Throttle / collective pitch stick
2
Roll stick
3
Pitch-axis stick
4
Tail rotor stick
typ
In this example three mixers have already been defined.
The second mixer (“Brake  el”) is already familiar to
us from the “Fixed-wing mixers” menu. As a general
rule you should always start by using these pre-programmed mixers if possible.
However, if you need asymmetrical mixer ratios on both
sides of centre, or have to offset the mixer neutral point,
Program description: Free mixers 127
then you should set or leave the pre-set mixers at “0”,
and program one of the free mixers instead.
Erasing mixers
If you need to erase a mixer that you have already
defined, use the arrow buttons  of the left or righthand touch-key to select its line, then use the arrow buttons  to move to the “from” column before touching
the central SET button of the right-hand touch-key. The
field in the “from” column of the mixer to be erased is
now highlighted: simultaneously touch the two arrow buttons  or  of the right-hand touch-key (CLEAR).
Mixer switches
In our example above, a physical switch “2” and the
control switch “C1” have been assigned to the two linear
mixers 1 and 2, and switch “3” to mixer 3.
The switch symbol to the right of the switch number
shows the current status of that switch.
Any mixer to which no switch has been
assigned in the column marked by the
switch symbol
at the bottom of the
screen is permanently switched on.
“Type”
(including the trim)
If you wish, and if you are using one of the primary
control functions 1 … 4, you can set the trim value of
the digital trim lever for the associated stick to affect the
mixer input. This is accomplished by touching the central
SET button of the right-hand touch-key, then using its
arrow buttons to select “Tr” in the highlighted field.
Note:
The effect of the Ch 1 trim lever on the mixer
output varies according to the function which
has been assigned to it in the “Base
settings” menu (pages 74) in the “Motor at Ch 1”
column for fixed-wing models.
Additional special features of free mixers
If you set up a mixer whose input is the same as its
output, e. g. “c1  c1”, exotic results can be obtained
in conjunction with the option of switching a free mixer
on and off. You will find one typical example of this on
pages 172 … 174.
Before we come to setting mixer ratios, we have to
consider what happens if a mixer input is allowed to act
on the pre-set coupling of aileron servos, flap servos or
collective pitch servos:
• Fixed-wing models:
Depending on the number of wing servos set in the
“Aileron / Flap” line of the “Base settings” menu, receiver outputs 2 and 5 are reserved for the aileron
servos, and outputs 6 and 7 for the two flap servos,
as special mixers are assigned to these functions.
If mixer outputs are programmed to this type of coupled function, you have to consider their effect on the
associated pair of wing flaps, according to the “receiving” control channel:
Mixer
Wirkung
NN *  2
Servo pair 2 + 5 responds with aileron
function
NN *  5
Servo pair 2 + 5 responds with flap
function
* NN = Nomen Nominandum (name to be stated)
128 Program description: Free mixers
NN *  6
Servo pair 6 + 7 responds with flap
function
NN *  7
Servo pair 6 + 7 responds with aileron
function
• Model helicopters:
Depending on the type of helicopter, up to four servos may be employed for collective pitch control;
these will be connected to receiver outputs 1, 2, 3
and 5. The transmitter software links them together to provide the functions collective pitch, roll and
pitch-axis.
It is not advisable to mix one of the transmitter controls into these occupied channels using the free mixers available outside the “Heli mixers” menu, as you
may inadvertently generate some extremely complex
and unwanted interactions. “Collective pitch trim via a
separate transmitter control” counts as one of the few
exceptions to this rule; see example 2 at page 131.
Important note:
When dealing with the interaction of
multiple mixers on one control channel, it
is essential to remember that the mixed
travels of the individual mixers are cumulative when
multiple stick commands are made simultaneously,
and this brings a danger that the servo concerned
may strike its mechanical end-stops. If you encounter this problem, simply reduce the servo travel in
the “Servo settings” menu, and / or reduce the mixer
values. However, if you do not wish to reduce the
travels in this way, because this method would
unnecessarily reduce the control travels you
normally use, then you may prefer an alternative
method of preventing the servos striking their
end-stops: set a suitable travel limit in the “LIMIT
-/+” lines of the “RX SERVO” display page of the
“Telemetry” menu.
Mixer ratios and mixer neutral point
Now that we have explained the wide-ranging nature of
the mixer functions, we can move on to the method of
programming linear and non-linear mixer curves.
For each of the three available mixers the mixer curves
are programmed on a second page of the screen display. Use the arrow buttons  of the left or right-hand
touch-key to select the desired mixer line, use its arrow
buttons to move to the right-hand column (=>), then
touch the central SET button of the right-hand touch-key
to switch to the graphic page.
Setting up linear mixer values
In the next section we will describe a typical practical
application, by defining a linear mixer curve intended to
solve the following problem:
We have a powered model with two flap servos connected to receiver outputs 6 and 7, which were programmed
as “… 2FL” in the “Ail / Flap” line of the “Base settings”
menu. These control surfaces are to be employed as
landing flaps, i. e. when the associated transmitter
control is operated, they deflect down only. However, this
flap movement requires an elevator trim correction to
counteract the resultant pitch trim change.
In the “Transmitter control settings” menu, assign
the rotary proportional control CTRL 7 to input 6. The
control assigned to input 6 now operates the two servos
connected to receiver outputs 6 and 7 in the standard
way, operating as simple wing flaps.
“Transmitter control settings” menu
I5
I6
I7
I8
MIX1
6
el
off
free
+100% +100%
ctrl 7 +100% +100%
+100% +100%
free
free
+100% +100%
tr v
+
Note:
If you assign a transmitter control to input 7
and select two flap servos, input 7 is
automatically de-coupled to avoid possible
flap malfunctions.
Start by rotating the transmitter control to its left-hand
end-point, and adjust the landing flap linkages so that
they are in the neutral position at this setting. If you now
turn the knob to the right, the flaps should deflect down;
if they move up, you must reverse the direction of servo
rotation.
Now we turn to the first mixer on the screen on page
127; this is the mixer “6  el”, to which switch 2 has
been assigned:
M1
M2
M3
typ
6
c1
S
el
el
el
fro
to
1
C1
2
If this display appears, you have not activated the mixer
by operating the assigned external switch - in this case
“2”. To correct this, operate the switch:
MIX1
tr v
offs
6
el
0%
0%
0%
SYM ASY
The full-height vertical line in the graph represents the
current position of the transmitter control assigned to
input 6. (In the above graph this is located at the lefthand edge because CTRL 7 is at its left-hand end-point,
as already mentioned.) The full-length horizontal line
shows the mixer ratio, which currently has the value of
zero over the whole of stick travel; this means that the
elevator will not “follow” when the flaps are operated.
The first step is to define the offset (mixer neutral point).
To do this press the arrow button  of the left or righthand touch-key and move to the “Offs” line:
Touch the central SET button of the right-hand touch-key
to open the second screen page:
Program description: Free mixers 129
MIX1
tr v
offs
6
Notes:
•
el
0%
0%
0%
STO SEL
The dotted vertical line indicates the position of the
mixer neutral point (“offset”), i. e. that point along the
control travel at which the mixer has NO influence on the
channel connected to its output. By default this point is
set to the centre position.
However, in our example the neutral (retracted) position
of the flaps is located at the left-hand end-stop of the
rotary proportional control, and in this position the elevator must not be affected. We therefore have to shift the
mixer neutral point exactly to that position. If you have
not already done so, turn the control - in our example
this is CTRL 7 - to the left-hand end-stop and touch the
central SET button of the right-hand touch-key. The dotted vertical line now moves to this point - the new mixer
neutral point - which always retains the “OUTPUT” value
of zero in accordance with the mixer definition.
As it happens, this setting is difficult to show in a
screen shot, so we will change the “offset” value to
only -75%.
MIX1
tr v
offs
6
el
0%
0%
–75%
STO SEL
130 Program description: Free mixers
If you wish, you can move the offset value
back to centre or otherwise adjust it as
follows: select SEL using the arrow button
 of the left or right-hand touch-key, followed by
briefly pressing the central SET button of the righthand touch-key; …
MIX1
tr v
offs
6
el
0%
0%
–75%
STO SEL
• … you can now use the arrow buttons of the left or
right-hand touch-key to move the offset value.
• You can also return the mixer neutral point to centre automatically as follows: select SEL using the arrow button  of the left or right-hand touch-key, then
simultaneously press the two arrow buttons  or
 of the right-hand touch-key (CLEAR).
Symmetrical mixer ratios
The next step is to define the mixer values above and
below the mixer neutral point, starting from its current
position. Use the arrow button  of the left or right-hand
touch-key to move to the “Travel” line: if necessary, use
the arrow buttons  of the left or right-hand touchkey to select the SYM field, so that you can set the
mixer value symmetrically relative to the offset point you
have just programmed. Touch the central SET button
of the right-hand touch-key, then set the values in the
two highlighted fields within the range -150% to +150%
using the arrow buttons of the right-hand touch-key.
Remember that the set mixer value always refers to
the input signal from the associated transmitter control
(control signal)! Setting a negative mixer value reverses
the direction of the mixer.
Simultaneously pressing the two arrow buttons  or
 of the right-hand touch-key (CLEAR) erases the
mixer ratio in the highlighted field.
The “optimum” value for our purposes will inevitably
need to be established through a flight testing programme.
MIX1
6
el
tr v +20% +20%
offs
–75%
SYM ASY
Since we previously set the mixer neutral point to -75%
of control travel, the elevator (“el”) will already exhibit a
(slight) “down-elevator effect” at the neutral point of the
landing flaps, and this, of course, is not wanted. To correct this we shift the mixer neutral point back to -100%
of control travel, as described earlier.
MIX1
6
el
tr v +20% +20%
offs –100%
STO SEL
If you were now to reset the offset from -75% to, say, 0%
control travel, by selecting the SEL field using the arrow
buttons  of the left or right-hand touch-key, and then
briefly pressing the two arrow buttons  or  of
the right-hand touch-key (CLEAR) simultaneously, the
screen would look like this:
MIX1
6
el
tr v +20% +20%
offs
0%
STO SEL
Asymmetrical mixer ratios
For many applications it is necessary to set up different
mixer values on either side of the mixer neutral point.
Start by resetting the offset of the mixer used in our
example (“6  el”) to 0%, as shown in the picture
above. Now use the arrow button  of the left or righthand touch-key to select the ASY field, and then touch
the central SET button of the right-hand touch-key. If
you now turn the rotary proportional control CTRL 7 assigned in our example to input 6 - in the appropriate
direction, the mixer ratio for each direction of control can
be set separately, i. e. to left and right of the selected
offset point using the arrow buttons of the right-hand
touch-key:
MIX1
6
el
tr v +55% +20%
offs
0%
Note:
If you are setting up a switch channel mixer
of the “S  NN *” type, you must operate
the assigned switch to achieve this effect.
The vertical line then jumps between the left and right
sides.
Examples:
1. The switch SW 2 has already been assigned to control channel 8 in the “Transmitter control settings”
menu, in order to open and close the aero-tow release.
+100%
I5 free
I6 ctrl 7 +100%
+100%
I7 free
+100%
2
I8
+100%
+100%
+100%
+100%
tr v
+
In the meantime you have carried out a few aero-tow
flights, which showed that you always needed to hold
in slight up-elevator during the tow. You now wish to
set the elevator servo (connected to receiver output
3) to slight “up” trim when the tow release is closed.
In the screen display familiar from page 127 we
have set up the third linear mixer to accomplish this,
using the switch channel “S” as the mixer input. Now
move the selected switch to the OFF position, and
move to the …
M1
M2
M3
6
c1
S
el
el
el
fro
to
typ
1
C1
2
… mixer set-up page.
Use the arrow button  of the left or right-hand
touch-key to select the “Offs” line, then touch the central SET button of the right-hand touch-key.
According to the travel setting selected in the “Transmitter control settings” menu and the switch position, the offset value now jumps to +X% or -X%, e. g.:
MIX3
tr v
offs
S
el
0%
0%
+100%
STO SET
Use the arrow button  of the left or right-hand
touch-key to move to the “Travel” line, then touch the
central SET button of the right-hand touch-key. After
moving the selected switch to the mixer ON position,
set the required mixer ratio in the now highlighted
value fields using the arrow buttons of the right-hand
touch-key.
SYM ASY
* NN = Nomen Nominandum (name to be stated)
Program description: Free mixers 131
Swashplate mixers
Collective pitch, roll and pitch-axis mixers
MIX3
S
el
SP – MIXER
ptch
roll
nick
tr v +10% +10%
offs +100%
+61%
+61%
+61%
Note:
SYM ASY
2. The following example applies to model helicopters:
In the Helicopter program you may wish to assign
one of the rotary proportional controls (CTRL 6 … 8)
to the collective pitch trim function. This is the procedure: in the “Transmitter control settings” menu
assign one of these two transmitter controls to input
“E8”. Now simply define a free mixer “8  1” with a
symmetrical mixer ratio of, say, 25%. Due to the internal coupling, this transmitter control now acts equally
on all the collective pitch servos you are using, without affecting the throttle servo.
MIX1
8
1
tr v +25% +25%
offs
0%
SYM ASY
and pitch-axis) does not follow the transmitter sticks in
the proper manner, then the first step is to change the
mixer directions (“+” or “-”), before you attempt to correct
the directions of servo rotation.
In the “Swashplate” line of the “Base settings” menu
you have already defined the number of servos which
are installed in your helicopter to provide collective
pitch control; see page 82. With this information
the transmitter software automatically superimposes
the functions for roll, pitch-axis and collective pitch as
required, i. e. you do not need to define any additional
mixers yourself.
If you have a model helicopter which only has a single
collective pitch servo, the “Swashplate mixer” menu
point is - of course - superfluous, since the three swashplate servos for collective pitch, pitch-axis and roll are
controlled independently of each other, i. e. no mixers
are used. In this case the swashplate mixer menu does
not appear in the multi-function list. With all other swashplate linkages employing 2 … 4 collective pitch servos,
the mixer ratios and directions are set up by default, as
can be seen in the screen shot above. The pre-set value
is +61% in each case, but the value can be varied within
the range -100% to +100% using the arrow buttons of
the right-hand touch-key, after touching the central SET
button of the same touch-key.
Simultaneously pressing the two arrow buttons  or
 of the right-hand touch-key (CLEAR) resets the
mixer input in the highlighted field to the default value of
+61%.
If the swashplate control system (collective pitch, roll
132 Program description: Swashplate mixers - model helicopter
Ensure that the servos do not strike their
mechanical end-stops if you change the
mixer values.
Servo display
Use the arrow buttons of the left or right-hand touch-key
to leaf through to the “Servo display” menu point of the
multi-function menu:
mod.mem.
ser vo set.
D/R expo
wing mixer
ser vo disp
fail-safe
base sett.
contr set.
phase trim
free mixer
basic sett
telemetr y
Open the menu point by touching the central SET button
of the right-hand touch-key.
However, this visual display of the current servo positions can be called up not only by selecting this menu,
but also directly by simultaneously pressing the buttons
 of the left-hand touch-key from the transmitter’s
basic display, and also from almost any menu position.
Touching the central ESC button of the left-hand touchkey returns you to your starting point again.
1
–100 %
2
0%
3
0%
4
+100 %
5
0%
6
0%
7
0%
8
0%
The current position of any servo is displayed in barchart form, which takes into account the transmitter control and servo settings, the Dual-Rate / Expo functions,
the interaction of all active mixers etc., within the range
-150% to +150% of normal travel. 0% corresponds
exactly to the servo centre position. The servo display
provides a quick method of checking your settings, without having to switch on the receiving system. However,
this does not relieve you of the need to check all your
programming steps carefully on the model before operating it for the first time, as this is the only safe method
of excluding possible programming errors.
The display is based on the following scheme for
fixed-wing models:
Bar 1 = throttle / brake servo
Bar 2 = aileron or left aileron
Bar 3 = elevator
Bar 4 = rudder
Bar 5 = right aileron
Bar 6 = (left) flap / free channel
Bar 7 = right flap / free channel
Bar 8 = free channel / second elevator servo
menu.
• The number of channels shown in this menu corresponds to the eight control channels available at the
mx-16 HoTT transmitter. However, the actual number
of channels you can use varies according to the type
of receiver in the model, and to the number of servos
connected to the receiver; the number may therefore
be much smaller.
• Use this display during the model programming procedure, so that you can immediately check all the
settings at the transmitter. However, this does not release you from the responsibility to check all the programming steps on the model itself before operating
it for the first time, in order to exclude the possibility of errors!
and for model helicopters:
Bar 1 = collective pitch or roll (2) or pitch-axis (2) servo
Bar 2 = roll (1) servo
Bar 3 = pitch-axis (1) servo
Bar 4 = tail rotor servo (gyro)
Bar 5 = pitch-axis (2) servo / free channel
Bar 6 = throttle servo or speed controller
Bar 7 = gyro gain / free channel
Bar 8 = speed governor / free channel
Notes:
•
Please note, however, that the servo display always applies to the original servo
sequence, i.e. it takes no account of any
outputs swapped over in the “Receiver output” menu
of the “Basic model settings” menu, nor changes
made directly at the receiver using the “Telemetry”
Program description: servo position 133
Basic settings
Use the arrow buttons of the left or right-hand touch-key
to leaf through to the “basic settings” menu point of the
multi-function menu:
mod. mem.
ser vo set.
D/R expo
wing mixer
ser vo disp
fail-safe
base sett.
contr set.
phase trim
free mixer
basic sett
telemetr y
Touch the central SET button of the right-hand touch-key
to open the menu point:
Batt type
Batt warning
Touch Sense
Contrast
Display light
RF Countr y
Voice volume
Beep volume
Ni-MH
4.7V
2
0
unlim
Euro
3
3
can use the arrow buttons of the right-hand touch-key to
alter the default value. Pressing the central SET button
once more concludes the entry process.
Battery type
Batt type
Batt war ning
Touch Sense
Contrast
Display light
Ni-MH
4.7v
2
0
unlim
In this line you inform the transmitter whether its power
is to be drawn from a four-cell NiMH battery or a single-cell LiPo battery. The voltage range offered in the
(next) line “Battery warning threshold” will vary according to this setting.
Simultaneously pressing the arrow buttons  or 
of the right-hand touch-key (CLEAR) resets the value in
the highlighted field to NiMH.
Battery warning threshold
In this menu you can enter basic settings which are
specific to the transmitter.
Note:
Settings in this menu only need to be
entered once, and apply to the whole
transmitter. This means that the last valid
settings always appear when you call up this menu from
another model memory.
Use the arrow buttons  of the left or right-hand
touch-key to select the appropriate line, then touch the
central SET button of the right-hand touch-key. The value field is now highlighted (black background), and you
134 Program description: basic settings
Batt type
Batt war ning
Touch Sense
Contrast
Display light
Ni-MH
4.7v
2
0
unlim
In this line you can enter any voltage you like …
batter y
needs
charging
… within the range 4.5 to 5.5 V (NiMH battery) or 3.4 to
4.2 V (LiPo battery) - according to your choice of battery
type - in increments of 0.1 Volt.
However, never be tempted to enter too low
a value here, to ensure that you always have
ample time to land your model safely if a
battery warning should be triggered.
Simultaneously pressing the arrow buttons  or 
of the right-hand touch-key (CLEAR) resets the value in
the highlighted field to 4.7 V or 3.4 V respectively.
Touch sensitivity
Batt type
Batt war ning
Touch Sense
Contrast
Display light
Ni-MH
4.7v
2
0
unlim
In this line you can select the touch sensitivity of the
touch-keys within the range 1 to 10.
Simultaneously pressing the arrow buttons  or 
of the right-hand touch-key (CLEAR) resets the value in
the highlighted field to “2”.
Contrast
You can adjust the contrast of the mx-16 HoTT’s integral screen to optimise its legibility in varying weather
and temperatures:
#01
5.2V
3:33h
stop
flt
0:00
0:00
M
HoTT
5.5V
#01
stop
flt
0:00
0:00
M
HoTT
5.5V
5.2V
3:33h
This is accomplished by selecting the “Contrast” line
using the arrow buttons  of the left or right-hand
touch-key:
Batt type
Batt war ning
Touch Sense
Contrast
Display light
Ni-MH
4.7v
2
0
unlim
Now briefly touch the central SET button of the righthand touch-key: the value field is now highlighted, and
you can adjust the screen contrast within the range +/20 using the arrow buttons of the right-hand touch-key:
Simultaneously pressing the arrow buttons  or 
of the right-hand touch-key (CLEAR) resets the value in
the highlighted field to “0”.
Screen backlight
Batt type
Batt war ning
Touch Sense
Contrast
Display light
Ni-MH
4.7v
2
0
unlim
remains on when you switch the transmitter on, and
after the last button-press.
The available values are “unlimited” “30 s”, 60 s” and
“120 s”.
Simultaneously pressing the arrow buttons  or 
of the right-hand touch-key (CLEAR) resets the value in
the highlighted field to “unlimited”.
Country setting
Batt war ning
Touch Sense
Contrast
Display light
RF Country
4.7v
2
0
unlim
Euro
Voice volume
Touch Sense
Contrast
Display light
RF Country
Voice volume
2
0
unlim
Euro
3
In this line you can define the volume of the speech output which is generated through earphones; the available
range is “0” to “10”.
Simultaneously pressing the arrow buttons  or 
of the right-hand touch-key (CLEAR) resets the value in
the highlighted field to “3”.
Beep volume
The purpose of the country setting is to fulfil the requirements of various directives (FCC, ETSI, IC, etc.). For
example, radio control systems operated in France must
be set to a restricted frequency band. For this reason
the transmitter’s country setting MUST be set to
“France” mode before the system is used in that
country. It is prohibited to use the Universal / EURO
mode in France.
Simultaneously pressing the arrow buttons  or 
of the right-hand touch-key (CLEAR) resets the value in
the highlighted field to “Euro”.
Contrast
Display light
RF Country
Voice volume
Beep volume
0
unlim
Euro
3
3
This line determines the volume of the transmitter’s
internal sounder within the range “0” to “6”.
Simultaneously pressing the arrow buttons  or 
of the right-hand touch-key (CLEAR) resets the value in
the highlighted field to “4”.
This line determines how long the screen backlighting
Program description: basic settings 135
Fail-Safe
FAIL SAFE
Pos
hold
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Delay 0.25s
STO
The inherently higher operational security of the HoTT
system compared with classic PPM technology is due to
the ability of the HoTT receiver’s integral micro-processor to process the signals from “its” transmitter exclusively, and also to process any “dirty” control signals
which it picks up. The receiver constantly stores the
latest valid signals, and invalid signals are automatically
replaced by the stored signals - but only if the control
signal is seriously inaccurate or even damaged, e. g. due
to interference from an outside source. This process is
dependent upon various settings which are described
later in this section. For example, the receiver suppresses brief interference such as field strength “holes”
and similar effects which would otherwise result in the
familiar “glitches”. When this happens, the red LED on
the receiver lights up.
If you have not yet programmed any Fail-Safe settings
in the currently active model memory, the following
warning display will appear in the basic display for a few
seconds when you switch the transmitter on:
fail safe
setup
t.b.d
Programming
The “Fail-Safe” function determines the receiver’s beha­
viour when interference occurs in the transmission from
136 Program description: Fail-Safe
transmitter to receiver. The receiver outputs 1 … 8 can
optionally …
1. maintain (“hold”) their current position:
If interference should occur, all servos programmed
to “hold” mode remain at the position last assessed
by the receiver as correct until such time as a new,
correct control signal arrives at the receiver, or
2. move to a user-selectable position (“Pos”) if interference occurs, after a “delay” time has elapsed.
Use the arrow buttons  of the left or right-hand
touch-key to select the desired servo socket 1 to 8 (),
then touch the central SET button of the right-hand
touch-key to switch between “hold” ( ) and “position” ( )
mode:
FAIL SAFE
and 1 s).
Simultaneously pressing the arrow buttons  or 
of the right-hand touch-key (CLEAR) resets the highlighted field to the default value of 0.75 s.
Now use the arrow buttons  of the left or right-hand
touch-key to select the STO field at bottom right of the
screen; SIMULTANEOUSLY move the servos for which
you have selected Position mode to the desired positions using the associated transmitter controls.
A touch of the central SET button of the right-hand
touch-key stores these positions in the receiver as the
Fail-Safe settings, so that it can revert to these if interference should strike.
The transmitter informs you of the stored data by briefly
displaying:
FAIL SAFE
Pos
hold
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
STO
Delay 0.25s
Now select the “Delay” option at bottom left of the
screen using the arrow buttons  of the left or righthand touch-key …
FAIL SAFE
Pos
hold
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
STO
Delay 0.25s
… touch the central SET button of the right-hand touchkey, and use its arrow buttons to select your preferred
delay period from the four on offer (0.25 s, 0.5 s, 0.75 s
Pos
hold
Position
stored
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Delay 0.25s
STO
attention:
We strongly recommend that you make
use of the safety potential of this option
by at least setting the throttle position
(glow-powered models) to idle, or the electric motor
to stop, if a fail-safe event should be triggered.
Model helicopters should be programmed to “hold”.
This simple precaution ensures that the model is
much less likely to cause havoc and cause property
damage or personal injury.
Telemetry
The “Telemetry” menu provides a means of calling up
receiver settings, and settings for any telemetry sensors
connected to the system, and programming them in
real-time. The transmitter is linked to the receiver via
the downlink channel which is an integral feature of the
HoTT receiver.
If Y-leads are used, a maximum of four sensors can
be connected to the Telemetry sockets of the following
receivers; this assumes that the current firmware is
loaded: GR-12S HoTT (Order No. 33505), GR-12 HoTT
(Order No. 33506), GR-16 (Order No. 33508), GR-24
HoTT (Order No. 33512) and GR-32 DUAL (Order No.
33516).
Since the system can be updated by the user, the associated “Telemetry” menus can constantly be kept up-todate, and expanded with the introduction of additional
functions or languages in future.
ing products at the website www.graupner.de/en. We
always recommend that you load the latest firmware into
your equipment, to ensure that your system is constantly
kept up-to-date.
Important information:
•
•
Note:
If you register your product under https://
www.graupner.de/en/service/product_registration.aspx you will automatically be
informed about new updates by e-mail.
Before updating the transmitter software you should
always back up all occupied model memories to a
compatible laptop or PC in order to avoid a possible loss
of data.
As mentioned earlier, firmware can be updated and
data backed up via the transmitter’s PC socket using the
USB interface, Order No. 7168.6, and the connecting
lead, Order No. 6466.S, which are supplied in the set as
standard. This requires the use of a PC running Windows XP, Vista or 7 as operating system.
The programs required for this and related information
can be found in the Download area for the correspond-
•
•
•
These instructions cover the functions
available at the time of going to press.
As mentioned in the sections entitled “Binding multiple receivers” on pages 80 and 88, it is possible
to bind more than one receiver per model. However,
in subsequent operations only the receiver which
was bound last is able to make a telemetry connection to the transmitter. On the other hand, this
also means that only the last bound receiver can be
addressed using the Telemetry menu. You may therefore need to change the binding sequence before you
can enter settings which relate to a particular receiver.
Since the transmitter and receiver only exchange
telemetry data after each fourth data packet, data
transmission inevitably requires a certain amount of
time, which means that there will be some delay in
responding to button-presses and set-up changes.
This does not constitute an error.
When setting up the radio control system, please
ensure at all times that the transmitter aerial is
an adequate distance from the receiver aerials.
A safe distance is about one metre. If you neglect this, you risk interference with the downlink
channel, and consequent malfunctions.
When operating towed models, keep a
minimum distance of about 50 cm between the receiver units involved, or
their aerials. If necessary, use satellite receivers.
Otherwise, malfunctions caused by the return
channel can not be excluded.
• Changes to model and sensor programming must
only be carried out when the model is on the ground.
Do not make any alterations unless the motor is
switched off and the flight battery is disconnected.
If you ignore this, unwanted effects of programming
changes cannot be excluded.
For example, if you accidentally initiate an active servo test at the receiver, the model could crash and
cause personal injury or property damage. Please
see the Safety Notes on pages 4 … 9 of this
manual and the various individual instructions.
• All settings which you enter using the “Telemetry”
menu, such as Fail-Safe, servo direction, servo travel, mixer and curve settings etc., are stored exclusively in the receiver, and are therefore carried over
if you install the receiver in a different model. For this
reason we strongly recommend that you re-initialise your HoTT receiver if you wish to use it in another
model; see “Reset” on page 46 and 47.
We therefore recommend that you program directions of servo rotation, servo travel, mixer and curve
settings using only the mx-16-specific standard
menus “Servo settings” (page 92), “Free mixers”
(page 127) and “D/R Expo” (pages 102 and 104).
If you ignore this, the settings may overlap and interfere with each other; in the most favourable case this
can result in confusion when operating the model,
and in the least favourable case it could cause problems.
• The channel-mapping function of the mx-16
HoTT’s integral “Telemetry” menu can be used to
Program description: Telemetry menu 137
SETTING & DATA VIEW
share out control functions between multiple receivers in any way, or even to assign the same control
function to several receiver outputs; for example, you
may wish to operate each aileron with two servos instead of just one, etc. Once again we strongly recommend that you act as cautiously as possible
when carrying out the programming.
Telemetry
The menus grouped together under the overall heading
“Telemetry” are called up from the basic display of the
mx-16 HoTT transmitter by holding the central ESC
button of the left-hand touch-key pressed in for about
one seconds. An alternative method of calling up this
menu, which also applies to the transmitter’s other
menus, is to briefly press the central SET button of the
right-hand touch-key in the multi-function list:
mod. mem.
ser vo set.
D/R expo
wing mixer
ser vo disp
fail-safe
base sett.
contr set.
phase trim
free mixer
basic sett
telemetr y
Basic menu operation
In general terms the “Telemetry” menu is operated just
like the other menus of the mx-16 HoTT transmitter.
The few differences are described below:
You can switch between the individual pages of the
Telemetry menu using the arrow buttons  of the
left or right-hand touch-key: the corresponding direction
indicators can be found at top right of every screen page
in the form of pointed brackets (<>); see the following
illustrations. If only one angle bracket is visible, then you
138 Program description: Telemetry menu
are currently at the first or last page. In this case it is
only possible to switch pages in the direction indicated
by the angle bracket.
Menu lines in which parameters can be altered are
marked with an angle bracket prefix (>). Pressing the
arrow buttons  of the left or right-hand touch-key
causes the “>” pointer to jump forward or back by one
line. Lines to which you cannot jump contain no user-variable values.
If you wish to change a parameter, touch the central
SET button of the right-hand touch-key to highlight the
parameter (black background)). Change the value within
the possible range using the arrow buttons of the righthand touch-key, and then press the SET button again
briefly to accept the value.
At this point you can use the arrow buttons  of the
left or right touch-key to select the desired sub-menu.
However, if the message …
CAN‘T
RECEIVE
DATA
OK
… appears instead of the desired sub-menu when you
touch the central SET button of the right-hand touch-key,
then the transmitter has no connection to a receiver. In
this case, switch your receiving system on, or re-bind
the receiver you wish to address, as described on page
72 and 80; alternatively activate the receiver as described on the previous page under “Important notes”.
On the first screen, headed …
RX DATAVIEW
… of the sub-menu “SETTING & DATA VIEW” of the
“Telemetry” menu …
TELEMETRY
SETTING & DATA VIEW
SENSOR SELECT
RF STATUS VIEW
VOICE TRIGGER
… you cannot enter any settings. This page is for information purposes only:
RX DATAVIEW
S–QUA100%S–dBM–030dBM
S–STR100% R–TEM.+28°C
L PACK TIME 00010msec
R-VOLT
:05.0V
L.R-VOLT:04.5V
SENSOR1 :00.0V
00°C
SENSOR2 :00.0V
00°C
Value
Explanation
S-QUA
Signal quality in %
S-dBm
Receive performance in dBm
S-STR
Signal strength in %
R-TEM.
Receiver temperature in °C
L PACK TIME Indicates the time in ms for which
the longest data packet was lost in
transmission between transmitter and
receiver
R-VOLT
Current receiver operating voltage, in
Volt
L.R-VOLT
Lowest receiver operating voltage
since the last power-on, in Volt
SENSOR1
Shows the values of the optional
telemetry sensor 1 in Volt and °C
SENSOR2
Shows the values of the optional
telemetry sensor 2 in Volt and °C
Signal quality (S-QUA)
The signal quality (S-QUA) is sent “live” to the transmitter via the receiver’s downlink channel, and shows the
signal quality in %.
Receive performance (S-dBm)
The receive performance (S-dBm) is displayed as a negative value, i. e. a value approaching zero is the highest
value (= best reception). The lower the value falls, the
worse is the receive performance. This is an important
item of information, particularly when you are carrying
out a range-check before operating the model.
Note:
In the case of negative numbers the value is
reversed: the higher the number following the
minus sign, the lower the value. This means
that a receive performance of, say, -80 dBm is worse
than one of -70 dBm.
Carry out a range-check as described on pages 80
and 89 before every flight, and remember to simulate
all the servo movements which are likely to occur in
the air. In active range-check mode the range must be
at least fifty metres on the ground. To guarantee safe
operation of your model, a value no higher than -80
dBm must be displayed in the “RX DATA” display under
“S-dBm” at this distance. If the value falls below this (e. g.
-85 dBm), you should under no circumstances fly your
model. Instead check the receiving system installation
and the aerial positions.
When operating a model this value should not fall below
-90 dBm; if it does, reduce the distance between the
pilot and the model. However, the audible range warning (beeping at one-second intervals) will normally be
triggered before this value is reached, in order to ensure
safe operation.
Signal strength (S-STR)
The value for signal strength (S-STR) is displayed in %.
An audible range warning (beeping at one-second intervals) will always be generated as soon as the receiver
signal in the downlink channel is too weak. However,
since the transmitter has a much higher transmitting
power than the receiver, the model can still be operated
safely at this point. Nevertheless, in the interests of
safety the distance to the model should be reduced until
the audible warning ceases.
Receiver temperature (R-TEM.)
Ensure under all flight conditions that the receiver stays
within its specified temperature range (ideally between
-10 and +55°C).
The limit values for receiver temperature after which
a warning occurs can be set in the “SERVO TEST”
sub-menu under “ALARM TEMP+” (50 … 80°C) and
“ALARM TEMP-” (-20 … +10°C). If the temperature
exceeds or falls below the set limit, an audible signal
(continuous beeping) is triggered, and “TEMP.E” is
displayed at top right in all the “RX” receiver sub-menus.
At the same time the “R-TEM“ parameter is highlighted
on the “RX DATAVIEW” screen page.
packets were lost in transmission from the transmitter to
the receiver. In practice this means the longest time in
which the radio control system went into Fail-Safe mode.
Operating voltage (R-VOLT)
Check the receiver’s operating voltage constantly. If it is
too low, you must under no circumstances continue to
operate your model, and certainly not launch it.
The low receiver voltage warning can be adjusted within
the range 3.0 to 6.0 Volt in the “SERVO TEST” sub-menu
under “ALARM VOLT”. If the voltage falls below the
threshold, an audible signal (repeated double beep, long
/ short) is generated, and in all the receiver sub-menus
“RX …” you will see “VOLT.E” at top right. At the same
time the parameter “R-VOLT” is highlighted in the “RX
DATAVIEW” sub-menu.
The current receiver battery voltage is also shown in the
basic display; see page 24.
Minimum operating voltage (L.R-VOLT)
“L.R-VOLT” shows the receiver’s minimum operating
voltage since the last time it was switched on.
If this voltage differs significantly from the current
operating voltage “R-VOLT”, this could mean that the
receiver battery is being overstressed by the servos,
causing collapses in battery voltage. If this should occur,
we recommend installing a higher-performance receiver
battery to ensure maximum operating safety.
Sensor 1 + 2
Shows the values of the optional telemetry sensor 1
and, if present, sensor 2 in Volt and °C. You will find a
description of these sensors in the Appendix.
Data packets (L PACK TIME)
This displays the longest period in ms in which data
Program description: Telemetry menu 139
RX SERVO
RX SERVO
OUTPUT CH:
REVERSE
:
CENTER
:
TRIM
:
LIMIT–
:
LIMIT+
:
PERIOD
:
01
OFF
1500µsec
–000µsec
150%
150%
20msec
Before you carry out any programming at this
screen display be sure to read the information on page 137.
Value
Explanation
Possible settings
OUTPUT CH Channel select
1 … according to
receiver
REVERSE
Servo reverse
OFF / ON
CENTER
Servo centre in μs If active (high­
lighted), according
to transmitter
control position
TRIM
Trim position in μs -120 … +120 µs
deviating from the
CENTRE position
LIMIT–
Travel limit on the
“-” side of servo
travel in % servo
travel
30 … 150%
LIMIT+
Travel limit on the
“+” side of servo
travel in % servo
travel
30 … 150%
Cycle time in ms
10 or 20 ms
PERIOD
140 Program description: Telemetry menu
OUTPUT CH (Channel select)
Select the “Channel” line if necessary using the arrow
buttons. Touch the SET button of the right-hand touchkey to highlight the value field. Now use the arrow
buttons of the right-hand touch-key to set the desired
channel (e. g. 01). The following parameters always
refer to the channel which you set at this point:
REVERSE (servo reverse)
Sets the direction of rotation of the servo connected to
the selected control channel: ON / OFF
CENTER (servo centre)
The “CENTRE” line displays the current pulse width in
μs of the control channel selected in the “OUTPUT CH”
line.
The displayed value varies according to the current position of the transmitter control which affects this control
channel, and also its trim position.
A pulse width of 1500 μs corresponds to the standard
centre position, and therefore the usual servo centre
setting.
If you wish to alter this value, select the “CENTER” line
and touch the SET button. Now move the corresponding
transmitter control, stick and / or trim lever in the desired
direction, and touch the SET button again to store the
current position. This position will be stored as the new
neutral position.
TRIM (trim position)
The purpose of the “TRIM” line is to provide fine adjustment of the neutral position of a servo connected
to the control channel selected in the “OUTPUT CH”
line. Adjustments are made in 1 μs increments using
the arrow buttons of the right-hand touch-key. The value
in the “CENTRE” line can be adjusted over the range
+/- 120 μs around the TRIM value set here.
Default setting: 0 μs
LIMIT–/+ (travel reduction, separate for each side)
This option can be used to place a limit on servo travel
(control surface travel) for the servo connected to the
control channel selected in the “OUTPUT CH” line. The
value is set separately for each side of centre.
The setting can be altered separately for both directions
within the range 30 ... 150%.
Default setting: 150% on both sides.
PERIOD (cycle time)
In this line you can determine the frame time for the
individual channel signals. This setting applies to all
control channels.
If you use digital servos exclusively, it is safe to set a
cycle time of 10 ms.
If you are using a mixture of servo types, or exclusively
analogue servos, it is essential to set 20 ms, otherwise
the servos will be “over-stressed” and may response by
jittering or making rumbling noises.
RX FAIL SAFE
RX FAIL SAFE
OUTPUT CH: 01
INPUT
CH: 01
MODE
: HOLD
F.S.POS. : 1500µsec
DELAY
: 0.75sec
FAIL SAFE ALL: NO
POSITION : 1500µsec
Before we describe this menu a few words as a reminder:
“Doing nothing” is the worst thing you can do
in this regard. The default setting for the
HoTT receiver is “HOLD” mode.
If interference should occur with hold-mode in force, and
if you are very lucky, the model aircraft will fly straight
ahead for an indefinite period and then “land” somewhere or other without causing major damage. However,
if the interference strikes in the wrong place and at the
wrong time, then a power model could become uncontrollable and tear wildly across the flying field, endangering pilots and spectators.
For this reason you really must consider whether you
should at least program the throttle to “motor stopped”,
to avoid the worst of these risks. If you are unsure of
this, please ask a competent model pilot for advice on
how to find a “sensible” setting for your model.
After that warning we present a brief description of the
three possible Fail-Safe variants offered by the mx-16
HoTT transmitter:
The simplest way of setting Fail-Safe - and the one we
recommend - is to use the “Fail-Safe” menu, which is
accessed from the multi-function list; see page 136.
A similar alternative, albeit slightly more difficult to
access, is to use the “FAIL-SAFE ALL” option described
on the next double-page.
And finally there is the relatively complex method of
entering individual settings using the “MODE”, “F.S.Pos.”
and “DELAY” options. The description of this variant
starts below with the “MODE” option.
Value
Explanation
Possible settings
OUTPUT CH Output channel
(receiver servo
socket)
1 … according to
receiver
INPUT CH
Input channel
(control channel
coming from
transmitter)
1 … 16
MODE
Fail-Safe mode
HOLD
FAIL SAFE
OFF
F.S.Pos.
Fail-Safe position
1000 … 2000 µs
DELAY
Response time
(delay)
0,25, 0,50, 0,75
and 1,00 s
FAIL SAFE
ALL
Stores fail-safe
positions for all
control channels
NO / SAVE
POSITION
Displays stored
Fail-Safe position
between approx.
1000 and 2000 µs
OUTPUT CH (servo socket)
In this line you select the OUTPUT CH (receiver servo
socket) which is to be adjusted.
INPUT CH (input channel select)
As already mentioned on page 137, the eight control
functions of the mx-16 HoTT transmitter can be
shared out between several receivers if necessary, or
alternatively several receiver outputs can be assigned
to the same control function; for example, you may wish
to be able to operate each aileron with two servos, or to
control an oversized rudder using two coupled servos
instead of a single one.
Sharing control functions amongst multiple HoTT receivers is a useful idea for large-scale models, for example,
to avoid long servo leads. In this case bear in mind that
only the last bound receiver can be addressed using the
“Telemetry” menu.
The eight control channels (INPUT CH) of the mx-16
HoTT can be managed in the appropriate manner using
the facility known as “channel mapping”, i. e. by assigning a different control channel in the INPUT CH line to
the receiver servo socket selected in the OUTPUT CH
line.
attention:
If, for example, you have entered “2AIL” in
the “Aileron/flap” line of the “Base settings”
menu at the transmitter, then control function
2 (aileron) is already divided to control channels 2 + 5
for the left and right ailerons. In this case the corresponding receiver INPUT CH, i.e. the channels to be
mapped, would then be channels 02 + 05; see the
following example.
Examples:
• You wish to assign two or more servos to each aileron of a large-scale model aircraft:
Assign the two standard aileron control channels 2 or
5 as INPUT CH to the appropriate OUTPUT CH (servo sockets), maintaining the correct sequence for the
left and right wings.
• You wish to control the rudder of a large-scale model
aircraft using two or more servos:
Assign one and the same INPUT CH (control channel) to each of the appropriate OUTPUT CH (servo
sockets); in this case the default rudder channel 4.
Program description: Telemetry menu 141
MODE
The settings you enter for the options “MODE”, “F.S.
Pos.” and “DELAY” determine the receiver’s behaviour if
interference should affect the transmission from transmitter to receiver.
The setting programmed under “MODE” always refers to
the channel you have set in the OUTPUT CH line.
The default setting for all servos is “HOLD”.
For each selected OUTPUT CH (receiver servo socket)
you can choose between:
• FAI(L) SAFE
If interference occurs, the corresponding servo
moves to the position displayed in the “POSITION”
line for the duration of the interference, after the “delay time” set in the “DELAY” line.
• HOLD
If interference occurs, a servo set to “HOLD” maintains the position last assessed as correct for the duration of the interference.
• OFF
If set to “OFF” when interference occurs, the receiver continues to send the last correct control signals
(which it has stored) to the corresponding servo output for the duration of the interference. This can be
imagined as the receiver switching the signal wire
“off”.
attention:
If the control signal is absent, analogue
servos and many digital servos offer no
resistance to the forces acting on the control surfaces, with the result that the model’s control
surface positions are more or less quickly lost.
142 Program description: Telemetry menu
F.S.Pos. (Fail-Safe position)
For each OUTPUT CH (receiver servo socket) activate
(highlight) the value field by briefly pressing the central
SET button of the right-hand touch-key, then use the arrow buttons of the right-hand touch-key in the “F.S.POS.”
line to set the servo position which the servo is to take
up in “FAIL-SAFE” mode if interference should occur.
The setting can be entered in increments of 10 μs.
Default setting: 1500 μs (servo centre)
Important note:
The “F.S.POS.” function is also significant if
the receiver is switched on, but is (not yet)
receiving a valid signal; this applies to all
three modes “OFF”, “HOLD” and “FAIL-SAFE”:
The servo immediately runs to the Fail-Safe position previously set in the “Position” line. This can be exploited,
for example, to prevent the operation of a retractable undercarriage or similar function if the receiver is switched
on accidentally. However, during normal model operations the corresponding servo behaves in accordance
with the set “MODE” if interference should strike.
DELAY (fail-safe response time or delay)
At this point you can set the delay time after which the
servos are to run to their previously selected positions if
the signal should be interrupted. This setting applies to
all channels, but only affects the servos programmed to
“FAIL-SAFE” mode.
Default setting: 0.75 s
FAIL SAFE ALL (global fail-safe setting)
This sub-menu can be used to define the Fail-Safe
position of the servos simply by “pressing a button”; it
operates in a similar manner to the “Fail-Safe” menu
described on page 136, and is simple to use:
Move to the “FAIL-SAFE ALL” line and press the central
SET button of the right-hand touch-key to activate the
value field; “NO” is highlighted (black background). Now
set the parameter to “SAVE” using one of the arrow
buttons of the right-hand touch-key. Use the transmitter
controls to move all the servos which you have assigned
- or intend to assign later - in the “MODE - FAIL-SAFE”
line, to the desired fail-safe positions. In the extreme
bottom line “Position” displays the current position of the
transmitter control for the channel you have just set:
RX FAIL SAFE
OUTPUT CH: 01
INPUT
CH: 01
MODE
: FAI-SAFE
F.S.POS. : 1500µsec
DELAY
: 0.75sec
FAIL SAFE ALL: SAVE
POSITION : 1670µsec
After touching the central SET button of the right-hand
touch-key once more, the display reverts from “SAVE”
to “NO”. This indicates that the position of all the servos
affected by the procedure have now been stored, and
have also been adopted in the “F.S.Pos.” line. At the
same time the position for the current OUTPUT CH
(servo socket) is immediately displayed on the screen.
RX FAIL SAFE
OUTPUT CH: 01
INPUT
CH: 01
MODE
: FAI-SAFE
F.S.POS. : 1670µsec
DELAY
: 0.75sec
FAIL SAFE ALL: NO
POSITION : 1670µsec
Switch the transmitter off, and check the Fail-Safe positions by observing the servo movements.
“Fail-Safe” in combination with “channel mapping”
It is clearly desirable that mapped servos - i. e. servos
which are controlled by a common control channel
(INPUT CH) - should respond in the same way when
interference occurs, so the corresponding settings of the
INPUT CH determine the behaviour of mapped servos.
For example, if receiver servo sockets 6, 7 and 8 are
mapped together, i. e. if the same control channel “04”
is assigned to OUTPUT CH (servo sockets) 06, 07 and
08 …
for INPUT CH 04:
RX FAIL SAFE
OUTPUT CH: 04
INPUT
CH: 04
MODE
: FAI-SAFE
F.S.POS. : 1500µsec
DELAY
: 0.75sec
FAIL SAFE ALL: NO
POSITION : 1500µsec
This also applies, for example, if it is mapped in turn to
INPUT CH 01:
RX FAIL SAFE
OUTPUT CH: 04
INPUT
CH: 01
MODE
: FAI-SAFE
F.S.POS. : 1500µsec
DELAY
: 0.75sec
FAIL SAFE ALL: NO
POSITION : 1500µsec
RX FAIL SAFE
OUTPUT CH: 06
INPUT
CH: 04
MODE
: OFF
F.S.POS. : 1670µsec
DELAY
: 0.75sec
FAIL SAFE ALL: NO
POSITION : 1670µsec
RX FAIL SAFE
OUTPUT CH: 07
INPUT
CH: 04
MODE
: OFF
F.S.POS. : 1230µsec
DELAY
: 0.75sec
FAIL SAFE ALL: NO
POSITION : 1670µsec
In this case servo socket 04 would respond in accordance with the Fail-Safe settings for CH 01.
In contrast, the response or delay time set in the “DELAY” line always applies uniformly to all channels which
are set to “FAIL-SAFE”.
RX FREE MIXER
RX FREE MIXER
MODE
: 1
MASTER CH: 00
SLAVE CH : 00
S–TRAVEL–: 100
S–TRAVEL+: 100
RX WING MIXER
TAIL TYPE: NORMAL
RX FAIL SAFE
OUTPUT CH: 08
INPUT
CH: 04
MODE
: HOLD
F.S.POS. : 1770µsec
DELAY
: 0.75sec
FAIL SAFE ALL: NO
POSITION : 1670µsec
… then INPUT CH 04 determines the Fail-Safe behaviour of the three servos connected to control channel 4,
regardless of the individual settings of the OUTPUT CH
Value
Explanation
Possible settings
MODE
Mixer select
1…5
MASTER CH Primary channel
0, 1 … according
to transmitter
SLAVE CH
Secondary
channel
0, 1 … according
to receiver
S-TRAVEL–
Mix value on the
“-” side of servo
travel in % servo
travel
0 … 100%
S-TRAVEL+
Mix value on the
“+” side of servo
travel in % servo
travel
0 … 100%
RX WING
MIXER
Tail type
NORMAL, V-TAIL
ELEVON
(aileron / elevator
mixer for deltas
and flying wings)
MIXER
Up to three mixers can be programmed simultaneously.
You can switch between mixer 1, mixer 2 and mixer 3
using “MIXER”.
The following settings on this screen always apply to the
mixer selected in the MIXER line.
Important note:
If you have already programmed mixer
functions in the “Wing mixers” or “Free
mixers” menus, check very carefully that
those mixers do not overlap with those of the “RX
FREE MIXER” menu.
MASTER CH (“from”)
The signal present at the MASTER CH (master chanProgram description: Telemetry menu 143
TRAVEL–/+ (mixer ratio in %)
The mixer ratio in relation to the MASTER signal is
determined separately for each direction by the values
entered in these two lines.
RX WING MIXER TAIL TYPE
The following model types are also available in the “Tail”
line of the “Base settings” menu (see page 76), and
should normally be set up at that point. If you have done
this, you should always leave the TAIL TYPE at NORMAL.
However, if you prefer to use the receiver’s integral
mixers, you can select the pre-set mixer function for the
corresponding model type:
• NORMAL
This setting corresponds to the classic aircraft type
with tail-mounted stabiliser panels and separate rudder and elevator. No mixer function is required for this
model type.
• V-TAIL
For this model type the control functions elevator and
rudder are linked together in such a way that each of
144 Program description: Telemetry menu
RX CURVE
RX CURVE
CURVE1 CH
TYPE
CURVE2 CH
TYPE
CURVE3 CH
TYPE
:
:
:
:
:
:
02
B
03
B
04
B
Value
Explanation
Possible settings
CURVE1, 2
or 3 CH
Channel assign­
1 … according to
ment of the selec­ receiver
ted curve setting
TYPE
Curve type
A, B, C
see illustration
TYPE A
Expo = –100%
DR = 125%
TYPE C
Expo = +100%
DR = 70%
Servo travel
+100%
0
Servo travel
+100%
0
–100%
–100%
TYPE B
linear
Servo travel
+100%
0
SLAVE CH (“to”)
A proportion of the signal of the MASTER CH (master
channel) is mixed into the SLAVE CH (slave channel);
the mixer ratio is determined by the percentage figures
entered in the “TRAVEL-” and “TRAVEL+” lines.
Select “00” if no mixer is to be set.
the two control surfaces - actuated by a separate servos - carries out superimposed elevator and rudder
functions.
The servos are usually connected to the receiver as
follows:
OUTPUT CH 3: left V-tail servo
OUTPUT CH 4: right V-tail servo
If you find that the servos rotate in the wrong direction, please see the notes on page 63.
• ELEVON (delta / flying wing models)
The servos connected to outputs 2 and 3 assume superimposed aileron and elevator functions. The servos are usually connected to the receiver as follows:
OUTPUT CH 2: left elevon
OUTPUT CH 3: right elevon
If you find that the servos rotate in the wrong direction, please see the notes on page 63.
–100%
nel) is mixed into the SLAVE CH (slave channel) to a
user-variable extent, following the same principles as
described in detail in the section entitled “Free mixers”
on page 127.
Select “00” if no mixer is to be set.
–100% 0 +100%
Transmitter control travel
–100% 0 +100%
Transmitter control travel
–100% 0 +100%
Transmitter control travel
In most cases a non-linear control function is used for
aileron (channel 2), elevator (channel 3) and rudder
(channel 4), and the default settings assume that this is
the case.
BUT CAUTION:
This assignment only applies if you have not
set either “2 ELE Sv” in the “Tail” line of the
“Base settings” menu, or “2AIL” or “2AIL
2FL” in the “Ail / flap” line, at the transmitter. Otherwise
control function 3 (elevator) is already split over control
channels 3 + 8, and control function 2 (aileron) is split
over control channels 2 + 5 for the left and right ailerons.
In both these cases the corresponding receiver control
channels (INPUT CH) would then be channels 03 + 08
or 02 + 05.
For example, if you have set “2AIL” at the transmitter,
and wish to use the RX CURVE option discussed here
instead of the “D/R Expo” menu (see page 102) of the
mx-16 HoTT transmitter - which offers more individual
adjustment options - then two curves must be set:
RX CURVE
CURVE1 CH
TYPE
CURVE2 CH
TYPE
CURVE3 CH
TYPE
5CH FUNCTION: “SERVO” or “SENSOR”
:
:
:
:
:
:
02
A
05
A
04
B
If you ignored this, the left and right ailerons would
exhibit different control characteristics.
The RX CURVE function can be used to manage the
control characteristics for up to three servos:
• CURVE 1, 2 or 3 CH
Select the desired control channel (INPUT CH) for
the first servo.
The following setting in TYPE only affects the channel you select at this point.
TYPE
Select the servo curve:
A: EXPO = -100% and DUAL RATE = 125%
The servo responds slowly to stick movements
around the neutral position, but the curve becomes
steeper with increasing control travel.
B: Linear setting
The servo follows the stick movement with a linear
response.
C: EXPO = +100% and DUAL RATE = 70%
The servo responds slowly to stick movements
around the neutral position, but the curve becomes
steeper with increasing control travel.
RX CURVE
CURVE1 CH
:
02
TYPE :
A
CURVE2 CH
:
05
TYPE :
A
CURVE3 CH
:
04
TYPE :
B
5CH FUNCTION:SERVO
Certain receivers feature one switchable servo socket instead of an independent telemetry socket. For example,
servo socket 5 of the GR-12 receiver, which is supplied
with the mx-12 HoTT, Order No. 33112, bears the
suffix “T” …
Servo
OR
sensor
… and has two additional uses: a telemetry sensor can
be connected to it, and also the adapter lead, Order
No. 7168.A, can be connected to it for the purpose of
updating the receiver.
To ensure that the receiver correctly detects the device
connected to this receiver socket, servo socket 5 MUST
be switched from “SERVO” to “SENSOR” and vice versa.
This is accomplished by shifting the arrow button  of
the left or right-hand touch-key the “>” symbol at the lefthand margin of the bottom line, followed by pressing the
central SET button of the right-hand touch-key:
RX CURVE
CURVE1 CH
:
02
TYPE :
A
CURVE2 CH
:
05
TYPE :
A
CURVE3 CH
:
04
TYPE :
B
5CH FUNCTION:SERVO
Now use one of the two arrow buttons  of the
right-hand touch-key to select the alternative “SENSOR”
setting.
RX CURVE
CURVE1 CH
:
02
TYPE :
A
CURVE2 CH
:
05
TYPE :
A
CURVE3 CH
:
04
TYPE :
B
5CH FUNCTION:SENSOR
A further press on the central SET button of the righthand touch-key concludes the selection process. You
can now return to the transmitter’s base display by
repeatedly pressing the central ESC button of the lefthand touch-key.
Note:
The control characteristics programmed at
this point also affect mapped receiver
outputs.
Program description: Telemetry menu 145
RX SERVO TEST
RX SERVO TEST
ALL–MAX
: 2000µsec
ALL–MIN
: 1000µsec
TEST
: STOP
ALARM VOLT : 3.8V
ALARM TEMP+: 55°C
ALARM TEMP–:–10°C
CH OUTPUT TYPE:ONCE
ALL MAX (Servo travel on the “+” side)
In this line you can set the maximum servo travel for the
servo test on the plus side of control travel.
2000 μs corresponds to full travel, 1500 μs corresponds
to the neutral position.
Ensure that the servos do not strike their mechanical
end-stops during the test routine.
Value
Explanation
Possible settings
ALL-MAX
Servo travel on
the “+” side for all
servo outputs in
the servo test
1500 … 2000 µs
ALL MIN (Servo travel on the “-” side)
In this line you can set the maximum servo travel for the
servo test on the minus side of control travel.
1000 μs corresponds to full travel, 1500 μs corresponds
to the neutral position.
ALL-MIN
Servo travel on
the “-” side for all
servo outputs in
the servo test
1500 … 1000 µs
Note:
Ensure that the servos do not strike their mechanical
end-stops during the test routine.
TEST
Test procedure
START / STOP
ALARM
VOLT
Alarm limit for the
receiver lowvoltage warning
3,0 … 6,0 V
Default setting:
3,8 V
ALARM
TEMP+
Alarm limit for
50 … 80 °C
excessive receiver Default setting:
temperature
55 °C
ALARM
TEMP–
Alarm limit for
excessively
low receiver
temperature
-20 … +10 °C
Default setting:
-10 °C
CH OUTPUT Channel sequence ONCE, SAME,
TYPE
SUMI, SUMO
146 Program description: Telemetry menu
TEST
In this line you can start and stop the receiver’s integral
servo test.
Touch the central SET button of the right-hand touch-key
to activate the input field:
RX SERVO TEST
ALL–MAX
: 2000µsec
ALL–MIN
: 1000µsec
TEST
: STOP
ALARM VOLT : 3.8V
ALARM TEMP+: 55°C
ALARM TEMP–:–10°C
CH OUTPUT TYPE:ONCE
Now select START with one of the arrow buttons of the
right-hand touch-key:
RX SERVO TEST
ALL–MAX
: 2000µsec
ALL–MIN
: 1000µsec
TEST
: START
ALARM VOLT : 3.8V
ALARM TEMP+: 55°C
ALARM TEMP–:–10°C
CH OUTPUT TYPE:ONCE
Touch the central SET button of the right-hand touchkey to start the test-run. The input field now reverts from
highlighted to “normal”:
RX SERVO TEST
ALL–MAX
: 2000µsec
ALL–MIN
: 1000µsec
TEST
: START
ALARM VOLT : 3.8V
ALARM TEMP+: 55°C
ALARM TEMP–:–10°C
CH OUTPUT TYPE:ONCE
To stop the servo test, re-activate the input field as described previously, then select STOP and confirm your
choice with the SET button of the right-hand touch-key.
ALARM VOLT (low receiver voltage warning)
ALARM VOLT monitors the receiver voltage. The threshold can be set to any value within the range 3.0 to 6.0
Volt. If the voltage falls below the set alarm limit, an audible signal (interval beeping, long / short) is triggered,
and “VOLT.E” flashes at top right in all “RX …” screen
displays:
RX SERVO
OUTPUT CH:
REVERSE
:
CENTER
:
TRIM
:
TRAVEL–
:
TRAVEL+
:
PERIOD
:
VOLT.E
01
OFF
1500µsec
–000µsec
150%
150%
20msec
The parameter “R-VOLT“ is also highlighted in the “RX
DATAVIEW” display:
RX DATAVIEW VOLT.E
S–QUA100%S–dBM–030dBM
S–STR100% R–TEM.+28°C
L PACK TIME 00010msec
R-VOLT
:03.7V
L.R-VOLT:03.5V
SENSOR1 :00.0V
00°C
SENSOR2 :00.0V
00°C
ALARM TEMP +/- (receiver temperature monitor)
These two options monitor the temperature of the
receiver: a lower limit value “ALARM TEMP-” (-20 ...
+10°C) and an upper limit value “ALARM TEMP+” (50 ...
80°C) can be programmed. If the temperature exceeds
the upper limit or falls below the lower one, an audible
signal (continuous beeping) is triggered, and “TEMP.E”
appears at top right in all receiver displays. The parameter “R-TEM“ is also highlighted in the “RX DATAVIEW”
display.
Ensure that the receiver remains within the permitted
temperature range under all flight conditions (ideally
between -10 and +50°C).
CH OUTPUT TYPE
At this point you can select how the receiver outputs are
to be addressed.
• ONCE
RX SERVO TEST
ALL–MAX
: 2000µsec
ALL–MIN
: 1000µsec
TEST
: START
ALARM VOLT : 3.8V
ALARM TEMP+: 55°C
ALARM TEMP–:–10°C
CH OUT TYPE:ONCE
The receiver servo sockets are addressed in sequence; this is recommended for use with analogue
servos. At this setting the servos are automatically operated at a frame rate of 20 ms (30 ms with the
twelve-channel receiver, Order No. 33512) - regardless of what is set or displayed in the “PERIOD” line
of the “RX SERVO” display.
• SAME
RX SERVO TEST
ALL–MAX
: 2000µsec
ALL–MIN
: 1000µsec
TEST
: START
ALARM VOLT : 3.8V
ALARM TEMP+: 55°C
ALARM TEMP–:–10°C
CH OUT TYPE:SAME
The receiver servo sockets are addressed in parallel
blocks of four, i. e. channels 1 to 4 and channels 5 to
8 each receive their control signals simultaneously.
This is recommended for use with digital servos, and
especially where multiple servos are employed for
a single function (e. g. ailerons), to ensure that the
groups of servos run absolutely synchronously.
If you are using digital servos exclusively, it is advisable to set a value of 10 ms in the “PERIOD” line of
the “RX SERVO” screen, as this enables you to exploit the fast response of digital servos. If you are using analogue servos, or a mixture of both types, it is
essential to select “20 ms”!
If you choose the faster setting, please
take particular care when selecting the
receiver power supply: since up to four
servos can start moving simultaneously, the load on
the battery is fairly severe, so it must be a high-performance type.
• SUMO (Sum signal OUT)
RX SERVO TEST
ALL–MAX
: 2000µsec
ALL–MIN
: 1000µsec
TEST
: START
ALARM VOLT : 3.8V
ALARM TEMP+: 55°C
ALARM TEMP–:–10°C
CH OUTPUT TYPE:SUMO
A HoTT receiver configured as SUMO constantly generates what is known as a sum signal from the
control signals of all its control channels, and - in the
case of the GR-16 receiver supplied in the set as
standard - makes this available at servo socket 8.
If the receiver’s display shows a two-digit number to
the right of “SUMO” …
RX SERVO TEST
ALL–MAX
: 2000µsec
ALL–MIN
: 1000µsec
TEST
: START
ALARM VOLT : 3.8V
ALARM TEMP+: 55°C
ALARM TEMP–:–10°C
CH OUT TYPE:SUMO 08
… then the active field shifts to the right - to channel
select - when you confirm “SUMO” with a brief press
of the central SET button of the right-hand touch-key.
This choice determine the highest of the transmitter
channels contained in the SUMO signal:
RX SERVO TEST
ALL–MAX
: 2000µsec
ALL–MIN
: 1000µsec
TEST
: START
ALARM VOLT : 3.8V
ALARM TEMP+: 55°C
ALARM TEMP–:–10°C
CH OUT TYPE:SUMO 08
Program description: Telemetry menu 147
You can confirm the pre-set number with a further
brief press of the central SET button of the right-hand
touch-key, or use the arrow buttons to select one
of the other channels between 04 and 16, and then
confirm your choice with SET.
The receiver outputs are addressed in sequence at a
frame rate of 20 ms (30 ms with the GR-24 receiver,
Order No. 33512), even if you have set 10 ms in the
“PERIOD” line of the “RX SERVO” screen page.
Although primarily intended for “satellite mode” with
two HoTT receivers, as described below, the sum
signal generated by the receiver defined as SUMO
can also be used, for example, to control a flybarless system, or to control a flight simulator (using the
adapter lead, Order No. 33310).
In …
Satellite mode
… two HoTT receivers are inter-connected using a
three-core connecting lead (Order No. 33700.1 (300
mm) or 33700.2 (100 mm)) using servo sockets determined according to the specific receiver types. For
example, GR-16 and GR-24 receivers are inter-connected using servo output 8. For more details on this
please refer to the Internet at www.graupner.de/en.
All channels of the HoTT receiver which is configured
as SUMO, and is defined as the satellite receiver, are
constantly transferred to the second HoTT receiver the primary receiver - via this connection. The primary receiver must be programmed as the …
148 Program description: Telemetry menu
• SUMI (Sum signal IN)
RX SERVO TEST
ALL–MAX
: 2000µsec
ALL–MIN
: 1000µsec
TEST
: START
ALARM VOLT : 3.8V
ALARM TEMP+: 55°C
ALARM TEMP–:–10°C
CH OUT TYPE:SUMI
Note that the signal only ever moves in one direction:
towards the SUMI.
However, if reception fails, the receiver defined as
SUMI only uses the sum signal coming from the
SUMO if at least one channel at the SUMI is programmed to Fail-Safe.
If the receiver programmed as the satellite (SUMO)
suffers signal reception failure, the servos connected
to that receiver take up the Fail-Safe positions programmed in the satellite receiver, regardless of the
primary receiver.
If, in contrast, reception fails at both receivers simultaneously, then the receiver software (the version
current at the time of printing these instructions) always reverts to the SUMO’s fail-safe settings.
However, mutual interactions can certainly not be ruled out in individual
cases, and for this reason we urgently
advise you to carry out appropriate tests BEFORE flying a model.
This receiver configuration is recommended in particular circumstances: for example, if one of the two
receivers has to be installed in an unfavourable position in the model, or if there is a danger that the received signal will be weak in certain flight attitudes,
perhaps due to a turbine, carbon fibre in the airframe,
or a similar problem, with the result that sporadic
range problems might be expected.
For this reason it is essential to connect the most important control functions to the primary receiver (the
one programmed as SUMI), so that interference to
the satellite receiver (SUMO) does not cause the
model to go out of control.
Telemetry data, such as the voltage of the airborne
power supply, are only sent to the transmitter by
the satellite receiver (configured as SUMO), i. e. all
telemetry sensors must be connected to the satellite
receiver (SUMO).
Each receiver should be connected to the shared
power supply using its own power lead. If high currents can be expected, duplicated power connections
are recommended. However, if each of the two receivers is to be powred
ered by its own battery,
1
then it is essential to
withdraw the central
3
2
(red) wire from one of
the two satellite lead
connectors, as shown
in the illustration.
If you wish to carry out further programming, such
as the Fail-Safe settings, disconnect the three-core
satellite connection between the two receivers, and
switch on just the receiver you wish to address. Note
that you may also need to change the binding sequence.
Setting up / displaying sensor(s)
If you select at least one sensor in addition to “Receiver”
in the “SELECT SENSOR” sub-menu of the “Telemetry”
menu, which is described below, then you can read
out and alter its settings following on from the receiver
pages described in the previous sections.
However, if you wish to have actual access to these
data, then you must connect the selected sensor or
sensors to a receiving system, and set up a working
tele­metry link. If you activate at least one sensor, as
described in the next section, you can switch directly between the individual modules - provided that the sensor
is loaded with the current firmware. However, if you are
using sensors with earlier firmware, it may be necessary
to select “etc.” instead of selecting the sensor directly.
In either case press the Select button  or  of the
left-hand touch-key …
further screen pages are available:
RX SERVO TEST
ALL–MAX
: 2000µsec
ALL–MIN
: 1000µsec
TEST
: START
ALARM VOLT : 3.8V
ALARM TEMP+: 55°C
ALARM TEMP–:–10°C
CH OUT TYPE:ONCE
Now use the Select button  of the left or right-hand
touch-key to switch to the displays for the selected
sensor, where you can check or alter its settings as
described in the instructions supplied with the sensor.
etc.
RECEIVER
VARIO
… and then select the desired module using the same
buttons, working either up or down, e.g.:
RECEIVER
GENERAL
ELECT. AIR
If the General Module is active, as selected in our example, you will also see the right-pointing arrow “ ” at top
right on the last receiver page (“RX SERVO TEST”), in
addition to the left-pointing arrow “ ”; this indicates that
Program description: Telemetry menu 149
SENSOR SELECT
When you select the desired menu line using the arrow
buttons  of the left or right-hand touch-key …
TELEMETRY
SETTING & DATA VIEW
SENSOR SELECT
RF STATUS VIEW
VOICE TRIGGER
… and then briefly press the central SET button of the
right-hand touch-key, the selected sub-menu opens:
SENSOR SELECT
RECEIVER
GENERAL MODULE
ELECTRIC AIR.MOD
VARIO MODULE
GPS
At this menu point you can determine separately for
each model memory which graphic displays are available for selection, and which are to be suppressed, as
described in the section starting on page 30 and the
previously described “SETTING & DATA VIEW” submenu.
Once you have selected the appropriate line using the
arrow buttons  of the left or right-hand touch-key,
and then pressed the central SET button of the righthand touch-key, you can activate ( ) or disable ( )
the displays for the corresponding sensors, e.g.:
150 Program description: Telemetry menu
SENSOR SELECT
RECEIVER
GENERAL MODULE
ELECTRIC AIR.MOD
VARIO MODULE
GPS
This choice is a requirement for superimposing the
sensor in the “VOICE TRIGGER” sub-menu, and for
displaying telemetry data in the corresponding graphic
display; see page 30.
RF STATUS VIEW
After you select the desired menu line using the arrow
buttons  of the left or right-hand touch-key …
TELEMETRY
SETTING & DATA VIEW
SENSOR SELECT
RF STATUS VIEW
VOICE TRIGGER
… a brief press on the central SET button of the righthand touch-key opens the selected sub-menu. This
visualises the quality of the connection between transmitter and receiver:
(S-dbm)” on page 139.
• The dots above the bar indicate the worst-case receive performance since the transmitter was switched
on, or since the display was reset by simultaneously
pressing the  or  buttons of the right-hand
touch-key (CLEAR).
Additional information in numeric form is generated to
the left of the graphic display of receive performance.
The meaning of these figures is as follows:
Value
Explanation
R
Signal quality in % for the signal
arriving from the receiver
R100%
S 90%
TD 40
S
Signal quality in % for the signal
arriving at the receiver
TD
Reception performance in dBm
E
10
RD 51
4.8VC
4.8VM 0123456789ABCDE
E
Number of lost receiver data packets
RD
Reception performance in dBm of the
signal picked up by the receiver
VC
Actual receiver operating voltage in
Volt
VM
Lowest receiver operating voltage in
Volt since the last time it was switched
on
Top row:
Bottom row:
Receive performance of channels 1 …
75 in the 2.4 GHz band in dBm, coming
from the receiver, picked up at the transmitter.
Receive performance of channels 1 …
75 in the 2.4 GHz band in dBm, coming
from the transmitter, picked up at the
receiver.
Notes:
•
Since the receive performance is measured and displayed in dBm, the higher the
bar, the worse the receive performance,
and vice versa; see also under “Receive performance
Program description: Telemetry menu 151
VOICE TRIGGER
Once you have selected the appropriate menu line using
the arrow buttons  of the left or right-hand four-way
button …
TELEMETRY
SETTING & DATA VIEW
SENSOR SELECT
RF STATUS VIEW
VOICE TRIGGER
… and then pressed the central SET button of the righthand four-way button, the selected sub-menu appears:
VOICE TRIGGER
REPEAT
10SEC –––
TRIG
–––
VARIO
–––
TRANSMITTER
RECEIVER
GENERAL MODULE
ELECTRIC AIR.MOD.
VARIO MODULE
GPS
Note:
This display will vary according to the
choices you have made in the “Select
sensor” sub-menu; as described on page
150. The illustration above shows the maximum
number of options, and indicates that the user has
selected all the sensors.
152 Program description: Telemetry menu
REPEAT
VOICE TRIGGER
REPEAT
10SEC
TRIG
VARIO
TRANSMITTER
RECEIVER
–––
–––
–––
Speech output is available via the headphone socket,
but not until you have at least assigned a switch in the
“REPEAT” line. This is accomplished as described in the
section entitled „Assigning switches and control switches“ on page 59:
TRIG
If you assign a switch in this line - preferably the momentary switch SW 1 - you can cycle through the voice
outputs selected in the options “TRANSMITTER”,
“RECEIVER” and under “Sensors”, as described in the
following sections. However, please note that any warnings can only be generated by the sensor which is
currently active!
VOICE TRIGGER
REPEAT
10SEC
TRIG
VARIO
TRANSMITTER
RECEIVER
3
1
–––
VOICE TRIGGER
REPE T
10SEC
push
into
desired switch
position ON
TRANSMITTER
RECEIVER
VOICE TRIGGER
REPEAT
10SEC
TRIG
VARIO
TRANSMITTER
RECEIVER
3
–––
–––
All the time the assigned switch is closed, the last
speech output is repeated for the period set to the left of
the switch.
Simultaneously pressing the Select buttons  or
 of the right-hand four-way button (CLEAR) causes
the time setting to revert to “10SEC”.
VARIO
If you activate the “VARIO” ( ) line in the “SELECT
SENSOR” sub-menu, as described on page 150, you
can use a switch assigned in this line to call up vario-specific voice outputs, i.e. those triggered by altitude
changes, such as “slow climb / descent” etc. via the
transmitter’s earphone socket; these outputs are completely independent of the other voice messages.
VOICE TRIGGER
REPEAT
10SEC
TRIG
VARIO
TRANSMITTER
RECEIVER
3
1
7
TRANSFER
Select the desired menu line using the arrow buttons
 of the left or right-hand four-way button …
VOICE TRIGGER
REPEAT
10SEC
TRIG
VARIO
TRANSMITTER
RECEIVER
3
1
7
… then briefly press the central SET button of the righthand four-way button to open the selected sub-menu:
VOLT:
MODELTIME:
BATTERYTIME:
STOPWATCH:
RUNTIME:
In this menu you can activate ( ) or disable ( ) the
chosen speech output after using the arrow buttons
 of the left or right-hand four-way button to select
the desired line, followed by a brief press of the central
SET button of the right-hand four-way button:
VOLT:
MODELTIME:
BATTERYTIME:
STOPWATCH:
RUNTIME:
RECEIVER
Select the desired menu line with the arrow buttons
 of the left or right-hand four-way button …
VOICE TRIGGER
REPEAT
10SEC
TRIG
VARIO
TRANSMITTER
RECEIVER
3
1
7
„Sensors“
These lines only appear if you previously activated at
least one sensor in the “SELECT SENSOR” sub-menu
of the “TELEMETRY” menu; see page 150. The corresponding voice outputs are selected using the procedure described in the previous sections.
Note:
The selection you make here is completely
independent of the “VARIO” voice outputs.
… then touch the central SET button of the right-hand
four-way button to call up the selected sub-menu:
TEMP:
STRENGTH:
VOLT:
LOWVOLT:
In this menu you can activate ( ) or disable ( ) the
chosen speech output after using the arrow buttons
 of the left or right-hand four-way button to select
the desired line, followed by a brief press of the central
SET button of the right-hand four-way button:
TEMP:
STRENGTH:
VOLT:
LOWVOLT:
Program description: Telemetry menu 153
Trainer Mode
Connecting two transmitters for trainer mode operations using a Trainer lead
Use the arrow buttons of the left or right-hand touch-key
to leaf through to the “Trainer” menu point of the multi-function menu:
ser vo set.
D/R expo
wing mixer
ser vo disp
fail-safe
teach/pupi
ser vo set.
D/R expo
free mixer
ser vo disp
fail-safe
teach/pupi
contr set.
phase trim
free mixer
basic sett
telemetr y
info disp
contr set.
heli mixer
swashp.mix
basic sett
telemetr y
info disp
Touch the central SET button of the right-hand touch-key
to open the menu:
TRAINER/Pupil
–P
T
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
N/A
SW: ––– BIND:
The illustration above shows the initial state
of this menu: transmitter controls have not
been released ( ) to the pupil, and a switch
has not been assigned (SW: --- at bottom right and -P
on the left of the display).
154 Program description: Trainer system
Teacher transmitter settings
Up to eight transmitter control functions (see „Definition
of terms“ on page 58) of the Teacher transmitter “T”
can be transferred to the pupil transmitter “P”, either
individually or in any combination.
For this reason the bottom line of the screen, marked “L”,
indicates those function inputs which are permanently
associated with control functions 1 … 4 (dual-axis stick
functions on fixed-wing models and helicopters), as well
as the freely assignable inputs 5 … 8 of the “Transmitter control settings” menu.
buttons of the left or right-hand touch-key to place the
marker next to “SW” at bottom right, and assign a switch
as described on page 59.
We recommend that you use one of the two momentary
switches SW 1 or SW 9 as the transfer switch, to ensure
that the Teacher transmitter can regain control instantly
at any time.
TRAINER/Teach
No
student
signal
1 2 3
5 6 7 8
N/A
SW: 9
BIND:
–P
T
Note:
In principle it makes no difference which
individual transmitter controls are assigned
to the inputs which are to be transferred to
the pupil. However, they can only be assigned in the
“Transmitter control settings” menu with the Trainer
connection switched off.
Use the arrow buttons  of the left or right-hand
touch-key to select the transmitter controls 1 to 8 () to
be transferred to the pupil, and briefly press the central
SET button of the right-hand touch-key in each case, so
that they switch from “T (Teacher)” ( ) to “P (Pupil)” ( ):
Since it is very unlikely that a prepared (i. e. ready for
use) Pupil transmitter will already be connected to a
Teacher transmitter at this early stage of programming a
Trainer system, the transmitter will generate appropriate
visual and audible warnings when the switch is operated
as part of the switch assignment procedure. You should
therefore re-open the switch once you have assigned it:
TRAINER/Teach
P
T
TRAINER/Pupil
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
N/A
SW: 9
BIND:
–P
T
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
N/A
SW: ––– BIND:
You still have to assign a Trainer transfer switch on the
right of the screen so that you can actually transfer control to the Pupil. This is accomplished by using the arrow
Note:
The switch assignment procedure described
above determines which transmitter provides
the Teacher function, and which provides the
Pupil function. For this reason a switch must NEVER be
assigned to the Pupil transmitter in this menu. To
underline this, the menu headline switches from
“TRAINER / pupil” to “TRAINER / teacher” as soon
as a switch is assigned.
The model to be controlled by the pupil must be programmed completely in a model memory of the mx16 HoTT Teacher transmitter, i. e. with all its functions
including trims and any mixer functions. The HoTT
receiver in the model must also be “bound” to the Teacher transmitter, since it is this transmitter which actually
controls the model in Pupil mode - even in Trainer mode
operations.
The mx-16 HoTT Teacher transmitter
MUST ALWAYS BE SWITCHED ON FIRST.
ONLY THEN MAY THE CONNECTING
LEAD BE PLUGGED INTO IT. If you neglect this, the
RF module will not be activated.
The mx-16 HoTT Teacher transmitter can be linked to
any suitable Pupil transmitter - even those operating on
the “classic” 35 / 40 MHz band.
However, if the connection at the pupil end is
NOT made using a two-pole DSC socket, but
instead - for example - using a three-pin
Trainer socket from the Graupner range, the basic
requirement for a correct connection with a Pupil
transmitter is that PPM (18 or 24) modulation must
ALWAYS be set on the Pupil transmitter, regardless
of the modulation used by the Teacher transmitter.
Pupil transmitter settings
The model to be controlled by the pupil must be programmed completely in a model memory of the Teacher
transmitter, i. e. with all its functions including trims and
any mixer functions, and the HoTT receiver in the model
must be “bound” to the Teacher transmitter. In principle,
however, an mx-16 HoTT Pupil transmitter can also be
linked to a Teacher transmitter operating on the “classic”
35 / 40 MHz band.
The Pupil transmitter can be virtually any transmitter
from the former and current Graupner range with at
least four control functions. More information on this is
available in the main FS catalogue, and on the Internet
under www.graupner.de/en.
Some transmitters will need to be retro-fitted with the
appropriate module in order to act as the Pupil transmitter. This should be connected to the transmitter
circuit board as described in the installation instructions
supplied in the set.
Information on the Pupil module required can be found
in the main Graupner FS catalogue and on the Internet
at www.graupner.de/en.
The Pupil transmitter must be connected to the Teacher
transmitter using the appropriate lead - see next double
page.
The control functions of the Pupil transmitter MUST act directly on the control
channels, i. e. the receiver outputs, without the intervention of any mixers.
If you are using an “mc” or “mx” series transmitter,
it is best to set up a free model memory in the Pupil
transmitter with the required model type (“Fixed-wing”
or “Helicopter”). Assign the model name “Pupil” to the
memory, and set up the stick mode (Mode 1 … 4) and
“Throttle min. forward / back” to suit the pupil’s preference. All the other settings should be left at the appropriate default values. If you select the “Helicopter” model
type, the throttle / collective pitch direction and idle trim
must also be set accordingly on the Pupil transmitter. All
other functions, including mixer and coupling functions,
are carried out by the Teacher transmitter, which transmits them to the receiver in the model.
If you are using an mx-20 or mc-32 HoTT Pupil
transmitter, it is also necessary to match the type of
modulation to the numbers of the control channels to
be transferred; this is carried out in the “DSC output”
line of the “Basic model settings” menu. For example,
“PPM10” modulation carries control channels 1 … 5,
and its signal packet only contains control channels 1
… 5 - but not channel 6. If you also wish the pupil to be
able to use this channel, then you must select a type of
modulation which includes it!
If you are using a “D” or “FM” type transmitter, you
should check the servo directions and stick mode, and
alter them by re-connecting the appropriate leads if required. All mixers should be switched off or set to “zero”.
When assigning the control functions the usual conventions should be observed:
Channel
Function
1
Throttle / Collective pitch
2
Aileron / Roll
3
Elevator / Pitch-axis
4
Rudder / Tail rotor
If you wish to transfer other control functions to the
Pupil transmitter, in addition to the functions of the two
dual-axis sticks (1 … 4), then you will need to assign
additional transmitter controls in the Pupil transmitter’s
“Transmitter control settings” menu to those inputs
which correspond to transmitter control numbers 5 … 8,
as released in the Teacher transmitter’s “Trainer” menu.
Program description: Trainer system 155
Important:
•
If you forget to assign a transmitter
control, then the servo or servos concerned will remain in the centre position when control is transferred to the Pupil
transmitter.
• The Pupil transmitter must always be operated in
PPM mode, regardless of the type of RF link between the Teacher transmitter and the model.
• If the Pupil transmitter is connected using a DSC
socket, then you should ALWAYS leave the Pupil transmitter’s On / Off switch at the “OFF” position, as this is the only way to ensure that the Pupil transmitter module does not generate an RF
signal even when the DSC lead is plugged in.
Trainer mode operations
Connect the two transmitters using the appropriate
lead; see the overview on the next page: connect the
plug marked “M” (Master) to the socket on the Teacher
transmitter, and the plug marked “S” (Student) (not
present on all leads) to the appropriate socket on the
Pupil transmitter.
Important notes:
It is essential to check that all func•
tions are transferred correctly to the
prepared model BEFORE initiating
Trainer mode operations.
• If you are using a Trainer lead with three-pole barrel connectors, on no account connect one of the
ends marked “S” or “M” to a DSC system socket, as it is not suitable for this purpose. The DSC
socket is only suitable for leads fitted with twopole barrel connectors.
156 Program description: Trainer system
Checking the system
Operate the assigned Trainer transfer switch:
• If the screen display changes from „T“ to „P“, the
Trainer system is working properly.
• However, if the central LED flashes blue / red at a
high rate, and at the same time the transmitter emits
audible signals, then there is a problem with the
connection between Pupil and Teacher transmitter.
At the same time the following warning appears in
the base display …
no
student
signal
… and in the “Trainer” menu the display changes to
“-P” on the left. If this should happen, note that all the
functions automatically remain under the control of
the Teacher transmitter, regardless of the position of
the Trainer transfer switch; this ensures that the model is not out of control at any time.
Possible errors:
• Pupil transmitter not ready
• The interface in the Pupil transmitter, which replaces
the RF module, is not connected correctly
• Incorrect cable connection: see next section for cable
selection
• Pupil transmitter not set to PPM (10, 18, 24) mode.
Further possible errors:
• Teacher transmitter and HoTT receiver in trainer
model not correctly “bound”.
Trainer leads
4179.1
For Trainer mode operations between any
two Graupner transmitters equipped with a
DSC socket - identifiable by two-pole barrel
connectors at both ends.
3290.7
Trainer lead for connecting a Teacher transmitter with DSC socket (e. g. mx-16 HoTT),
or a transmitter retro-fitted with the optional DSC module, Order No. 3290.24, to a
Graupner Pupil transmitter with opto-electronic Pupil socket - identifiable by the letter
“S” at the end with the three-pole barrel connector.
3290.8
Trainer lead for connecting a Pupil transmitter with DSC socket (e. g. mx-16 HoTT)
or a transmitter retro-fitted with the optional DSC module, Order No. 3290.24, to a
Graupner Teacher transmitter with opto-electronic Teacher socket - identifiable by the letter “M” at the end with the three-pole barrel
connector.
For more detailed information about the leads and modules for the Teacher and Pupil transmitters listed on this
page, please refer to the operating instructions supplied
with your transmitter, the main Graupner FS catalogue,
or the Internet at www.graupner.de/en.
Trainer mode operations with the mx-16 HoTT transmitter
Due to the constant expansion of our range of products please visit the Internet at www.graupner.de/en for the latest information.
mx-16 HoTT Teacher transmitter
mx-16 HoTT Pupil transmitter
Trainer lead,
Order No. 4179.1
Trainer lead,
Order No. 3290.8
Trainer lead,
Order No. 3290.7
Trainer lead,
Order No. 4179.1
M
Teacher transmitter
with DSC socket
mx-12 HoTT,
mx-16 HoTT,
mx-20 HoTT
mx-32 HoTT
mc-16 HoTT
mc-20 HoTT and
mc-32 HoTT
S
Teacher transmitter with Teacher
module Order No. 3290.2,
3290.19, 3290.22
mc-19 to mc-24, mx-22(iFS),
mx-24s
Pupil transmitter
with DSC socket
mx-12 HoTT,
mx-16 HoTT,
mx-20 HoTT
mx-32 HoTT
mc-16 HoTT
mc-20 HoTT and
mc-32 HoTT
Pupil transmitter with Pupil
module Order No. 3290.3,
3290.10, 3290.33
D 14, FM 414, FM 4014, FM 6014,
mc-10 … mc-24, mx-22(iFS),
mx-24s
Note:
These lists represent the transmitters and
transmitter combinations which are possible at
time of going to press.
Program description: Trainer system 157
Wireless HoTT system
The mx-16 HoTT Trainer system can also be operated
by wireless means. In this case the Teacher transmitter
is “connected” to a Pupil transmitter as described in the
following section. However, the trainer model must first
be bound to the PUPIL transmitter. This configuration is
possible between transmitters which feature the “BIND:”
option in the “Trainer” menu.
mits them to the receiver in the model.
When assigning the control functions the usual conventions should be observed:
Channel
Function
1
Throttle / Collective pitch
2
Aileron / Roll
Preparations for Trainer mode operations
3
Elevator / Pitch-axis
Teacher transmitter
The trainer model must be programmed completely,
i. e. with all its functions including trims and any mixer
functions, in a model memory of the HoTT Teacher
transmitter.
This means that it must be possible to
control the trainer model fully, without
restriction, by the Teacher transmitter.
However, the preparations are concluded by binding
the training model to the Pupil transmitter; you will
find a detailed description of the binding procedure
on pages 80 and 88.
4
Rudder / Tail rotor
Pupil transmitter
If you are using an “mc” or “mx” series transmitter,
it is best to set up a free model memory in the Pupil
transmitter with the required model type (“Fixed-wing”
or “Helicopter”). Assign the model name “Pupil” to the
memory, and set up the stick mode (Mode 1 … 4) and
“Throttle min. forward / back” to suit the pupil’s preference. All the other settings should be left at the appropriate default values. If you select the “Helicopter” model
type, the throttle / collective pitch direction and idle trim
must also be set accordingly on the Pupil transmitter. All
other functions, including mixer and coupling functions,
are carried out by the Teacher transmitter, which trans158 Program description: Trainer system
If you wish to transfer further control functions to the
Pupil transmitter, i.e. in addition to the functions of the
two dual-axis stick units (1 … 4), then you will need to
assign transmitter controls to those inputs which correspond to the function or transmitter control inputs 5
… 8, as selected in the Teacher transmitter’s “Trainer”
menu; this has to be carried out in the Pupil transmitter’s
“Transmitter control settings” menu.
Important:
If you should forget to assign a transmitter control at the Pupil end, the servo or
servos concerned will remain at their
centre position when control is transferred to the
Pupil transmitter.
Preparing the Teacher and Pupil transmitters
Once you have bound the trainer model to the Pupil
transmitter, the Teacher transmitter should also be
switched on. Now use the arrow buttons or the left or
right-hand touch-key to leaf through on both transmitters
to the “Trainer” menu point in the multi-function menu:
ser vo set.
D/R expo
wing mixer
ser vo disp
fail-safe
teach/pupi
contr set.
phase trim
free mixer
basic sett
telemetr y
info disp
ser vo set.
D/R expo
free mixer
ser vo disp
fail-safe
teach/pupi
contr set.
heli mixer
swashp.mix
basic sett
telemetr y
info disp
Touch the central SET button of the right-hand touch-key
to open the following menu point:
TRAINER/Pupil
–P
T
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
N/A
SW: ––– BIND:
The illustration above shows the initial state
of this menu: no transmitter controls have
been released to the Pupil ( ), and no
switches have been assigned (SW: --- bottom right and
-S on left of illustration).
Pupil transmitter
Use the arrow buttons of the left or right-hand touch-key
to move the marker / cursor to the input field marked
“Bind”. If a switch is displayed adjacent to “SW” on the
right, then it is essential to erase this: see the following
illustration:
–P
T
TRAINER/Teach
TRAINER/Pupil
TRAINER/Pupil
P
T
–P
T
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
SW: ––– BIND:
N/A
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
N/A
SW: ––– BIND:
Teacher transmitter
Up to eight of the Teacher transmitter’s (“Teacher”)
transmitter control functions can be transferred to the
Pupil transmitter (“Pupil”), either individually or in any
combination.
For this reason the bottom line of the screen, marked
“L”, indicates those function inputs which are permanently associated with control functions 1 … 4 (dual-axis
stick functions on fixed-wing models and helicopters), as
well as the freely assignable inputs 5 … 8 of the “Transmitter control settings” menu.
You still have to assign a Trainer transfer switch on the
right of the screen so that you can actually transfer
control to the Pupil. This is accomplished by using the
arrow buttons of the left or right-hand touch-key to place
the marker frame next to “SW” at bottom left, and assign
a switch as described on page 49.
We recommend that you use one of the two momentary
switches SW 1 or SW 9 as the transfer switch, to ensure
that the Teacher transmitter can regain control instantly
at any time:
Note:
In principle it makes no difference which
individual transmitter controls are assigned
to the inputs which are to be transferred to
the pupil. However, they can only be assigned in the
“Transmitter control settings” menu with the Trainer
connection switched off.
Use the arrow buttons  of the left or right-hand
touch-key to select the transmitter controls 1 to 8 () to
be transferred to the pupil, and briefly press the central
SET button of the right-hand touch-key in each case, so
that they switch from “T (Teacher)” ( ) to “P (Pupil)” ( ):
TRAINER/Teach
–P
T
No
student
signal
1
SW: 9
BIND:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
N/A
SW: 9
BIND:
Note:
The switch assignment procedure described
above determines which transmitter provides
the Teacher function, and which provides the
Pupil function. For this reason a switch must NEVER be
assigned to the Pupil transmitter in this menu. To
underline this, the menu headline switches from
“TRAINER / pupil” to “TRAINER / teacher” as soon
as a switch is assigned.
Now use the arrow buttons of the left or right-hand
touch-key to move the marker to “BIND: N/A” on the
right:
TRAINER/Teach
7 8
N/A
Since it is very unlikely that a prepared (i. e. ready for
use) Pupil transmitter will already be connected to a
Teacher transmitter at this early stage of programming a
Trainer system, the transmitter will generate appropriate
visual and audible warnings when the switch is operated
as part of the switch assignment procedure. You should
therefore re-open the switch once you have assigned it:
P
T
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
N/A
SW: 9
BIND:
Binding the Pupil transmitter to the Teacher transmitter
Note:
During the binding procedure the distance
between the two transmitters should not be
too great. You may need to change the
relative position of the two transmitters and initiate the
Program description: Trainer system 159
binding process a second time.
TRAINER/Pupil
First initiate the “BINDING” process at the Pupil transmitter by briefly pressing the central SET button of the
right-hand four-way button …
–P
T
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
SW: ––– BIND:
ON
TRAINER/Pupil
–P
T
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
SW: ––– BIND: BINDING
… and immediately afterwards that of the Teacher
transmitter:
TRAINER/Teach
P
T
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
SW: 9
BIND: BINDING
As soon as this process is concluded, both screens display “ON” instead of the flashing message “BINDING”:
TRAINER/Teach
P
T
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
SW: 9
BIND:
ON
160 Program description: Trainer system
GRAUBELE
#01
RFC–Teach
5.2V
2:22h
0:00
stop
flt
0:00
«normal »
HoTT
P
5.5V
This concludes the binding process, and you can return
to the basic display of both transmitters, and start trainer
mode operations - once you have checked the operation
of all the functions.
However, if neither transmitter, or only one of the transmitters, displays “ON”, indicating that the binding procedure has failed, try changing the relative position of the
two transmitters, and repeat the whole procedure.
… and that of the Pupil transmitter typically like this:
Important note:
It is essential to check that all functions
are transferred correctly to the prepared
model BEFORE initiating Trainer mode
operations.
If it should occur that the link between the Teacher and
Pupil transmitters is lost during Trainer mode operations,
note that the Teacher transmitter automatically assumes
control of the model.
In this situation, if the Trainer change-over switch is in
the “Pupil” position, then the central LED on the Teacher
transmitter starts to flash blue / red for the duration of
the signal loss, and the transmitter emits audible warning signals. At the same time “RFC-” flashes in the basic
display, and the following warning is displayed:
During …
Trainer mode operations
… it is no problem for the Teacher and Pupil to stand
a little way apart. However, you should never exceed a
distance of 50 m (this is known as the call range), and
no other persons should stand between the Teacher and
Pupil, as this could reduce the effective range.
In this mode of operation the basic display of the Teacher transmitter looks like this …
GRAUBELE
#09
RFC-Pupil
4.9V
1:11h
stop
flt
0:00
0:00
HoTT
no
student
signal
However, if only “RFC-” flashes in the basic transmitter
display, and - relatively quiet - audible signals are heard
…
GRAUBELE
#01
RFC–Teach
5.2V
2:22h
0:00
stop
flt
0:00
«normal »
HoTT
P
5.5V
… then this indicates that the Pupil signal has also been
lost, but the Trainer transfer switch is in the “Teacher”
position.
In either situation your first recourse should be to reduce
the distance between the two transmitters. If this does
not help, land the model immediately, and seek the
cause.
However, if both transmitters are operating with the receiving system switched off, then the “familiar” symbol
appears in the basic display of the Teacher transmitter
instead of the two symbols.
buttons of the left or right-hand touch-key …
TRAINER
Wireless Link
ACT
INH
… and confirm your choice by briefly pressing the central SET button of the right-hand touch-key, this resets
that transmitter to “normal” operation. In this case you
will have to repeat the binding process with a Teacher or
Pupil transmitter as and when required.
Resuming Trainer mode operations
If - for whatever reason - one or both transmitters are
switched off during a Trainer mode session, then the
screen displays the following query when the transmitter
or transmitters are switched on again:
TRAINER
Wireless Link
ACT
INH
Touch the central SET button of the right-hand touch-key
to confirm “ACT(ivate)”, or alternatively wait for about
two seconds until the message disappears; the last link
you created with a Teacher or Pupil transmitter is now
restored.
However, if you select “INH(ibit)” using one of the arrow
Program description: Trainer system 161
Info Display
Date, time, transmitter ID and memory card
Use the arrow buttons of the left or right-hand touch-key
to leaf through to the “Info” menu point of the multi-function menu:
ser vo set.
D/R expo
wing mixer
ser vo disp
fail-safe
teach/pupi
contr set.
phase trim
free mixer
basic sett
telemetr y
info disp
ser vo set.
D/R expo
free mixer
ser vo disp
fail-safe
teach/pupi
contr set.
heli mixer
swashp.mix
basic sett
telemetr y
info disp
Touch the central SET button of the right-hand touch-key
to open the menu point:
ABCDEF12
RFID
1.234
firmware ver.
2012/03/01(THU)
date
11:22:33s
time
0Mb
SD-CARD
0Mb
available
0%
This menu displays transmitter-specific information,
some of which can be altered where necessary and
sensible.
Use the arrow buttons  of the left or right-hand
touch-key to select the appropriate line, then touch the
central SET button of the right-hand touch-key. In the
162 Program description: Info display
highlighted value field you can now alter the default
value using the arrow buttons of the right-hand touchkey, and conclude your input with a further touch of the
central SET key.
In some circumstances our Service department may
also ask you for the version number.
Date
ABCDEF12
RFID
1.234
firmware ver.
2012/03/01(THU)
date
11:22:33s
time
0Mb
SD-CARD
RFID
ABCDEF12
RFID
1.234
firmware ver.
2012/03/01(THU)
date
11:22:33s
time
0Mb
SD-CARD
This line displays the transmitter’s identification number.
This number is specific to the transmitter, and is only
issued once for each transmitter. During the binding
process this ID is transmitted to the receiver (amongst
other data), so that it is able at any time to identify the
radio signals of “its” transmitter.
Version
ABCDEF12
RFID
1.234
firmware ver.
2012/03/01(THU)
date
11:22:33s
time
0Mb
SD-CARD
This line displays the version number of the transmitter
software currently installed.
By comparing the number shown here with the update
version available for the same product on the Internet at
www.graupner.de/en you can judge whether an update
to the transmitter’s operating system is necessary and
useful.
If necessary, select this line using the arrow buttons ** of
the left or right-hand touch-key, then select the month or
day field. A brief press of the central SET button of the
right-hand touch-key activates the corresponding value
field, and you can then set the year, month or day using
the arrow buttons of the right-hand touch-key. A further
brief press of the central SET button of the right-hand
touch-key concludes the input process. The available
range of years runs from 2000 to 2135.
The weekday, shown in brackets at far right in abbreviated form, is automatically generated from the date.
Notes:
•
The date and time of day can also be set
using the PC program available for the
corresponding product on the Internet at
www.graupner.de/en; this requires that the transmitter
should be connected to a PC in the appropriate manner.
• The date and time are protected from data loss due
to power failure - for example, when the battery is
swapped - by a user-replaceable buffer battery.
Time
SD card
ABCDEF12
RFID
1.11
firmware ver.
2011/03/11 (FRI)
date
11:22:33s
time
0MB
SD-CARD
If necessary, you can select this line, and the minutes
field, using the arrow buttons of the left or right-hand
touch-key. A brief press on the central SET button of the
right-hand touch-key activates the corresponding value
field, and you can then adjust the hours or minutes
using the arrow buttons of the right-hand touch-key. A
further brief press on the central SET button of the righthand touch-key concludes the entry process.
Note that the seconds display cannot be set directly;
instead it can be reset to “00” with a touch of the central
SET button of the right-hand touch-key.
Notes:
•
The date and time of day can also be set
using the PC program available for the
corresponding product on the Internet at
www.graupner.de/en; this requires that the transmitter
should be connected to a PC in the appropriate manner.
• The date and time are protected from data loss due
to power failure - for example, when the battery is
swapped - by a user-replaceable buffer battery.
ABCDEF12
RFID
1.234
firmware ver.
2012/03/01(THU)
date
11:22:33s
time
2048Mb
SD-CARD
This line displays the storage capacity in MB of a memory card installed in the transmitter.
Depending on the memory capacity of the micro-SD
or micro-SDHC memory card fitted in the transmitter,
it may take several minutes for the display to show the
correct value after you switch the transmitter on.
2012/03/01(THU)
date
time
11:22:33s
SD-CARD
2048Mb
available
1234Mb
60%
As already mentioned, it may take a certain amount of
time for the available memory to be displayed after you
switch the transmitter on, depending on the total capacity of the installed memory card.
available
1.234
firmware ver.
2012/03/01(THU)
date
time
11:22:33s
2048Mb
SD-CARD
available
1234Mb
Display of the available memory in MB.
As already mentioned, it may take a certain amount of
time for the available memory to be displayed after you
switch the transmitter on, depending on the total capacity of the installed memory card.
The next line down displays the available memory in
relation to the total memory capacity:
Program description: Info display 163
mx-16 HoTT programming techniques
Preparation, using a fixed-wing model aircraft as an example
Programming model data into an mx-16 HoTT …
… is easier than it might appear at first sight.
There is one basic rule which applies equally to all
programmable radio control transmitters, and not just to
the mx-16 HoTT: if the programming is to go “smoothly” and the systems work as expected, the receiving
system components must first be installed correctly in
the model, i. e. the mechanical systems must be firstrate. This means: ensure that each servo is at its correct
neutral position when you fit the output lever or disc
and connect the linkage to it. If you find this is not the
case, correct it! Remove the output arm, rotate it by one
or more splines and secure it again. If you use a servo
tester, e. g. the RC-Tester, Order No. 2894.12, to centre
the servos, you will find it very easy to find the “correct”
position.
Virtually all modern transmitters offer facilities for offsetting the neutral position of servos, but this is no substitute for a correct mechanical installation; this function is
only intended for fine tuning. Any substantial deviation
from the “0” position may result in additional asymmetry
when the signal undergoes further processing in the
transmitter. Think of it this way: if the chassis of a car
is distorted, you may be able to force the vehicle to run
straight by holding the steering wheel away from centre,
but it does not make the chassis any less bent, and the
basic problem remains.
Another important point is to set up the correct control
travels wherever possible by using the appropriate
linkage points in the mechanical system; this is much
more efficient than making major changes to the travel
settings at the transmitter. The same rule applies: electronic travel adjustment facilities are designed primarily
to compensate for minor manufacturing tolerances in the
164 Programming example - fixed-wing model
servos and for fine adjustment, and not to compensate
for poor-quality construction and defective installation
methods.
If two separate aileron servos are installed in a fixedwing model aircraft, the ailerons can also be employed
as flaps by deflecting both of them down, and as airbrakes by deflecting both of them up - simply by setting
up a suitable mixer (see the section starting on the next
double page). Such systems are generally more often
used in gliders and electric gliders than in power models.
braking effect of the crow system is provided primarily
by the down-movement of the flaps rather than the
up-movement of the ailerons, so in this case the servo
output arms should be angled aft, i. e. offset towards the
trailing edge of the wing, as this makes greater travel
available for the down-movement. When this combination of lowered flaps and raised ailerons is used, the
ailerons should only be raised by a moderate extent, as
their primary purpose in this configuration is to stabilise
and control the model rather than act as brakes.
You can “see” the difference in terms of braking effect by
deploying the crow system, then looking over and under
the wing from the front: the larger the projected area of
the deflected control surfaces, the greater the braking
effect.
Outboard ailerons
In such cases the servo output arms should be offset
forward by one spline relative to the neutral point, i. e.
towards the leading edge of the wing, and fitted on the
servo output shaft in that position.
The mechanical differential achieved by this asymmetrical installation takes into account the fact that the
braking effect of the up-going ailerons increases with
their angle of deflection, and this means that much less
travel is usually required in the down-direction than the
up-direction.
Similar reasoning applies to the installation of the flap
linkage when separately actuated flap servos are installed, designed to be used in a butterfly (crow) system.
Here again an asymmetrical linkage point is useful. The
Inboard camber-changing flaps
(This type of asymmetrical installation of the servo
output arms can also make sense when you are setting
up split flaps or landing flaps on a power model.)
Once you have completed your model and set up the
mechanical systems accurately in this way, you are
ready to start programming the transmitter. The instructions in this section are intended to reflect standard
practice by describing the basic model settings first,
and then refining and specialising them to complete the
set-up. After the initial test-flight, and in the course of
continued test-flying, you may need to adjust one or oth-
er of the model’s settings. As your piloting skills improve
and you gain experience, it is very likely that you will
feel the need to try out refinements such as expanded
control systems, and to cater for these requirements you
may find that the text deviates from the obvious order of
options, or that one or other of the options is mentioned
more than once.
On the other hand, it can certainly occur that not every
step described in these instructions is relevant to a
particular model, just as some users might miss the
description of a particular step which is relevant to his
model only …
Regardless of all this, it is worthwhile thinking carefully
about a sensible layout of the transmitter controls at this
point, just before you start programming the model data.
If the model in question is one with the emphasis on
“power” - whether the power of an electric motor or
internal-combustion engine (glow motor) - you will
probably encounter few problems in this matter, because
the two stick units are primarily employed to control the
four basic functions “power control (= throttle)”, “rudder”,
“elevator” and “aileron”. Nevertheless, you still have to
call up the …
“Base settings” menu (pages 74 … 81)
GRAUBELE
mod name
stick mode
1
no
motor at C1
CH8 delay
yes
tail type
normal
… and define your preferred throttle direction, i. e.
throttle minimum forward (“Idle forward”) or back (“Idle
back”), because the program’s default setting is “none”
(i. e. no motor) when you first set up a model memory.
The basic difference between “none” or “none/inv” and
“throttle min. forward / back” is the effect of the Ch 1 trim.
The trim is effective over the full stick travel if “none (/
inv)” is entered, but it only affects the idle range if you
enter “throttle min. forward or back”. However, it also
affects the “direction of effect” of the Ch 1 stick, i. e. if
you switch from “forward” to “back” or vice versa, you
do not also have to reverse the direction of the throttle
(or brake) servo. For safety reasons you will also see a
warning message, and hear an audible warning, if you
switch the transmitter on with the throttle stick positioned
towards “full-throttle” - but only if you have already set
“throttle min. forward or back”.
stop
throttle
too
high !
5.2
0:33h
M
0:00
0:00
#01
HoTT
0.0V
Your choice of “none” (no motor) or “throttle min. forward
or back” also affects the range of mixers available in the
“Fixed-wing mixers” menu. The mixers “Brake  NN *”
are only present if you choose “none” (no motor) or
“none/inv”; otherwise they are suppressed.
In addition to these basic matters you will certainly need
to consider carefully how best to control any “auxiliary
functions” present on your model.
In contrast, if your model is a glider or electric glider the
whole situation may be rather different. The immediate
question is: what is the best way of operating the motor
and braking system? Now, some solutions have proved
to be practical, and others less so.
For example, it is not a good idea to be forced to let
go of one of the primary sticks in order to extend the
airbrakes or deploy the crow braking system when your
glider is on the landing approach. It surely makes more
sense to set up switchable functions for the Ch 1 stick
(see example 4 on page 172), or to assign the braking
system to the throttle stick, and shift the motor control
to a slider - or even a switch. With this type of model the
electric motor is often little more than a “self-launching
system”, and is used either to haul the model into the
sky at full power, or to pull it from one area of lift to the
next at, say half-power, and for such models a three-position switch is usually quite adequate. If the switch is
positioned where you can easily reach it, then you can
turn the motor on and off without having to let go of the
sticks - even on the landing approach.
Incidentally, similar thinking can be applied to flap
control systems, regardless of whether they are “just”
the ailerons, or full-span (combination) control surfaces
which are raised and lowered in parallel.
Once you are satisfied that all these preparations have
been completed successfully, programming can commence.
* NN = Nomen Nominandum (name to be stated)
Programming example - fixed-wing model 165
First steps in programming a new model
Example: non-powered fixed-wing model aircraft
When programming a new model you should start by
activating the …
“select model” sub-menu
(page 70)
… in the “Model memory” menu. Use the arrow buttons
 of the left or right-hand touch-key to select a free
model memory …
01
02
03
04
05
06
free
free
free
free
free
R08
… then touch the central SET button of the right-hand
touch-key. You are now immediately requested to select
the type of model you wish to program.
Sel model type
• Once you have called up the “Model select” option it
is not possible to interrupt the process, i. e. you must
choose one or other model type. Even if you switch
off the transmitter at this point, you cannot avoid this
select procedure. However, if you make a mistake
you can always correct it simply by erasing the model memory.
• If the battery voltage is too low, you will not be able
to change model memories for safety reasons. The
screen then displays an appropriate message:
not possible now
voltage too low
Once you have overcome this initial hurdle, you may
need to bind the receiver installed in the model to this
model memory in the …
“Base settings” menu
(pages 74 … 81)
This is accomplished by moving to the “rx bind” line:
( empty mod mem )
Since in this example we are setting up a fixed-wing
model, we simply confirm the fixed-wing model symbol
with a brief press on the central SET button of the righthand touch-key; the screen now reverts to the basic
display.
Notes:
•
Naturally you can also use the pre-defined model memory 01 for programming
your first model; this is the “fixed-wing
model” type by default.
166 Programming example - fixed-wing model
phase 2
phase 3
phase 4
receiv out
rx bind
takeoff –––
speed –––
landing –––
–––
button of the right-hand touch-key, you automatically
move to this line:
In this line you trigger the bind process between model
memory and receiver, as described in detail on pages
80. Without this step you cannot address the receiver.
The next step is to press the  arrow button of the
left-hand or right-hand four-way touch-key to move up
into the first line, where you can start the actual model
programming in the “mod name” line:
mod name
stick mode
motor at C1
CH8 delay
tail type
When you confirm the model selection the
following message appears in the basic
display for a few seconds:
BIND N/A
OK
If you confirm your choice by briefly pressing the SET
no
yes
normal
At this point you can enter the “Model name” by touching the central SET button of the right-hand touch-key in
order to move to the character table:
0123456789 : ;
?
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNO
PQRSTUVWXYZ
model name
Note:
1
GRAUB
You should also check the settings for “Stick mode” and
“Motor at Ch 1” and change them if necessary:
• “none”:
The brake system is “retracted” at the forward position of the throttle / brake stick; the “Ch8 delayed” option and the “Brake  NN*” mixers in the “Wing mixers” menu are activated.
* NN = Nomen Nominandum (name to be stated)
In the “Aileron / flap” line of the “Basic settings”
menu you can select “1AIL”, “2AIL” and “1/2AIL
1/2FL”, and in the “Wing mixer” menu the mixer
“Brake  NN*”, plus all mixers “from” and “to” flaps,
are activated.
The warning message “Throttle too high” - see pages 36 and 67 - and the “Motor stop” option in the
“Basic settings” menu are disabled.
• “none/inv”:
The brake system is “retracted” at the back position
of the throttle / brake stick; the “Ch8 delayed” option
and the “Brake  NN*” mixers in the “Wing mixers”
menu are activated.
In the “Aileron / flap” line of the “Basic settings”
menu you can select “1AIL”, “2AIL” and “1/2AIL
1/2FL”, and in the “Wing mixer” menu the mixer
“Brake  NN*”, plus all mixers “from” and “to” flaps,
are activated.
The warning message “Throttle too high” - see pages 36 and 67 - and the “Motor stop” option in the
“Basic settings” menu are disabled.
• “Throttle min. forward or rear”:
Ch1 trim takes effect forward or back, and the “Motor stop” option in the “Basic settings” menu is activated.
If the throttle stick is too far towards full-throttle when
the transmitter is switched on, the warning “Throttle
too high” appears to alert you to this; see pages 36
and 67.
In the “Basic settings” menu the “Ch8 delayed” option and the “Brake  N.N.*” mixers in the “Wing mixers” menu are disabled.
Note:
As mentioned previously, selecting “motor” or
“no motor” also affects the range of mixers
available in the “Fixed-wing mixers” menu.
For this reason we shall initially consider “none” (no
motor) in the following programming example.
In the next two lines you select the basic arrangement
of the servos in the model, and inform the transmitter of
your choice:
stick mode
motor at C1
CH8 delay
tail type
aile/flap
1
no
yes
normal
2aile
tail type:
“normal”, “V-tail”, “delt/FlW” or
“2elev sv”
aile/flap:
1 or 2 aileron servos and 0, 1 or 2 flap
servos
At this juncture - if not before - you should check that
the servos are connected to the receiver in the standard
Graupner sequence:
Receiver power supply
Auxiliary function
Flap servo or left flap servo
Right aileron servo
Rudder servo or V-tail
Elevator servo or V-tail
Aileron servo or left aileron servo
Airbrakes or throttle / speed controller
or speed controller (electric)
Right flap servo
Notes:
•
If you set up a V-tail, but the “up / down”
and / or “left / right” functions work the
wrong way round, please refer to the table in the right-hand column on page 63 for the
remedy. The same procedure can be used if you set
up flaperons (superimposed ailerons and flaps), and
they work the wrong way round.
• The following settings apply to a model with a “normal” tail and no motor (“none”); if your model has
a V-tail, the settings can be adopted virtually unchanged. However, if the model is a delta or flying
wing, the situation is not quite so straightforward. A
special programming example covering this model type will be found in the section starting on page
178.
In the …
“Servo settings” menu
S1
S2
S3
S4
S5
rev
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
cent
(page 92)
100% 100%
100% 100%
100% 100%
100% 100%
100% 100%
trav +
… ... you can set various parameters relating to the servos, i. e. “direction of rotation”, “neutral setting” and
“servo travel”, to suit the requirements of the model.
By “requirements” we mean adjustments to servo centre
and servo travel which are needed to compensate for
minor tolerances in servos and slight inaccuracies on
the model itself.
Programming example - fixed-wing model 167
Note:
Note:
The facilities provided in this menu for setting
asymmetrical servo travels are NOT
intended as a means of setting up differential
travel on ailerons and / or camber-changing flaps. There
are more suitable options for this in the form of specific
functions in the “Fixed-wing mixers” menu; see the first
two options in the picture on the right.
This menu will show a varying range of
options depending on the information you
have entered in the “Base settings” menu.
In the illustration above, the full range is shown, as
generated by the entries “2AIL 2FL” in the “Ail/Flap” line,
and “none (/inv) in the “Motor at Ch 1” line.
Once you have completed the settings described thus
far, a fixed-wing or powered model aircraft (the latter
if you enter the idle direction of the throttle stick in the
“Motor at Ch 1” line of the “Base settings” menu) will, in
principle, fly.
However, there are no “refinements” in this set-up, and
it is the refinements which will give you more long-term
pleasure in your flying. Assuming that you are already
capable of controlling your model safely, it’s time to get
a taste of these extra facilities; to this end we now move
on to the …
“Wing mixers” menu
diff aile.
diff flaps
ail rudd
ail flaps
brak elev
brak flap
brak aile
elev flap
elev aile
elev
flap
aile
flap
diff–red
(pages 108 … 113)
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
–––
–––
–––
–––
–––
–––
–––
–––
–––
–––
–––
168 Programming example - fixed-wing model
Of particular interest at the moment are “AIL-Diff.”
(aileron differential) and the “AIL  RUD” (aileron 
rudder) mixer, sometimes known as a combi-switch,
and perhaps the mixers “Brake  AIL” and “Brake 
FLAP”.
As already described in detail on pages 109 and 110,
the purpose of “AIL-Diff.” (aileron differential) is to
eliminate adverse yaw.
When a model aircraft turns, the down-going aileron
produces more drag than the up-going one if both move
through the same angle, and this causes the model to
yaw in the opposite direction to the turn. This can be
eliminated by setting differential aileron travel. A value
between 20% and 40% is usually a good starting point,
but the “perfect” setting nearly always has to be established by practical testing.
The same applies to the “FL-Diff.” (flap differential)
option if your model also features two camber-changing
flap servos, assuming that the flaps are also to be used
as ailerons, e. g. using the “AIL  FL” mixer.
The “AIL  RUD” (aileron  rudder) mixer serves a
similar purpose, but also makes many models generally
easier to handle when turning. A value of around 50% is
usually a practical starting point. However, it is advisable
to be able to switch this function off, particularly if you
have ambitions as an aerobatic pilot; this is done by
assigning a physical switch to the mixer (for example,
the writer switches this mixer off “automatically” when he
switches into the “Speed” flight phase, simply by assigning the same switch to both options).
It is usually only necessary to set up a “Brake  ELE”
(brake  elevator) mixer if your model suffers an
excessive change of speed when you deploy the braking
system. The danger is that you might need to retract
the brakes again on the landing approach when you
realise the model will “land short”; if its airspeed is too
low when you retract the brakes, the model will just fall
to the ground at that point. If you set up such a mixer it is
important to test the setting at a safe height, and adjust
the trim compensation if necessary.
If you have selected “2AIL” or “2AIL 2FL” in the “Aileron /
Flap” line of the “Base settings” menu …
stick mode
motor at C1
CH8 delay
tail type
aile/flap
1
no
yes
normal
2aile
… and if you wish to be able to deflect both ailerons up
using the throttle / brake stick (Ch 1), then a suitable
value should be entered in the “Brake  AIL” line.
diff aile.
ail rudd
brak elev
brak aile
elev aile
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
–––
–––
–––
–––
–––
In principle the same applies to the “Brake  FL” line,
which also becomes available if you have selected “2AIL
2FL”, although the set value should cause the flaps to
deflect as far as possible in the downward direction
when the brake stick is operated. It is important to
ensure that the servos do not strike their mechanical
end-stops. To achieve this, you may need to limit the servo travel(s) for the servos concerned using the “LIMIT-”
or “LIMIT+” line on the “RX SERVO” display page of the
“Telemetry” menu.
If the ailerons are set up to act as simple brakes, as described previously, or as part of the braking arrangement
in a butterfly (crow) system, then you should always enter a value for “Diff.-Red.” (“differential reduction” - see
page 113) - selecting 100% is the safe option here!
Differential reduction means that aileron differential is
suppressed proportionally only when you operate the
airbrake stick. The purpose of this is to increase the
down-going aileron travel on the landing approach, with
the aim of improving aileron response.
If the wing is equipped with two camber-changing flap
servos in addition to two separately actuated ailerons,
then the “AIL  FL” (aileron  flap) mixer transfers
the aileron movements to the flaps; we suggest that the
flaps should not follow the movement of the ailerons to a
greater extent than about 50%.
Note:
If you have only installed one flap servo, you
should leave this mixer at 0%.
… 8) should be used for this.
Note:
We strongly recommend that you reduce the
travel of the flaps to about 25% in the
“Transmitter control settings” menu, as
this gives finer control of the flap positions using the
selected transmitter control.
The remaining options in the “Fixed-wing mixers” menu
are designed to provide further fine-tuning of multi-flap
wing systems, and are largely self-explanatory.
When you have completed the model-specific settings
up to this point, you are probably ready to consider the
model’s first flight. At this juncture you should certainly
take the time to carry out a series of “dry runs”, i. e.
check all the settings thoroughly while the model is still
on the ground. Remember that a serious programming
error may damage more than just the model. If you are
not sure of any point, please ask an experienced model
pilot for advice.
“D/R Expo” menu (page 102)
aile 122%
elev 111%
rudd 100%
+11%
+22%
0%
DUAL
EXPO
2
2
–––
… in order to adjust the overall set-up to suit your
requirements and flying style.
The Dual Rate function is used to adjust the relationship
between stick travel and control surface travel (see page
102). However, if it is only the model’s control response
around neutral which is too powerful for comfortable
flying, i. e. the maximum travels are acceptable, then
“Exponential” can be employed, either instead of Dual
Rates or in addition to them. If a physical switch is assigned to this function, you can switch between two Dual
Rate / Expo settings while the model is flying.
If during the test phase you realise that one or other of
the settings needs to be changed in order to tailor the
model’s control response to your preferences - perhaps
the servo travels are too great or too small overall - then
we suggest that you turn to the …
The “FL  AIL” (flap  aileron) mixer works in the
opposite direction; depending on the layout of the model
we suggest values between about 50% and 100% for
this option. The flaps are controlled using the transmitter
control or switch assigned to the input “E6”. Preferably,
however, one of the rotary proportional controls (CTRL 6
Programming example - fixed-wing model 169
Including an electric power system when programming a model
your speed controller to receiver output 8, moving to the
…
“Base settings” menu,(pages 74 … 81)
… and setting the “Ch8 delayed” option to “no”:
An electric power system can be controlled in various
ways:
The simplest method of including such a power plant
in a model program is to use the throttle / brake stick
(Ch 1). However, in the preceding programming instructions we have already reserved the Ch 1 transmitter
control for the airbrakes, which means that we have
to explore other possibilities for controlling the motor:
one is to use the switchable solution described in the
section starting on page 172, and another is to use an
alternative transmitter control. A suitable option is one
of the two three-position switches SW 4/5 or 6/7, and
another is one of the rotary proportional controls CTRL
6 … 8. However, another alternative would be one of the
two-position switches. The main reason for your choice
ought to be that the switch is within easy reach of your
fingers.
Before we turn to the individual examples, it is very
important to note that the “transition delay” which occurs
when you change flight phases also affects other switching processes which are triggered simultaneously, for
example motor ON / OFF.
However, you may wish - especially in an emergency to be able to switch the motor off instantly, i. e. without
the transition delay. In this case it is advisable to make
use of the “Ch8 delayed yes / no” option in the “Base
settings” menu. This is accomplished by connecting
170 Programming example - fixed-wing model
GRAUBELE
mod name
stick mode
1
no
motor at C1
no
CH8 delay
tail type
normal
Example 1
Using one of the rotary proportional controls
CTRL 6 … 8
If one of these transmitter controls is used, the set-up is
extremely easy. All you have to do is connect the speed
controller to any of the receiver servo sockets 5 … 8
which is vacant.
However, please bear in mind that outputs 2
+ 5 and 6 + 7 may already be linked
together, depending on the model type you
have selected and the number of aileron and flap servos
in your model.
Connect your speed controller to the next vacant input,
and assign one of the rotary proportional controls CTRL
6 … 8 - in our example CTRL 7 - to the selected input for example, “I8”. This is accomplished in the …
“Transmitter control settings” menu
(page 94)
Use the arrow buttons  of the left or right-hand
touch-key to select the desired line. Touching the central
SET button of the right-hand touch-key activates “Switch
/ transmitter control assignment”. Now turn the knob of
the rotary proportional control: after a brief delay the
entry “Transmitter control 7” will appear in the highlighted field:
I5
I6
I7
I8
free
free
free
ctrl 7
+100%
+100%
+100%
+100%
+100%
+100%
+100%
+100%
tr v
+
In the third column you can adjust servo travel to suit the
speed controller you are using; alternatively you could
use the “-Travel+” column in the …
“Servo settings” menu S4
S5
S6
S7
S8
rev
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
cent
(page 92).
100% 100%
100% 100%
100% 100%
100% 100%
100% 100%
trav +
The last stage is to check the settings, so move from the
basic display to “Servo display”, typically by simultaneously touching the  buttons of the left-hand touchkey: In the “OFF” position of the rotary control CTRL 7
the control channel you have selected - in this example
channel “8” - should be at -100%, and at the “full-throttle”
setting at +100%.
Example 2
Using a two-position switch, SW 2, 3 or 8
This variant implements a pure ON / OFF function, and
results in the motor starting “abruptly” … unless the
speed controller you are using features what is known
as a “soft start” function.
At the receiving end you need either a simple electronic
switch or - if you want a smoother motor start - a suitable speed controller.
The settings for this arrangement are entered in the …
“Transmitter control settings” menu (page 94)
First check which receiver socket (5 or higher) is available for connection to your speed controller. If you have
assigned two aileron servos in the “Base settings”
menu, and if you have not connected any other auxiliary
function, then this would be channel 6; if your model
features two aileron servos and two flap servos, then
channel 8 would be available for connecting the speed
controller; the latter option is the one we wish to use in
this example.
First set the selected switch to the “OFF” position, then
use the arrow buttons  of the left or right-hand
touch-key to select the desired line in the menu. Touch
the central SET button of the right-hand touch-key to
activate “Switch / transmitter control assignment”, then
move the selected switch from the “OFF” position to
the “ON” position. The highlighted field now shows the
switch number together with a symbol which indicates
the direction of switching:
I5 free
I6 free
I7 free
I8
3
+100%
+100%
+100%
+100%
+100%
+100%
+100%
+100%
tr v
+
In the third column you can adjust servo travel to suit the
speed controller you are using; alternatively you could
use the “Servo travel” column in the …
“Servo settings” menu S4
S5
S6
S7
S8
rev
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
cent
(page 92).
100% 100%
100% 100%
100% 100%
100% 100%
100% 100%
trav +
The last stage is to check the settings, so move from
the basic display to “Servo display” by simultaneously
touching the  buttons of the left-hand touch-key: in
the switch’s “OFF” position, the control channel you have
selected - in our example this is channel “8” - should be
at -100%, and at the “full-throttle” setting at +100%.
Example 3
Using one of the three-position switches SW 4/5 or
6/7
This variant implements a three-stage solution for
switching an electric motor on and off, and also results
in an “abrupt “ motor start-up … unless the speed controller you are using features what is known as a “soft
start” function.
At the receiving end you need a suitable speed controller.
First check which receiver socket (5 or higher) is
available to connect your speed controller. If you have
assigned two aileron servos in the “Base settings”
menu, and if you have not connected any other auxiliary
function, then this would be channel 6; if your model
features two aileron servos and two flap servos, then
channel 8 would be available for connecting the speed
controller; the latter option is the one we will use in this
example.
Move to the …
“Transmitter control settings” menu
(page 94)
… and use the arrow buttons  of the left or righthand touch-key to select the desired line. Briefly press
the central SET button of the right-hand touch-key to
activate “Switch / transmitter control assignment”. Move
the selected three-position switch; the highlighted field
now shows the number of this transmitter control, for
example “Transmitter control 9”.
I5
I6
I7
I8
free
free
free
ctrl 9
+100%
+100%
+100%
+100%
+100%
+100%
+100%
+100%
tr v
+
In the third column you can adjust servo travel to suit the
speed controller you are using; alternatively you could
use the “Servo travel” column in the …
Programming example - fixed-wing model 171
Controlling the electric motor and butterfly (crow)
system using the Ch 1 stick
“Servo settings” menu S4
S5
S6
S7
S8
rev
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
cent
(page 92).
100% 100%
100% 100%
100% 100%
100% 100%
100% 100%
trav +
The last stage is to check the settings, so move from
the basic display to “Servo display” by simultaneously
touching the  buttons of the left-hand touch-key: in
the (upper) “OFF” position of the three-position switch
the control channel you have selected - in our example
this is channel “8” - should be at -100%. If you now move
the switch toggle to the centre position, the bar should
be in the middle, and at the (lower) “full-throttle” setting it
should be at +100%.
172 Programming example - fixed-wing model
Example 4
Butterfly / crow system as landing aid: ailerons up,
flaps down
Before we start the programming of this fourth example,
and turn our attention to expanding the basic programming we have already discussed, we need to consider
briefly the position of the throttle / brake stick at “motor
OFF” or “brake OFF”. Usually the Ch 1 stick is moved
forward to open the throttle, and back to extend the
brakes. However, if you adopt this “classic” configuration,
and switch, say, from “motor OFF” (stick “back”) to the
braking system, “full brake” would immediately be applied, and vice versa: if you switch from “brakes retracted” to power, this would instantly switch to “full power”.
It is certainly possible to make a “virtue” out of this
“vice”: a “glider pilot” - usually flying with “brakes retracted = forward” will only switch to motor “ON” when necessary, and then reduce power to suit the situation (and we hope - does not forget to move the Ch 1 stick back to
the “forward” position when switching back). In contrast,
a typical “power pilot” would probably operate with the
reverse priority, i. e. he would only switch to “brake” when
necessary, etc. In any case, it is possible to avoid these
inter-connected effects by positioning the “zero point” of
both systems so that they coincide. The above considerations mean that a “glider pilot” will probably prefer the
“zero point forward” arrangement, while a “power pilot”
might well decide on “zero point back”.
The mx-16 HoTT transmitter can cope with whichever
arrangement you prefer. However, the following section
assumes that both “OFF” positions will be set to “forward”. If you prefer the alternative arrangement, there
is no problem: the only difference compared with the
version described here is that you would select “none/
inv” in the “Motor at Ch 1” line of the “Base settings”
menu instead of “none”. All the other settings can be
adopted as described.
In the …
“Transmitter control settings” menu
(page 94)
GRAUBELE
mod name
stick mode
1
no
motor at C1
CH8 delay
yes
tail type
normal
… leave the “motor at Ch 1” line at “none” if you have
set “Motor ON = forward”, or switch to “none/inv” if
preferred. This is essential, otherwise the “Brake 1 
NN *” mixers which we need will be suppressed in the
“Fixed-wing mixers” menu.
Important Note:
As it is essential to set the motor to
“none”, this also automatically disables
the “Throttle too high” power-on warning!
For this reason please take great care to set the Ch
1 stick to the correct position before you switch the
receiving system on.
The next step is to ensure that the speed controller connected to receiver output 1 is switched off “at the right
end”. To accomplish this you may have to move to the …
* NN = Nomen Nominandum (name to be stated)
“Servo settings” menu S1
S2
S3
S4
S5
rev
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
cent
(page 92)
100% 100%
100% 100%
100% 100%
100% 100%
100% 100%
trav +
… and reverse the direction of servo 1.
For safety’s sake you should check this
setting now, before you continue with the
programming procedure.
Take the transmitter and model to a location where it
is safe to run the motor. Switch the transmitter on, and
move the Ch 1 stick to the motor “OFF” position, i. e. either fully forward or back. Hold your model firmly, or ask
a friend to hold it for you. Check that the propeller is free
to rotate without causing havoc, then connect the flight
battery and switch your model’s receiving system on.
If the motor does NOT run when the stick is in the “forward” or “back” position (as appropriate), then everything
is in order. However, please check the system anyway by
gradually advancing the stick until the motor begins to
run. When you are satisfied, stop the motor, then switch
off the receiving system in the model and finally switch
off the transmitter.
Note:
If the motor does not start, or spins in the
wrong direction, this indicates that there are
other problems which you must correct
before you continue with programming. For example,
check the wiring of your motor, and refer to the operating
instructions supplied with your speed controller.
Once you are confident that the direction of the Ch 1
stick is “correct” as far as the motor is concerned, the
next step is to ensure that you can switch its effect on
the motor on and off, so that you can also control the
braking system. This is carried out in the …
“Free mixers” menu M1
M2
M3
typ
MIX1
c1
??
??
fro
to
2
… where you need to program a free mixer “c1  c1”.
When you have done this, use the arrow button  of the
left or right-hand touch-key to move to the column above
symbol, and assign your selected “change-over
the
switch” to this mixer; for example SW 2. This is done by
activating the switch assignment by touching the central
SET button of the right-hand touch-key, and moving the
switch from “forward” to “back”, i. e. towards you.
With the mixer switched on, move to the column above
symbol using the arrow button  of the left or
the
right-hand touch-key, and then on to the second screen
page by touching the central SET button of the righthand touch-key.
At this point you should set an initial SYMmetrical mixer
value of -100%.
c1
tr v –100% –100%
offs
0%
SYM ASY
(pages 127 … 132)
c1
??
??
c1
Now move to the “Offs” line: when you do this, the SYM
and ASY fields are replaced by STO and SET. With
the STO button highlighted, move the Ch 1 stick to the
“OFF” position you have selected, and then touch the
central SET button of the right-hand touch-key: the value
to the right of “Offs” now changes from 0% to approx.
+100%, and the graphic display of the mixer curve
displayed on the right also changes accordingly:
MIX1
c1
c1
tr v –100% –100%
offs
+100%
STO SET
If you now touch the  buttons of the left-hand touchkey simultaneously to move to the …
(page 133),
“Servo display” menu
… you can immediately check the effect of the settings
you have entered so far: with the mixer switched off,
the bar display for Channel 1 follows the movement of
the Ch 1 stick. With the mixer switched on it stops - as
shown - at around -100%.
Programming example - fixed-wing model 173
1
–100 %
2
0%
3
0%
4
0%
5
0%
6
0%
7
0%
8
0%
Note:
If you carry out this test with the receiving system and power system switched
on, please take great care that you
operate the change-over switch only in the “motor
OFF” position! If you ignore this, there is a danger
that the power system will be severely overloaded
by being switched on abruptly, and it could even
suffer damage. For the same reason you should be
careful only to use the change-over switch at the
“motor OFF” setting when you are flying the model.
To conclude the programming procedure, return the selected “change-over switch” to the “motor ON” position,
i. e. “forward”; move back to the multi-function menu and
from there to the …
“Fixed-wing mixers” menu (pages 108 … 113)
where - assuming that you have not already done this
in your general model programming - you can select
the “Brake  AIL” line and set the desired aileron
travel when the Ch 1 stick is operated in the up direction
(“Brake”). In the column above the
symbol touch the
central SET button of the right-hand touch-key before
assigning your selected “change-over switch” by moving
your preferred switch from “forward” to “back”.
174 Programming example - fixed-wing model
diff aile.
ail rudd
brak elev
brak aile
elev aile
+33%
+55%
–5%
+44%
0%
–––
–––
–––
2
–––
Note:
The settings shown here are just examples,
and must not be adopted under any
circumstances without careful checking.
If your model also features camber-changing flaps, and
you have therefore selected “2AIL 2FL” in the “Aile
/ flap” line of the “Base settings” menu, locate the
“change-over switch” you have just operated (in this
case switch 2), move it “forward” again and switch to
the “Brake  FL” line using the arrow buttons 
of the left or right-hand touch-key. You can now set the
desired down-deflection of the flaps when the Ch 1 stick
is moved (this flap position is termed “crow” or “butterfly”;
see also page 111), and assign the external switch
which also acts as the change-over switch by moving
it from the “forward” to the “back” position, as already
described.
If you now return to the “Servo display” menu and move
the Ch 1 stick alone, you will see that the bar display for
Channel 1 either remains at around -100% while the displays for channels 2 + 5 (and also the flaps 6 + 7, if set
up) follow the stick movement, or the other way round:
when the switch is operated, the latter stay at around the
mid-point, and only the Channel 1 display moves.
1
–100 %
2
+ 88 %
3
0%
4
0%
5
– 88 %
6
0%
7
0%
8
0%
Operating the timers using the Ch 1 stick or a switch SW 1 … 9
If, following on from the model programming described
on the preceding pages, you have decided on Example 4 from the previous page, or you are using the Ch 1
stick (throttle / brake stick) to control motor power - independently of this programming example - then you can
use the associated control switch to turn the stopwatch
on and off automatically.
To assign this control switch, move the Ch 1 stick to the
Idle position, then move to the “Timers” line in the …
“Base settings” menu(pages 74 … 81)
Briefly touch the central SET button of the right-hand
touch-key to activate the switch assignment, then select
the input field above the switch symbol and move the
throttle / brake stick from its idle position in the direction
of “full throttle”. Depending on the direction of movement, the switch “C1l” or “C2l” will appear on the screen
at a particular position of the Ch 1 stick:
motor at C1
C8 delay
tail type
aile/flap
timer
no
no
normal
2aile
0:00 C2
If you now move the stick back towards idle, you will see
that the switch symbol changes again at around 80% of
stick travel: between the “idle position” and the switching point the switch symbol is “open”, beyond this it is
“closed” (see “Control switches” on page 59).
If you now repeatedly press the central ESC button of
the left-hand touch-key to return to the transmitter’s
basic display, in order to check the system, you will see
that the stopwatch and flight timer start running when
you move the stick past the switching point in the direction of full-throttle, and that the stopwatch alone halts
again when you move the stick back to the idle position.
When the stopwatch is halted, you can stop the flight
timer by touching the central ESC button of the left-hand
touch-key, and then reset both timers to their starting
value by simultaneously touching the two arrow buttons
 of the right-hand touch-key (CLEAR) … or re-start
them by moving the stick beyond the switching point
again.
GRAUBELE
#01
5.2V
3:33h
stop
flt
2:22
11:11
M
HoTT
5.5V
With the stopwatch halted, touch the central ESC button
of the left-hand touch-key (CLEAR) button in the basic
display, so that the stopwatch switches to the “Timer”
function. The timer can now be started and stopped
using the throttle control.
Alternatively, if you control your motor using one of the
switches SW 1 … 4 or 6/7, as described in Examples 2
or 3, you do not need any of the previously described
control switches. All you need to do is locate the switch
which you use to turn your motor on and off, and assign
the same switch to the “Timers”, with the same switching
direction, so that they start running at the same moment
you turn the motor on.
In contrast, if you have decided on the solution described in Example 1, then unfortunately there is no alternative but to operate the motor and timers separately.
Tip:
When using an electric motor the motor run
is usually limited by the capacity of the
battery, and in this case you would normally
set the stopwatch to “count down”. Simply enter the
maximum permitted motor run, e. g. “5 min.”. As
described on pages 77 and 86, the transmitter’s
sounder starts to emit warning tones “30 sec” before
“zero”.
motor at C1
C8 delay
tail type
aile/flap
timer
no
no
normal
2aile
5:00 C2
Programming example - fixed-wing model 175
Using flight phases
Within any of the twenty model memories you can
program up to four different flight phases (states of
flight), each incorporating settings which can be entirely
different from the others.
Each flight phase can be called up by means of a
switch. Flight phases represent the simplest and most
convenient method of switching between different model
settings in flight, and are programmed for different
stages of a typical flight, such as “normal”, “thermal”,
“speed”, “distance” etc.
We assume that you have already programmed the
model in the transmitter’s model memory, set it up
carefully, test-flown it and trimmed it out properly. First
move to the …
three-position switches SW 4/5 or 6/7, located at front
left and right on the transmitter.
Each of the two end-points of this switch should be
assigned to one flight phase, starting from the centre
position. We recommend that the switch direction should
match the phase numbering: as shown in the left-hand
illustration, for example, “Phase 2” is “forward” from the
centre position, while “Phase 3” is “back” (towards you).
Select the appropriate line, name, and switch assignment in the “usual” way, i. e. using the various touchkeys.
aile/flap
timer
phase 2
phase 3
phase 4
“Base settings” menu(pages 74 … 81)
aile/flap
timer
phase 2
phase 3
phase 4
5:00
takeoff
speed
landing
2ail2fl
2
–––
–––
–––
… and then to the line “Phase 2”, “Phase 3” and / or
“Phase 4”, where you can either accept the default
name or assign a specific, more appropriate, name to
each flight phase. The purpose of this name is just to
help you differentiate between the flight phases; it has
no significance in terms of programming. It will later
appear in the transmitter’s basic screen display, and also
in the “Phase trim” and “D/R Expo” menu.
A physical switch must be assigned so that you can
select the different flight phases. The ideal one for
switching a maximum of three flight phases is one of the
176 Programming example - fixed-wing model
5:00
takeoff
speed
landing
the control surfaces, and especially the wing flaps, are
the same.
To change these settings, call up the …
“Phase trim” menu
(page 106)
… move the phase switch (or switches) to the appropriate position, and enter the desired values in the standard way by touching the input buttons, in a similar way to
the method of adjusting transmitter control centres and
offsets with other radio control systems.
P H A S E T R I M
normal
0%
0%
0%
takeoff
+8%
4% +2%
speed
–7% –5% –3%
 thermal +10% +5% +2%
FLA
AIL ELE
2ail2fl
2
4
–––
5
Note:
In principle it makes no difference which
names you assign to the various phases with the exception of Phase 1, which is
assigned the name “normal”, and is always active when
flight phases 2, 3 and 4 are disabled.
For general model flying three flight phases are usually
quite sufficient:
• “Launch” or “Thermal” for launch and “staying up”,
• “Normal” for normal conditions, and
• “Speed” for flying in “top gear”.
At this point all three phases have been set up and
assigned names, and you can switch between them;
however … if you operate the phase switch you will soon
notice that nothing has changed, i. e. all the settings for
If you now switch the receiving system on and select the
different phases in turn, you will see a difference in control surface response. The differences are also reflected
in the bar display for the servos in the “Servo display”
menu, which you can call up from virtually any menu
position by simultaneously touching the  buttons of
the left-hand touch-key.
Note:
Depending on the information you have
entered in the “aile/flap” line of the “Base
settings” menu, the “ELE” column alone, the
“AIL” and “ELE” columns, or - as shown above - “FLAP”,
“AIL” and “ELE” may appear on the screen for “Phase
trimming”.
Programming example: servos running in parallel
In some cases a second servo is required to run in
parallel with an existing servo; for example, if a second
elevator or rudder is to be actuated by a separate servo,
or where a second servo is needed to cope with very
high control forces, or where two servos are required for
a large control surface due to the high forces involved.
This task could be solved simply by connecting both servos together in the model using a conventional Y-lead.
However, this has the drawback that the linked servos
cannot be adjusted individually from the transmitter, i. e.
you forfeit the basic advantage of the computer radio
control system: separate adjustment of individual servos
from the transmitter.
Another option would be to call up the Telemetry menu
and use its “Channel mapping” option instead of a
simple Y-lead; see page 140. However, the simplest
method is to use the transmitter’s software facilities. For
example, it is easy to set up …
Two elevator servos
… to operate in parallel. First move to the …
“Base settings” menu(page 74 … 81)
mod name
stick mode
1
idle re.
motor at C1
cut off –100% +150% –––
tail type
2elev sv
… and set “2elev sv” in the “tail type” line.
The two elevator servos are then connected to receiver
output sockets 3 and 8.
Two rudder servos
In this example we will connect two rudders “in parallel”
using the “Free mixers” menu. The second rudder could
be connected to receiver output 8, which is not already
in use.
The first step is to move to the …
“Free mixers” menu
M1
M2
M3
second rudder control channel”, with suitable servo
travel settings. An offset of +100% is then selected for
both mixers, as the Ch 1 stick is (usually) at its top endpoint when the airbrakes are retracted, and the winglet
rudders are only required to deflect outwards proportionally when the brakes are extended.
(pages 127 … 132)
tr
rd
??
??
8
??
??
typ
fro
to
… and set up a mixer “Tr RUD  8”.
In the “Type” column select the “Tr” setting, so that the
rudder trim affects both rudder servos.
Finally switch to the graphics page and set a SYMmetrical mixer input of +100%:
MIX1 tr rd
8
tr v +100% +100%
Offs
0%
SYM ASY
Once again, for safety reasons it is really essential that
you set input 8 to “free” in the “Transmitter control
settings” menu.
As an added refinement, you may want both rudders
to deflect outwards only, as part of a braking system
controlled by the Ch 1 stick. This can be accomplished
by setting up two additional mixers “c1  4” and “c1 
Programming example - fixed-wing model 177
Programming example: Delta / flying wing
On page 164, where the section on fixed-wing model
programming starts, you will find general notes regarding the installation and set-up of the RC system in a
model, and - of course - this applies equally to deltas
and flying wings. The information on test-flying and refining the settings is also relevant, including the section on
programming flight phases.
left
right
Receiver power supply
Auxiliary function
Left flap
Auxiliary function
Rudder (if present)
Right elevon (ail. / elev.) servo
Left elevon (ail. / elev.) servo
Airbrakes or throttle or speed
controller (electric motor)
Right flap
If your delta or flying wing is of more “modern” configuration, the “normal” servo sequence has proved useful;
this arrangement can also be used for canards:
Receiver power supply
Auxiliary function
In their characteristic shape and geometry, deltas and
flying wings differ very significantly from “normal” models
even at first sight, but the differences in the requisite
servo arrangement are rather more subtle. The “classic” model delta or flying wing generally has only two
control surfaces, which act both as ailerons (in opposite
directions) and as elevators (in the same direction),
in a similar way to the superimposed rudder / elevator
functions of a V-tail. More modern designs tend to be
more complex; one (or two) inboard control surfaces
may be used purely as elevators, while the outboard
ailerons also act as elevators, but to a reduced extent. If
a flying wing has four or even six wing control surfaces,
it is certainly feasible nowadays to set them up with
camber-changing flap functions and / or even a butterfly
(crow) system.
However, most of these models still rank as “classic”
deltas and flying wings, and for them the servos should
be connected to the receiver as follows (see also page
63):
178 Programming example: delta and flying wing
Left flap (/ elevator)
Right elevon (aileron / elevator)
Rudder (if present)
Elevator (if present)
Left elevon (aileron / elevator)
Airbrakes or throttle or speed
controller (electric motor)
Right flap (/ elevator)
Depending on the receiver servo sequence you select,
you should first move to the …
“Base settings” menu(pages 74 … 81)
… and select the following options in the line “motor at
C1”:
• “none”:
The brake system is “retracted” at the forward position of the throttle / brake stick; the “Ch8 delayed” option and the “Brake  NN*” mixers in the “Wing mixers” menu are activated.
In the “Aileron / flap” line of the “Basic settings”
menu you can select “1AIL”, “2AIL” and “1/2AIL
1/2FL”, and in the “Wing mixer” menu the mixer
“Brake  NN*”, plus all mixers “from” and “to” flaps,
are activated.
The warning message “Throttle too high” - see pages 36 and 67 - and the “Motor stop” option in the
“Basic settings” menu are disabled.
• “none/inv”:
The brake system is “retracted” at the back position
of the throttle / brake stick; the “Ch8 delayed” option
and the “Brake  NN*” mixers in the “Wing mixers”
menu are activated.
In the “Aileron / flap” line of the “Basic settings”
menu you can select “1AIL”, “2AIL” and “1/2AIL
1/2FL”, and in the “Wing mixer” menu the mixer
“Brake  NN*”, plus all mixers “from” and “to” flaps,
are activated.
The warning message “Throttle too high” - see pages 36 and 67 - and the “Motor stop” option in the
“Basic settings” menu are disabled.
• “Idle forward” or “Idle rear”
The Ch 1 trim operates either forward or back.
If you switch the transmitter on with the throttle stick
too far in the direction of full-throttle, you will see the
warning message “Throttle too high” on the screen.
In the “Basic settings” menu the “Motor stop” option
is activated. In the same menu the “Ch8 delayed” option and the “Brake  NN*” mixers in the “Wing mixers” menu are disabled.
“tail type”: “Delta / flying wing” or “Normal”
“aile/flap”: Two ailerons “2ail” and - if present two flaps “2fl”.
The primary function of these settings is to define the
* NN = Nomen Nominandum (name to be stated)
range of wing mixers which the software makes available. If you select the “Delta / flying wing” tail type, the
software automatically superimposes the elevator and
aileron functions. In this case the mixer ratios can be
adjusted by varying the Dual Rate settings in the “D/R /
Expo” menu (see page 102).
If you select “Delta / flying wing”, all settings of the
“NN *  elev” wing mixers in the …
“Fixed-wing mixers” menu
diff aile.
ail rudd
brak elev
diff–red
(pages 108 … 113)
0% –––
0% –––
0% –––
0%
Programming a model delta using the “normal” tail
setting
Alternatively, if you select the “normal” tail type in the
“Base settings” menu, and connect the servos to
the receiver as shown in the lower of the two receiver
socket sequence diagrams on the left-hand page, then
the aileron function of the two elevon servos will work
correctly, but not the elevator function.
In the “normal” tail type you have to force the two aileron servos and the two flap servos to move in the same
direction and provide an elevator effect when an elevator
command is given. This requires the “elev  NN *”
wing mixers, whose effect can be adjusted separately.
The procedure starts by selecting the …
“Fixed-wing mixers” menu
… affect the elevator (up / down) function of the two
elevon (combined aileron / elevator) servos, as well as
the flap / elevator servos.
Notes:
•
The flap mixers and flap differential only
appear in the list if you have also entered
“2fl” in the “aile/flap” line at the “Delta /
Flying wing” model type; see illustration on the right.
• In principle the same applies to the “Brake  NN *”
mixers. These are also suppressed if you have decided on “Throttle min forward / back” in the “motor at
C1” line of the “Base settings” menu.
• Even if you have selected “2aile2fl”, the (digital) elevator and aileron trims only affect aileron / elevator. If
you wish to circumvent this, it is simpler to program
your model as described in the following section.
* NN = Nomen Nominandum (name to be stated)
(pages 108 … 113)
The following settings are model-specific,
and you must check carefully that they
work correctly on your model before
accepting them.
diff aile.
diff flaps
ail rudd
ail flaps
brak elev
brak flap
brak aile
elev flap
elev aile
elev
flap
aile
flap
diff–red
0%
0%
0%
+55%
0%
+55%
+66%
+77%
+77%
0%
0%
0%
–––
–––
–––
–––
–––
–––
–––
–––
–––
–––
–––
With this set-up the tailless model is considered to be a
“normal” four-flap wing (two ailerons and two flaps), and
therefore has all the options associated with this wing
type. The method involves the “elev  NN *” mixers,
which were originally intended only for pitch trim compensation and non-standard applications. In this case
they are “abused” by setting higher values than normal,
in order to transfer the elevator signal to the control
surfaces of the tailless model.
However, none of the fixed-wing mixers includes the
digital trim of the elevator stick - so an alternative has to
be found.
Start by switching to the …
“Transmitter control settings” menu
I5
I6
I7
I8
(page 94)
ctrl 6
+15% +15%
ctrl 6
+15% +15%
+100% +100%
free
free
+100% +100%
tr v
+
… and assign the same transmitter control to the inputs
5 and (if required) 6, e. g. the rotary proportional control
CTRL 6. Now move to the “Travel” column and reduce
the travel of the transmitter control for these two inputs
symmetrically to around 50%, or even less, because: the
lower this value, the finer the trim control.
However, if you prefer to use the normal elevator trim
lever, set - or leave - the “elev  NN *” mixers to 0%,
and instead set up free linear mixers to do the job.
This is done by calling up the …
… where you set values other than zero for these mixers.
Programming example: delta and flying wing 179
“Free mixers” menu
M1
M2
M3
(pages 127 … 132)
tr
tr
el
el
??
5
6
??
typ
fro
to
… and setting up one linear mixer “Tr elev  5”, and - if
necessary - “Tr elev  6”.
Move to the graphic page of this menu to set the required mixer ratios. Check the settings, and above all
the direction of effect, in the “Servo display”, or on the
model itself, and change the prefixes if necessary.
If you carry out the programming as described above,
the ailerons will also move in the same direction, like
flaps, when you move the elevator stick. The effect of the
“tr” option is that the elevator trim lever also affects the
associated mixer when you operate the elevator stick.
Since an additional transmitter control is no longer
required for this arrangement, you should disable input 5
and (if used) input 6 in the second column of the “Transmitter control settings” menu; simply set these inputs
to “free”.
Many years ago, the author flew a model delta programmed exactly in this way using the mc-20, with
the following additional refinements: “flap settings” used
as trim, and butterfly (crow) as landing aid - the latter
exploiting the “Brake  AIL” and “Brake  FL” wing
mixers to provide complete compensation for pitch trim
changes in both directions. In this case the term “ailerons” means the outboard wing control surfaces, and
“flaps” the inboard pair of control surfaces.
A modern sweptback flying wing can be controlled in
180 Programming example: delta and flying wing
a similar fashion. These models also feature inboard
and outboard control surfaces: the former forward of
the Centre of Gravity, the latter aft of it. Deflecting the
inboard control surface(s) down increases lift and produces an up-elevator effect; deflecting them up creates
the opposite effect. In contrast, the outboard ailerons act
in the reverse direction: a down-deflection produces a
down-elevator effect, and vice versa. There are really no
limits to what can be achieved with appropriate settings
of the system’s sophisticated mixers.
However, please note that you should be extremely
careful when setting differential travel with such a configuration, regardless of your model’s set-up, its tail type
and the number of servos you are using. This is because
differential travels on a tailless model tend to produce
an asymmetrical elevator effect, rather than the desired
adverse yaw reduction. For this reason it is advisable
to start with a differential setting of 0% - at least for the
first few flights. When you are familiar with the model
and feel the need to experiment, it may then be feasible
under certain circumstances to try differential settings
deviating from zero.
For larger models it could be advisable to install winglets
fitted with rudders, i. e. small vertical surfaces at the
wingtips. If these are actuated by two separate servos,
they can be controlled as described in the example on
page 177 dealing with “Servos running in parallel”, or
using “Channel mapping” in the “Telemetry” menu; see
page 140.
You may also want both rudders to deflect outwards
when a braking system is operated using the Ch 1 stick,
and this can be accomplished as follows: if you have
selected the “normal” tail type, set up two further mixers
“c1  4” and “c1  second rudder control channel”
with suitable travel settings. The offset for both mixers
should be +100%, as the Ch 1 stick is usually at the
forward end-point when the airbrakes are retracted, and
the winglet rudders are only required to deflect outwards
proportionally when the brakes are extended.
For your notes 181
Programming example: F3A model aircraft
F3A models belong to the category of powered fixedwing model aircraft designed for competition flying. They
may be powered by an internal combustion engine or
an electric motor. Electric-powered models are eligible
and totally competitive in the international F3A “pattern”
class, and also in the F5A electric aerobatic class.
fixed-wing models we have already described.
The auxiliary function “Retracts” is usually assigned to
one of the auxiliary channels 6 to 8. Ideally the retracts
are operated using one of the two switches without a
centre detent (SW 3 or SW 8). An optional “extra” - used
only if necessary - is mixture adjustment control for the
carburettor. This is generally operated by one of the
rotary proportional controls CTRL 6 … 8, connected to
one of the auxiliary channels not already in use.
Receiver power supply
Auxiliary function
In this programming example we assume that you have
already read through the description of the individual
menus, and are therefore familiar with the general method of handling the transmitter.
On page 164, where the section on fixed-wing model
programming starts, you will find general notes on
installing and setting up the RC system in a model,
and - of course - this applies equally to F3A models, and
therefore does not need to be repeated at this point.
If an F3A model is accurately built, it usually exhibits flying characteristics which are almost completely neutral.
The perfect aerobatic model has a very smooth but precise control response, and any movement around any
one of its flight axes should not affect the other axes.
F3A models are flown using aileron, elevator and rudder
controls. The use of separate servos for each aileron is
almost universal. The flying controls are supplemented
by control of motor power (throttle function) and in many
cases a retractable undercarriage. As a result the servo
assignment for channels 1 to 5 is no different from the
182 Programming example: F3A model
Retracts
Right aileron
Rudder
Elevator
Aileron or left aileron
Throttle or speed
controller (electric motor)
Mixture adjustment
When assigning functions to the auxiliary channels at
the transmitter, it is advisable to ensure that the controls
required are within easy reach, since the advanced
aerobatic pilot has very little time to think about letting
go of the sticks - especially when flying under competition conditions.
Programming
The basic programming of the transmitter has already
been described in detail in the section starting on page
166, so this section concentrates on tips specific to
F3A models.
In the …
“Servo settings” menu
S1
S2
S3
S4
S5
rev
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
cent
(page 92)
100% 100%
100% 100%
100% 100%
100% 100%
100% 100%
trav +
… you can adjust the servo settings to suit your model.
It has proved advisable to use at least 100% servo
travel, as precision of control can be perceptibly better if
relatively large servo travels are employed. This should
be borne in mind when building the model and designing the control surface linkages. Any minor corrections
required can be made in the third column during the
initial test flights.
The next step is to select the …
“Base setting” menu
(page 74 … 81)
… and activate the idle trim for Channel 1 (normally
“Idle back”; i. e. full-throttle forward). The digital trim
now works at the idle end of stick travel. The “cut-off
trim” enables you to switch immediately from the “motor
stopped” position to the idle position you have previously
established just by applying a single “click” on the trim
lever (see page 60).
stick mode
1
motor at C1
idle re.
cut off –100% +150% 9
tail type
normal
aile/flap
2aile
The remaining settings should be adjusted as required
to suit your personal preferences.
You may find it necessary to assign transmitter controls
to particular inputs to operate the retractable undercarriage and carburettor mixture adjustment. This is carried
out in the …
“Transmitter control settings” menu
(page 94).
For example, you may like to assign a particular transmitter control - perhaps one of the ON / OFF switches
SW 2 or 8 - to the input “E8” for the retracts, and a rotary
proportional control - e. g. CTRL 6 - to the input “E7”, for
mixture adjustment.
I5 free
+100%
+100%
I6 free
I7 ctrl 6 +100%
8
+100%
I8
+100%
+100%
+100%
+100%
tr v
+
The retracts are extended and retracted when you
operate the switch “SW 8”. You may need to adjust the
travel of the transmitter control, and perhaps reverse
that channel by setting a negative prefix for servo travel.
F3A models fly fairly fast, and respond very “solidly” to
corrective movements of the servos. However, in competition flying it is vital that all abrupt control movements
and corrections should be kept to a minimum, as the
judges will invariably notice any lack of smoothness and
dock a few points, so it is advisable to set exponential
control characteristics on the stick functions.
Move to the …
“D/R Expo” menu
(page 102).
Exponential values of around +30% on aileron, elevator
and rudder have proved to be a good starting point, and
you can set them in the right-hand column of this menu.
These values provide smooth, well-defined control of
the typical F3A model. Many experts use higher values;
even up to +60% exponential.
aile 100%
elev 100%
rudd 100%
+33%
+33%
+33%
DUAL
EXPO
–––
–––
–––
Since F3A models generally have two aileron servos, it
has proved useful to deflect both ailerons “up” slightly for
the landing. In most cases this causes the model to fly a
little more slowly and with a more stable attitude on the
landing approach.
To achieve this you will need to program mixers in the …
“Free mixers” menu (section starting on page 127).
Both ailerons are usually required to deflect “up” as a
landing aid, in parallel with the movement of the throttle
stick, but only from the half-throttle setting in the direction of idle. From that point on, the further the stick is
moved towards the idle position, the more the ailerons
deflect up. The reverse occurs when you open the
throttle: the ailerons are returned to neutral to avoid the
model suddenly ballooning up.
A little down-elevator must usually be mixed in to ensure
that the aeroplane does not climb when the ailerons /
flaps are deployed.
To meet these requirements you need the two mixers
shown in the illustration below.
M1
M2
M3
typ
c1
c1
??
5
el
??
fro
to
3
3
The mixers are activated using one and the same
external switch, e. g. “SW 3”, which therefore has to
be assigned to both mixers, with the same direction of
effect.
Touch the central SET button of the right-hand touch-key
to move to the mixer inputs on the second screen page,
and set the appropriate mixer ratios. In both cases the
mixer neutral point should be left at the centre position
of the Ch 1 stick travel.
For this reason you should now move the Ch 1 stick
to the Idle range, select the ASY field, and enter the
following values:
MIX 1: -60% … -80% and
MIX 2: -5% … -10%.
Programming example: F3A model 183
Example of MIX 1:
MIX1
c1
5
tr v –66%
0%
offs
0%
SYM ASY
This completes the basic set-up for a typical F3A model.
Correcting model-specific errors
It is an unfortunate fact of life that even very carefully
built models exhibit minute faults and inaccuracies which
produce unwanted deviations when the model is flying;
the mixers of a computer radio control system are then
needed to compensate for these deficiencies. In this
section we will describe how to carry out the adjustments required, but please note the following points
before we get started: it is vital to ensure that the model
is built as accurately as humanly possible, is balanced
perfectly around the lateral and longitudinal axes, and
that motor downthrust and sidethrust are set correctly.
1. Rudder causes unwanted movement around the
longitudinal and lateral axes
It is often the case that a rudder command causes the model to rotate slightly around the longitudinal and / or lateral axis. This is particularly troublesome in what is known as knife-edge flight, where the
model’s total lift is generated by the fuselage, aided
by the rudder deflection. The result is that the model rotates and changes heading slightly, as if the pilot were applying aileron or elevator at the same time.
These tendencies have to be corrected with compensation around the lateral axis (elevator) and around
184 Programming example: F3A model
the longitudinal axis (aileron).
These corrections can be achieved easily with the
mx-16 HoTT, exploiting the “free mixers” once
again. For example, if the model rotates to the right
around the longitudinal (roll) axis when the rudder
is deflected to the right for a knife-edge pass, then
a mixer is set up which deflects the ailerons slightly to the left. Heading changes around the lateral (elevator) axis can be corrected in a similar way using a
mixer acting upon the elevator:
a) Correction around the lateral axis (elevator)
MIX “rd  el”
ASYmmetrical setting. The exact values required
must be found by flight testing.
b) Correction around the longitudinal axis (aileron)
MIX “rd  al”
ASYmmetrical setting. The exact values required
must be found by flight testing.
In most cases relatively small mixer values are called
for - typically below 10% - but this does vary from
model to model.
2. Vertical climb and descent
Many models exhibit a tendency to deviate from the
ideal line in vertical climbs and descents. To correct
this we need an elevator neutral position which varies
according to the throttle setting. For example, if the
model tends to pull out of a vertical descent by itself
when the motor is throttled back, slight down-elevator
must be mixed in at this throttle setting.
MIX “c1  el”
As a rule you will need to set mixer values below 5%,
but once again there is no substitute for test-flying.
3. Rolling (movement around the longitudinal axis)
at idle
When you reduce the throttle setting, the model may
tend to roll slightly in one direction. Clearly an aileron correction must be made. However, it is much
more elegant to let a mixer correct this effect for you
than to move the stick manually. Once again, a mixer
needs to be set up:
MIX “c1  al”
As a rule you will need to set mixer values below 5%,
but once again test-flying is called for.
The adjustment process should only be carried out
in calm weather. Often all you need to do is apply the
mixer in the control segment between half-throttle
and idle. To achieve this, leave the Offset point at the
centre position, and set up the mixer ASYmetrically.
4. Rolling when ailerons and flaps are extended
If you fly the landing approach with both ailerons deflected up, the model may show a tendency to roll
slightly due to minor variations in aileron servo travel (or constructional inaccuracies); i. e. the model may
turn to either side by itself. Once again, this tendency can easily be corrected using a mixer to vary the
compensation according to the position of the ailerons / landing flaps.
MIX ”c1  al”
It is essential to provide a means of switching the
mixer on and off using the switch which controls the
aileron / landing flap function (see previous page), to
ensure that this mixer only has any effect when the
aileron / landing flap function is activated. The optimum value has to be found by test-flying.
And finally a few words on the …
“FAIL-SAFE settings”
We strongly recommend that you make use
of the safety potential of this option by at
least setting the throttle position (glow-powered models) to idle, or the electric motor to stop, if a
fail-safe event should be triggered. This simple precaution ensures that the model is much less likely to create
havoc and cause property damage or personal injury. If
you also program the fail-safe positions of the control
surfaces in such a way that the model flies steadily
descending circles in case of interference, then you
have a good chance that it will land relatively gently
even if the radio link fails for a protracted period. This
also gives you plenty of time to restore the connection,
should the whole 2.4 GHz frequency band suffer interference for a while.
In the receiver’s default state, however, the servos
remain in their last valid position (“hold mode”) when interference occurs. You can program any individual servo
output of your receiver to a “fail-safe position” (fail-safe
mode), as described on page 136.
characteristics you desire.
Summary
The settings described on this page are intended
primarily for the expert flyer. Please bear in mind that
refining the flying characteristics of a model aeroplane
to this extent involves tremendous effort, time, sensitivity
and expertise. Some experts continue the programming
procedure even when they are flying, although it is not
advisable to try this if you are just a moderately advanced pilot making your first attempt with an F3A aerobatic model. You would be well advised to request help
from an experienced pilot, and carry out the fine-tuning
adjustments mentioned here one by one, with the expert
at your side, until your model exhibits the neutral flying
Programming example: F3A model 185
Programming example: model helicopter
In this programming example we assume that you
have already read and understood the descriptions of
the individual menus, and are by now familiar with the
general handling of the transmitter. We also assume that
you have assembled and adjusted the helicopter exactly
according to the kit instructions. The electronic facilities
provided by the transmitter should never be used to
compensate for major mechanical inaccuracies.
As so often in life, there are various ways and means of
reaching a particular destination when programming the
mx-16 HoTT. In this example our intention is to provide
a sensibly structured course of action, so that you have
a clear idea of logical programming techniques. Where
there are several possible methods, we first describe
the simplest and most easily understood solution. It is
likely that the helicopter will work perfectly when set up
in this way, but naturally you are still free to try out other
solutions at a later stage, in case they suit you better.
We have deliberately chosen this simple programming
project in order to demonstrate that it is possible to set
up a helicopter which flies extremely well with relatively
little programming effort.
Nevertheless, we do not want to forfeit all the possible
refinement facilities: after the basic description you will
also find set-up notes on gyro gain, speed governors
and flight phase programming.
Note:
If, in contrast to the glow-powered machine
described here, your main interest lies in
electric-powered model helicopters, then
please read on! Apart from the idle adjustments, which
naturally do not apply, you can adopt most of the
settings described in the following section virtually
unchanged.
To initiate this typical programming exercise move to the
“Model memory” menu, then to the …
“select model” sub-menu
(page 70),
… where you select a free model memory using the
arrow buttons of the left or right-hand touch-key:
As our programming example we take the Graupner
STARLET 50 helicopter, with right-hand rotation, three
swashplate linkage points distributed evenly at 120°
(“3Sv (2 roll)” type), a beginner’s set-up without enhanced throttle curve, without heading-lock gyro system,
no method of influencing the gyro’s “normal operating
mode” from the transmitter, and with no speed governor
(regulator).
186 Programming example: model helicopter
01
02
03
04
05
06
free
free
free
free
free
R08
After touching the central SET button of the right-hand
touch-key, you can use the  button of the left or righthand touch-key to select …
Sel model type
( empty mod mem )
… the “Helicopter” model type. Confirm your choice by
touching the central SET button of the right-hand touchkey, and the screen immediately switches to the basic
display.
Notes:
•
Once you have called up the “Model select” option it is not possible to interrupt
the process, i. e. you must choose one or
other model type. Even if you switch the transmitter
off, then on again, you still have to make this choice.
However, if you make a mistake you can always correct it simply by erasing the model memory.
• If the warning message “Throttle too high” appears,
you can erase it by turning the rotary proportional
knob CTRL 6 anti-clockwise to its end-point.
• If the battery voltage is too low, you will not be able
to change model memories for safety reasons. In this
case the screen displays an appropriate message:
not possible now
voltage too low
Once you have overcome this initial hurdle, it is essential
to bind the receiver installed in the model to this model
memory in the …
“Base settings” menu
(pages 82 … 90)
This is accomplished by moving to the “rx bind” line:
phase 2
phase 3
autorotat.
receiv out
rx bind
hover
speed
–––
–––
–––
–––
Note:
When you confirm the model selection the
following message appears in the basic
display for a few seconds:
BIND N/A
OK
If you confirm your choice by briefly pressing the SET
button of the right-hand touch-key, you automatically
move to this line:
In this line you trigger the bind process between model
memory and receiver, as described in detail on page
88. Without this step you cannot address the receiver.
The next step is to press the  arrow button of the
left-hand or right-hand four-way touch-key to move up
into the first line, where you can start the actual model
programming in the “mod name” line. Now enter a
suitable name for the model memory, …
mod name
stick mode
1
1 ser vo
swashplate
cut off –100% +150% –––
right
rotor direct
all subsequent mixers, and it is therefore vital that you
do not change it later in order to alter individual mixer
directions, such as the direction of collective pitch or
throttle.
stick mode
1
3sv(2rol)
swashplate
cut off –100% +150% 1
right
rotor direct
pitch min
rear
… by selecting the characters available on the second
page of the “mod name” line:
0123456789 : ;
?
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNO
PQRSTUVWXYZ
model name
At this point, if you have not already done so, the servos
should be connected to the receiver in the following
sequence:
STAR
Receiver power supply
Auxiliary function
(speed governor)
Once you have entered the “Model name” you should
check that the “Stick mode” is correct:
STARLET
mod name
stick mode
1
1 ser vo
swashplate
cut off –100% +150% –––
right
rotor direct
In the next four lines we come to the first settings which
are specific to helicopters:
In the “Swashplate type” line select the number of
servos which are used to actuate the swashplate. See
page 82 for more details of this.
In the “Rotor direction” line we enter the direction of
rotation of the main rotor as viewed from above. In the
“Collective pitch min.” line set “forward” or “rear” to suit
your personal preference. This setting applies equally to
Throttle servo
Free or auxiliary function
Tail rotor servo (gyro system)
Pitch-axis servo
Roll 1 servo
Roll 2 servo
Gyro gain
Note:
Please note one important difference in later
Graupner mc and mx radio control
systems compared with earlier equipment:
the first collective pitch servo and the throttle servo have
been interchanged.
The mixer ratios and mixer directions for the swashplate
servos for collective pitch, roll and pitch-axis are set in
the …
Programming example: model helicopter 187
“Swashplate mixer” menu
SP – MIXER
ptch
roll
nick
(page 132),
“Transmitter control settings” menu
+61%
+61%
+61%
I5
thr
gyr
I8
lim
… where you will find that they are pre-set to +61% in
each case. If the swashplate does not respond correctly
to the stick movements, the first step is to change the
mixer directions from “+” to “-” if necessary. The second
recourse is to reverse the servo directions in the “Servo
settings” menu.
Now move to the …
“Servo settings” menu
S1
S2
S3
S4
S5
rev
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
cent
A glance at the …
(page 92),
100% 100%
100% 100%
100% 100%
100% 100%
100% 100%
trav +
… where you can set up the travels and directions of
rotation of the individual servos. The basic aim here
should be to keep servo travels at 100% wherever
possible, as this maintains best possible resolution and
accuracy. Use “Rev.” if necessary to change the direction of rotation of any servo; do check carefully that the
direction you set really is correct. The tail rotor servo,
in particular, must operate in such a way that the nose
(!) of the helicopter moves in the direction which corresponds to the movement of the tail rotor stick.
188 Programming example: model helicopter
free
free
free
free
ctrl6
(page 96)
+100% +100%
+100% +100%
+100% +100%
+100% +100%
+100% +100%
tr v +
… will show you that transmitter control “6”, i. e. the
rotary proportional control CTRL 6, is assigned to the
“Lim” input, whereas all other inputs are programmed
to “free” by default. The “Lim” input serves as throttle
limiter. It acts solely on output “6”, to which the throttle
servo is connected.
Just to remind you:
•
Using the “Throttle limiter” function eliminates the need to program an “Idle-up”
flight phase.
• The throttle limiter does not control the throttle servo; it simply limits the travel of this servo in the forward direction, according to the setting of the throttle limiter, when required. The throttle servo is usually
controlled by the collective pitch stick via the throttle
curve or curves you have set in the “Helimix” menu,
for which reason input 6 should always be left “free”.
For more details please refer to the sections on pages 116 and 117 of the manual.
• Moreover the Ch 1 trim only affects a helicopter’s
throttle servo. This section does not describe the special features of this trim (“cut-off trim”) again, as it is
covered on page 60. (Thanks to the digital trims,
trim values are automatically stored when you switch
models and when you switch between flight phases.)
• You will find a detailed description of the basic idle
set-up procedure and the method of adjusting idle
and throttle limit in the section starting on page 99.
Now use the arrow button  of the left or right-hand
touch-key to move to the “Travel” column, and increase
the value in the highlighted field from 100% to 125%,
with the throttle limiter at its forward end-stop.
I5
thr
gyr
I8
lim
free
free
free
free
ctrl6
+100% +100%
+100% +100%
+100% +100%
+100% +100%
+100% +125%
tr v +
This ensures that the throttle limiter cannot possibly
restrict the full throttle travel dictated by the collective
pitch stick when the model is in flight.
Set-up note for electric helicopters:
Since electric motors by their nature require
no idle setting, the only important point when
setting up an electric-powered model
helicopter is that the adjustment range of the throttle
limiter should be set significantly higher and lower than
the adjustment range of the speed controller, which is
usually from -100% to +100%. It may therefore be
necessary to adjust the “Travel” value of the throttle
limiter to an appropriate value, such as a symmetrical
110% setting. However, further fine-tuning can be
carried out exactly as described here for the glow-powered machine.
An additional function needs to be activated in the …
“Base settings” menu
(pages 82 … 90).
Even if you are a beginner to flying and are not yet
ready for this, it is advisable at least to define the auto-rotation switch, so that you have an “emergency cut”
switch for the motor. This is carried out by selecting the
“Auto-rotation” line using the arrow buttons  of the
left or right-hand touch-key, briefly touching the central
SET button of the right-hand touch-key, and then moving
one of the two-position switches (SW 2 or 8) to the “ON”
setting. The switch number (in our example “2”) now
appears on the right of the screen.
pitch min
timer
phase 2
phase 3
autorotat.
rear
5:00 C3
hover –––
speed –––
2
This switch should be located at a position on the transmitter where you can easily reach it without letting go of
the stick, e. g. above the collective pitch stick.
Note:
For more information on setting up this
“emergency OFF switch” please refer to the
section in the centre column of the following
page.
And another tip:
Please make it a habit to give all the
switches a common “on” direction; then a
quick glance at the transmitter before flying
will soon reassure you that all switches are “off”.
If you wish, you could at this point move up two lines
and assign a flight phase switch for flight phase 2, which
is already assigned the name “Hover”, but this simple
programming example deliberately excludes such
refinements.
You have now completed the basic settings at the
transmitter, i. e. the procedure which you will need to use
time and again when setting up a new model. The actual
helicopter-specific set-up is carried out primarily in the …
“Heli mixers” menu
ptch
ch1
thro
tail
ch1
gyro
inp8
normal
(pages 114 … 125).
0%
0%
In the very first line you will see the “Collective pitch”
function, and a brief press on the central SET button of
the right-hand touch-key takes you to the appropriate
sub-menu. At this point you will see a graphic representation of the collective pitch curve. This is initially
defined by only three reference points, and in most
cases this is quite adequate.
Tip:
Always try to manage with these three
reference points initially, as additional points
just complicate matters, and extra complexity
is just what you don’t need at the moment.
The reference point for hovering should generally be the
mechanical centre-point of the collective pitch stick, as
this position feels completely natural to most pilots. You
can, of course, set up the curve to locate the hover at a
different point, but you should not be tempted to do this
unless you know exactly what you are doing. Start by
setting the collective pitch stick to centre. Assuming that
you previously adjusted the servos in accordance with
the manufacturer’s instructions, the servo output arms
will now (usually) be at right-angles to the servo case.
If you have not already done so, adjust the mechanical
linkages to the rotor head so that all the blades are set
to a collective pitch angle of 4° to 5° positive for the
hover. All known helicopters will fly at this setting.
Now push the collective pitch stick fully forward to the
maximum collective pitch point (the full-length vertical
line indicates the current position of the stick). Adjust
Point 5 on the collective pitch curve using the arrow
buttons of the right-hand touch-key, with the aim of obtaining a maximum collective pitch setting of around 9°
at the main rotor blades. This point should be at a value
of around +50%.
Note:
A rotor blade set-up gauge, e. g. the
Graupner item, Order No. 61, is very useful
when setting up blade pitch angles, as you
can read off the angles directly.
Now pull the collective pitch stick right back to the
collective pitch minimum position. Set the blade pitch
angle for Point 1 to 0 to -4°, depending on your piloting
ability. This produces a graph line with a slight angle at
the hover point, forming what is known as the collective
pitch curve. It might look approximately like this:
ptch
input
–100%
output
–80%
point 1 –80%
normal
Programming example: model helicopter 189
If you now switch to the auto-rotation phase - you will
see the name of the flight phase “Autorot” at bottom left
on the screen - the “old” collective pitch curve will re-appear. In this phase you should set the same values as in
the normal phase, with the following exception: increase
the pitch angle at Point 5 (collective pitch maximum) by
about 2°. This gives slightly more pitch for flaring the
model when practising “autos” at a later (!) date.
Once you have set up the collective pitch curve, operate
the auto-rotation switch again, then briefly touch the
central ESC button of the left-hand touch-key to return
to the helicopter mixer menu select point. Now we move
on to the “Ch1  thro” line, where you can set up the
throttle curve.
The first step here is to enter the idle trim range by
adjusting the throttle curve. Move the collective pitch
stick to the minimum position, and set Point 1 to a value
of around +16%.
c1
thro
input
output
point 1
normal
0%
+16%
+16%
With the throttle limiter closed and the idle trim fully
open, pull the collective pitch stick to the “fully back”
position and move it slightly to and fro: the throttle servo
should not respond to this movement. This arrangement
gives you a seamless transition from idle trim to the
throttle curve. You will probably need to make further adjustments to the throttle curve, but this process must be
carried out later as part of the flight-testing procedure.
If you now switch temporarily from this graph to the
190 Programming example: model helicopter
auto-rotation flight phase, you will see - instead of the
usual display - the following:
c1
thro
off
Autorot
This means that the throttle servo has switched to a
fixed value, which can be adjusted as follows:
Press ESC to return to the menu list. Assuming that you
are still in the auto-rotation phase, this will now include
new sub-menus.
The important line is “Throttle”, where you should set
a value of around +125% or -125%, depending on the
direction of servo rotation.
ptch
thro
tail
gyro
inp8
Autorot
–125%
0%
0%
0%
This setting ensures that the motor stops reliably in
the auto-rotation phase (to allow you to cope with an
emergency). Later, when you have gained sufficient
experience to practise auto-rotation landings, the setting
should be changed to a value which provides a reliable
idle.
Set-up note for electric helicopters:
Since the motor must be stopped completely
if an emergency occurs with an electric-powered model helicopter, this setting can be
adopted unchanged.
At present the remaining sub-menus are of no interest.
Simply switch “Auto-rotation” off, and move back to the
first menu list.
Call up the set-up page of the “Ch1  tail rotor” menu:
this is where you set static torque compensation (DMA)
for the tail rotor. Once again, please restrict yourself
to the three default reference points; everything else
is the preserve of the experienced pilot. For the initial
set-up - intended for a heading-lock gyro system - the
uniform pre-set values of 0% should be changed to
-30% at Point 1 (collective pitch minimum) and +30%
at the opposite end, Point 5 (collective pitch maximum),
although you may find it necessary to adjust the settings
slightly later.
c1
tail
input
–100%
output
–30%
point 1 –30%
normal
Now switch back to the auto-rotation phase for a moment. The set-up curve is disabled here, with the result
that the tail rotor servo no longer responds to collective
pitch commands (when the main rotor is not powered,
there is no rotor torque to be corrected).
The - static - pre-set of the gyro effect principle (“normal”
or “heading lock” mode), and also the gyro gain can now
be altered by setting a value other than “0” in the “Gyro”
line:
ptch
ch1
thro
tail
ch1
gyro
inp8
normal
I5
thr
gyr
I8
lim
0%
0%
Please be sure to read and observe the
set-up instructions supplied with your
gyro at this point, as there is a possibility
that your helicopter will be uncontrollable if you set
it up incorrectly!
If your gyro features gain control from the transmitter unlike the type we are using in this example - you will
need another free proportional control for it, e. g. CTRL
7. This can be assigned to the “Gyro” input in the …
“Transmitter control settings” menu
I5
thr
gyr
I8
lim
free
free
ctrl 7
free
ctrl 6
(page 96).
+100% +100%
+100% +100%
+100% +100%
+100% +100%
+100% +100%
tr v +
Turn the rotary control until its number (transmitter control number) appears on the screen, then use the arrow
button  of the left or right-hand touch-key to move to
the ASY field in the “Travel” column. Briefly press the
central SET button of the right-hand touch-key, and you
will be able to set a maximum gyro gain such as 50% in
the now highlighted field:
free
free
ctrl 7
free
ctrl 6
+100% +100%
+100% +100%
+50% +50%
+100% +100%
+100% +100%
tr v +
This represents a safe fixed value which is maintained
as long as the rotary control is at its right-hand end-stop.
You will probably need to adjust the value in the course
of flight-testing. Additional notes on setting up gyros can
be found on pages 118 / 119.
Further adjustments
If you have followed this programming example, you will
have a helicopter which is set up properly, and in an
ideal state for hovering practice and simple circuits. Of
course, you may wish to activate further functions depending on your skill and flying experience. If you wish
to fly using different rotor speeds and trim set-ups, you
will need to activate a series of “flight phases”, which
can be called up via switches which you assign. The first
step in this process is to call up the …
“Base settings” menu
pitch min
timer
phase 2
phase 3
autorotat.
(pages 82 … 90),
rear
10:01 C3
8
hover
acro –––
2
… assign a switch to “Phase 2”, e. g. SW 8, and enter a
relevant name (if you wish).
It is important to be quite clear in your mind that auto-ro-
tation always has absolute precedence over any other
phases. This simply means: if you operate the auto-rotation switch, you immediately move to the auto-rotation
phase from either of the other two flight phases (“normal” phase and “phase 2”).
Now move back to the “Helimix” menu, switch to “Phase
2” (which you have just set up), and modify the settings
accordingly. Since the mx-16 HoTT features digital
trims, in the Heli program all the trim positions for the
control functions “roll”, “pitch-axis” and “tail rotor” are
stored separately for each flight phase, in addition to the
other menu settings which you entered separately for
each flight phase (see page 114).
For example, if the motor run is limited by the fueltank
size or battery capacity, you should set the stopwatch
to count down. Enter the maximum possible motor run
time, e. g. “5 min.”. The transmitter’s sounder now starts
emitting warning sounds starting at “30 s” before “zero”,
as described on page 86. You could assign the transmitter control switch “G3” to this timer, by first activating
switch assignment and then turning the throttle limit control from its idle position in the direction of full-throttle:
3sv(2rol)
swashplate
cut off –100% +150% 1
right
rotor direct
pitch min
rear
5:00 C3
timer
With the stopwatch halted, touch the  or  buttons of the left-hand touch-key (CLEAR) simultaneously
at the basic display, so that the stopwatch switches to
the “Timer” function. The timer then starts automatically
when you move the throttle limit slider towards full-throtProgramming example: model helicopter 191
tle, and stops again when you move the limiter back to
the idle range.
Suggested refinement: speed governor
At some time you may wish to install a speed governor
(regulator) in your helicopter, e. g. the mc-Heli-Control, to
try flying with a system rotational speed which is automatically maintained at a constant value. It makes sense
to couple the individual rotor speeds with the flight phases, as this enables you to carry out further fine-tuning.
The initial requirement when programming the transmitter is to install and program the speed governor exactly
in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. Of
course, the mx-16 HoTT provides further facilities to
allow you to implement different rotational speeds in the
individual flight phases. A practical suggestion, which
includes the throttle limiter function, can be found in the
section starting on page 117.
If you have set up your helicopter as described in this
programming example, you will find that it is capable
of carrying out extremely challenging flight tasks even
though it is not suitable for competition work.
We suggest that you should not make use of additional
functions until your model is flying perfectly, so that you
will be in a position to recognise and appreciate any
improvements. Whenever possible, it is always best to
implement additional refinements one at a time, otherwise you won’t know which change has brought about
any improvement. Bear in mind that the good pilot is
not recognised by the number of complex functions with
which he can cope, but by the results he can obtain
when flying a relatively simple set-up.
192 Programming example: model helicopter
For your notes 193
Appendix
PRX (Power for Receiver)
Order No. 4136
Graupner|SJ HoTT GPS / Vario module
Order No. 33600
Graupner|SJ HoTT Vario module
Order No. 33601
A highly developed stabilised receiver power supply with intelligent
power management.
The unit constitutes a stabilised user-selectable power supply for the
receiver, and provides a further enhancement in the reliability of the
airborne power supply. It is designed for use with different types of
receiver battery, to ensure that it is straightforward and versatile in use.
When the model is operating, even brief collapses in battery voltage
are stored and displayed, offering the user the means of detecting a
receiver battery which is not “up to the job”, or failing.
• For use with one or two receiver batteries (simultaneous discharge if
two batteries are employed)
• Suitable for five-cell or six-cell NiMH batteries, or two-cell LiPo or
LiFe packs. Graupner/JR, G3.5, G2 and BEC connector systems.
• Three user-selectable receiver power voltage levels: 5.1 V / 5.5 V /
5.9 V.
• Two ultra-bright LEDs indicate the operational status of batteries 1
and 2 separately.
• Integral high-quality On / Off switch.
• Constructed to cope with high-current applications.
• Low-profile switch and LEDs to avoid spoiling the appearance and
efficiency of the model.
• Straight-through design of mounting lugs, LEDs and switch for simple installation using drilling template (supplied).
Vario with altitude signals and five different tones for climb and
descent, plus GPS with range measurement, distance measurement,
speed indicator, display of flight direction and co-ordinates
• Additional warning thresholds for min. altitude, max. altitude, twostage climb and descent rate
• Altitude display, storage of min. and max. altitude
• Variable warning time: OFF, 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30 seconds, constant
• Variable warning repeat time: constant, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 min, once
• The GPS / Vario sensor can be connected directly to the receiver’s
telemetry input.
Vario with altitude signals and five different tones for climb and
descent; altitude display and storage of min. and max. altitude.
• Additional warning thresholds for min. altitude, max. altitude, twostage climb and descent rate
• Variable warning time: OFF, 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30 seconds, constant
• Variable warning repeat time: constant, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 min, once
• The vario sensor can be connected directly to the receiver’s telemetry input.
194 Appendix
Specification, vario
• Altitude measurement: -500 m ... +3000 m
• Resolution: 0.1 m
• Sensitivity, vario: 0.5 m/3s, 1 m/3s, 0.5 m/s, 1 m/s, 3 m/s, programmable per beep
• Calculated average value: 4 - 20 measurements per measured value, programmable
Specification
• Altitude measurement: -500 m ... +3000 m
• Resolution: 0.1 m
• Sensitivity, vario: 0.5 m/3s, 1 m/3s, 0.5 m/s, 1 m/s, 3 m/s, programmable per beep
• Calculated average value: 4 - 20 measurements per measured
­value, programmable
Graupner|SJ HoTT General Engine Module
Order No. 33610
Graupner|SJ HoTT General Air Module
Order No. 33611
Graupner|SJ HoTT Electric Air-Module
Order No. 33620
General sensor for Graupner|SJ HoTT receivers and models with
internal-combustion or electric power system:
• 2 x temperature and voltage measurements with warning thresholds
for min. and max. voltage and min. and max. temperature
• Individual cell measurement with min. voltage warning thresholds
• Voltage, current and capacity measurement with warning thresholds
for min. and max. voltage, max. capacity and max. current
• Programmable current limiting
• Current measurement with 2 x 1 mOhm shunt resistors in parallel =
0.5 mOhm
• Rev-count measurement and warning thresholds for min. and max.
rotational speed
• Fuel measurement with warning thresholds in 25% increments (requires software update)
• User-variable warning time: OFF, 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30 seconds, constant
• User-variable warning repeat time: constant, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 min, once
• 2 x temperature measurement, optionally 0 to 120°C or 200°C, also
voltage measurement up to 80 V DC
• 1 x rev-count measurement up to 100,000 rpm with two-blade propeller
• 1 x speed controller / servo input, 1 x speed governor input, 1 x
speed controller / servo output for rotational speed governor
• etc. see product at www.graupner.de/en
General sensor for Graupner|SJ HoTT receivers and models with
internal-combustion or electric power system:
• Vario with altitude signals, climb and descent signals, and additional warning thresholds for min. altitude, max. altitude, climb and twostage descent rate
• Altitude indicator (-500 … +3000 m), storage of min. and max. altitude
• 2 x temperature and voltage measurements with warning thresholds
for min. and max. voltage and min. and max. temperature
• Individual cell measurement with min. voltage warning thresholds
• Voltage, current and capacity measurement with warning thresholds
for min. and max. voltage, max. capacity and max. current
• Rev-count measurement and programmable speed governor, also
warning thresholds for min. and max. rotational speed
• Fuel measurement with warning thresholds in 25% increments (requires software update)
• User-variable warning time: OFF, 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30 seconds, constant
• User-variable warning repeat time: constant, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 min, once
• 2 x temperature measurement, optionally 0 to 120°C or 200°C, also
voltage measurement up to 80 V DC
• 1 x rev-count measurement up to 100,000 rpm with two-blade propeller
• etc. see product at www.graupner.de/en
General sensor for Graupner|SJ HoTT receivers and electric-powered
models:
• Vario with altitude signals, climb and descent signals, and additional warning thresholds for min. altitude, max. altitude, two-stage climb
and descent rate
• Altitude indicator (-500 … +3000 m), storage of min. and max. altitude.
• 2 x temperature and voltage measurements with warning thresholds
for min. and max. voltage and min. and max. temperature
• Individual cell measurement 2 ... 14S with min. voltage warning
thresholds
• Voltage, current and capacity measurement with warning thresholds
for min. and max. voltage, max. capacity and max. current
• User-variable warning time: OFF, 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30 seconds, constant
• User-variable warning repeat time: constant, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 min, once
• 2 x temperature measurement, optionally 0 to 120°C or 200°C, also
voltage measurement up to 80 V DC
• 1 x speed controller input, 1 x speed controller output for power reduction due to low voltage of individual cells
• 1 x current, voltage and capacity measurement, up to 150 A (peak 1
sec. 320 A) and up to 60 V
• 1 x individual cell monitoring for 2 - 14S Lithium batteries (LiPo, LiIo,
LiFe)
• etc. see product at www.graupner.de/en
Appendix 195
Graupner|SJ HoTT magnetic rev-count sensor
Order No. 33616
Graupner|SJ HoTT Smart-Box
Order No. 33700
Graupner|SJ HoTT USB interface
Order No. 7168.6
For connection to the General-Engine module (Order No. 33610),
General-Air module (Order No. 33611) or Electric-Air module (Order
No. 33620).
The number of blades must be selected beforehand in the module’s
Telemetry menu.
A vast range of different functions combined in a single device: that’s
what destines the SMART-BOX to be your intelligent companion in
future. Whether you want to display telemetry data in real time, or
enter changes to your HoTT system, the large-area screen with 8 x 21
characters makes the task simple. The flexible Smart-Box includes an
integral buzzer for generating audible signals and warnings for even
greater flexibility and practicality.
The installation set supplied makes it easy to mount the unit on the
support bars of hand-held transmitters, allowing you to position it in
such a way that you can read off telemetry data in real time while you
control your model.
The user-update facility ensures that the SMART-BOX is always up-todate, and provides a route for expanded functions in future.
• Transmitter voltage display with • Country setting
user-variable warning threshold
• Signal quality
• Range check
• Receiver temperature
• Receiver voltage
• Servo neutral position
• Servo reverse
• Servo travel
• Cycle time
• Channel swap
• Fail-Safe settings
• Mixer settings
• Servo test
Dimensions: approx. 76 mm x 72 mm x 17 mm (L x W x H)
Weight: approx. 55g
This USB interface is required in conjunction with the adapter lead,
Order No. 7168.6A (available separately) for updating receivers and
sensors. The mx-16 HoTT transmitter can be updated directly using
the USB lead included in the interface set.
Graupner|SJ HoTT optical rev-count sensor
Order No. 33615
For connection to the General-Engine (Order No. 33610), General-Air
(Order No. 33611) or Electric-Air module (Order No. 33620).
The number of blades must be selected beforehand in the module’s
Telemetry menu.
196 Appendix
Graupner|SJ HoTT adapter lead
Order No. 7168.6A
This adapter lead is required in conjunction with the USB interface,
Order No. 7168.6 (available separately) for updating receivers and
sensors. The mx-16 HoTT transmitter can be updated directly using
the USB lead included in the interface set.
mx-10 HoTT - No. 33110, mx-12 HoTT - No. 33112,
mx-16 HoTT - No. 33116, mx-20 HoTT - No. 33124,
mc-16 HoTT - No. 33016, mc-20 HoTT - No. 33020,
mc-32 - No. 33032
GR-12S HoTT - No. 33505, GR-12 HoTT - No. 33506,
GR-16 HoTT - No. 33508, GR-24 HoTT - No. 33512,
GR-32 HoTT - No. 33516
2
Geräteklasse:
V1.7.1
Stefan Graupner, Managing Director
Stefan Graupner, Geschäftsführer
Measures for the efficient use of the radio frequency spectrum
§ 3 (2) (Article 3 (2))
Maßnahmen zur effizienten Nutzung des Frequenzspektrums
§ 3 (2) (Artikel 3 (2))
Graupner GmbH & Co. KG Henriettenstraße 94-96 D-73230 Kirchheim/Teck Germany
Tel: 07021/722-0
Fax: 07021/722-188
EMail: [email protected]
Kirchheim, 07. August 2012
0678
EN 300 328
Schutzanforderungen in Bezug auf elektromagnetische
Verträglichkeit § 3 (1) 2, Artikel 3 (1) b))
EN 301 489-1 V1.9.2
EN 301 489-17 V2.1.1
Protection requirement concernig electromagnetic compatibility
§ 3 (1) 2, Artikel 3 (1) b))
Health and safety requirements pursuant to § 3 (1) 1. (Article 3 (1) a))
Gesundheit und Sicherheit gemäß § 3 (1) 1. (Artikel 3 (1)a))
EN 60950-1:2006+A11:
2009+A1:2010+A12:
2011
Harmonised standards applied
Angewendete harmonisierte Normen:
complies with the essential requirements of § 3 and the other relevant provisions of the FTEG (Article 3 of the
R&TTE Directive).
den grundlegenden Anforderungen des § 3 und den übrigen einschlägigen Bestimmungen des
FTEG (Artikel 3 der R&TTE) entspricht.
Equipment class
declares that the product
erklärt, dass das Produkt:
Graupner GmbH & Co. KG
Henriettenstraße 94-96
D-73230 Kirchheim/Teck
Declaration of Conformity in accordiance with the Radio and Telecomunikations Terminal Equipment
Act (FTEG) and Directive 1999/5/EG (R&TTE)
Konformitätserklärung gemäß dem Gesetz über Funkanlagen und
Telekomunikationsendeinrichtungen (FTEG) und der Richtlinie 1999/5/EG (R&TTE)
Conformity declaration
Conformity declaration 197
FCC Information
Graupner|SJ mx-16 HoTT #33116
FCC ID: ZGZ-mx-16-20
FCC Label Compliance Statement
This device complies with Part 15C of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
WARNING:
Changes or modifi cations not expressly approved by
the party responsible for compliance could void the
user‘s authority to operate the equipment.
NOTE
This equipment has been tested and found to comply
with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to
Part 15C of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed
to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment
generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy
and, if not installed and used in accordance with the
instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio
communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this
equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or
television reception, which can be determined by turning
the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try
to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and
receiver.
198 FCC Information
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit
different from that to which the receiver is connected.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
RF Exposure Statement
This device has been evaluated to meet the FCC RF exposure requirement when used in combination with the
genuine Graupner|SJ HoTT accessoires and operated
with a minimum distance of 20 cm between the antenna
and your body.
Guarantee certificate
Servicestellen / Service / Service après-vente
http://www.graupner.de/en/service/servicepoints.aspx
Graupner Zentralservice
Graupner GmbH & Co. KG
Henriettenstrasse 94 - 96
D-73230 Kirchheim
[email protected]
Servicehotline
 (+49) 0 18 05 47 28 76*
Mo - Do: 09:15 - 18:00
Freitag:
09:15 - 16:00 Uhr
Belgie/Belgique/Nederland
Jan van Mouwerik
Slot de Houvelaan 30
NL 3155 Maasland VT
 (+31) 10 59 13 59 4
[email protected]
Luxembourg
Kit Flammang
129, route d’Arlon
L 8009 Strassen
 (+35) 23 12 23 2
[email protected]
Ceská Republika
Slovenská Republika
RC Service Z. Hnizdil
Letecka 666/22
CZ 16100 Praha 6 - Ruzyne
 (+420) 2 33 31 30 95
[email protected]
Schweiz
Graupner Service Schweiz
CD-Electronics GmbH
Kirchweg 18
CH-5614 Sarmenstorf
 (+41) 56 667 14 91
[email protected]
Espana
Anguera Hobbies
C/Terrassa 14
E 43206 Reus (Tarragona)
 (+34) 97 77 55 32 0
[email protected]
United Kingdom
Graupner Service UK
Brunel Drive
GB, NEWARK, Nottingham­shire
NG242EG
 (+44) 16 36 61 05 39
[email protected]
France
Graupner Service France
Gérard Altmayer
86, rue St. Antoine
F 57601 Forbach-Oeting
 (+33) 3 87 85 62 12
[email protected]
Italia
GiMax
Via Manzoni, no. 8
I 25064 Gussago
 (+39) 030 25 22 73 2
[email protected]
* 0.14 cent / minute from a
German Telecom land-line.
Calling price variations
possible for calls from cell
phones or from the land-lines
of other providers.
Wir gewähren auf dieses Erzeugnis eine Garantie von
This product is warrantied for
Sur ce produit nous accordons une garantie de
Die Fa. Graupner GmbH & Co. KG, Henriettenstraße 94 - 96,
D-73230 Kirchheim/Teck gewährt ab dem Kaufdatum auf
dieses Produkt eine Garantie von 24 Monaten. Die Garantie
gilt nur für die bereits beim Kauf des Produktes vorhandenen
Material- oder Funktionsmängel. Schäden, die auf Abnützung,
Überlastung, falsches Zubehör oder unsachgemäße Behandlung zurückzuführen sind, sind von der Garantie ausgeschlossen. Die gesetzlichen Rechte und Gewährleistunsansprüche
des Verbrauchers werden durch diese Garantie nicht berührt.
Bitte überprüfen Sie vor einer Reklamation oder Rücksendung
das Produkt genau auf Mängel, da wir Ihnen bei Mängelfreiheit
die entstandenen Unkosten in Rechnung stellen müssen.
24
Monaten
months
mois
Garantie-Urkunde
Warranty certificate / Certificat de garantie
mx-16 HoTT Set

Order No. 33116
Graupner GmbH & Co. KG, Henriettenstraße 94 - 96. D-73230
Kirchheim/Teck, Germany guarantees this product for a period
of 24 months from date of purchase. The guarantee applies
only to such material or operational defects witch are present
at the time of purchase of the product. Damage due to wear,
overloading, incompetent handling or the use of incorrect
accessories is not covered by the guarantee. The user´s legal
rights and claims under guarantee are not affected by this
guarantee. Please check the product carefully for defects before you are make a claim or send the item to us, since we are
obliged to make a charge for our cost if the product is found to
be free of faults.
Übergabedatum:
Date of purchase/delivery:
Date d’achat :
La société Graupner GmbH & Co. KG, Henriettenstraße 94-96,
D-73230 Kirchheim/Teck, accorde sur ce produit une garantie
de 24 mois à compter de la date d’achat. La garantie ne
s’applique qu’aux défauts de matériel et de fonctionnement
du produit acheté. Les dommages dus à une usure, à une
surcharge, à l’emploi d’accessoires non compatibles ou à une
manipulation non conforme sont exclus de la garantie. Cette
garantie ne remet pas en cause les droits légaux des consommateurs. Avant toute réclamation ou retour de matériel, vérifiez
précisément les défauts ou vices constatés, car si le matériel
est conforme et qu’aucun défaut n’a été constaté par nos
services, nous nous verrions contraints de facturer le coût de
cette intervention.
Firmenstempel und Unterschrift des Einzelhändlers:
Stamp and signature of dealer:
Cachet et signature du détaillant :
Name des Käufers:
Owner´s name:
Nom de I`acheteur :
Straße, Wohnort:
Complete address:
Adresse complète :
Guarantee certificate 199
H O P P I N G . T E L E M E T R Y . T R A N S M I S S I O N
GRAUPNER GMBH & CO. KG
POSTFACH 1242
D-73220 KIRCHHEIM/TECK
GERMANY
Modifications and availability reserved. Graupner products
are only available through model shops. We will gladly
inform you of your nearest stockist. We accept no liability
for printing errors.
www.graupner.de/en
Printed in Germany PN.RC-03a (V6de)
Although we have carefully checked the information contained in these instructions and
checked that it is correct, we can accept no liability of any kind for mistakes, incomplete
information and printing errors. Graupner reserves the right to alter the characteristics
and features of the software and hardware at any time and without prior notification.